Manual Nov

Amphion Integrated Controls System
User Manual
Customer References
Customer: KEPPEL FELS (ASTISOR S.A.)
Rig / Hull: CANTARELL I / B354
Tag Number: N/A
National Oilwell Varco References:

SO Number / Project Number: 171638+186 / 3970 C00-C01
Document Number: 10975496-FDD
Revision: 04
Volume:
www.nov.com
Document number 10975496-FDD
Revision 04
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
04 11.02.2016 For Information M. Littmann K. Martinez R. Gallegos

03 09.12.2015 For Information M. Littmann K. Martinez R. Gallegos
02 24.06.2014 For Information MSL KM RG
01 12.05.2014 For information MSL KM RG
Rev Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision Change Description

01 Initial Release
02 Addition of Customer and Vessel Name on Manual Cover
03 As Commissioned Updates
04 Additional As Commissioned Updates
www.nov.com
Document Number: 10975496-FDD TOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

Section
1 1 General Information (Chapter Not Applicable)
1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance
1 2.1 Procedures
1 2.2 Spare Parts List
2 3 Technical Documents & Drawings
2 3.1 General / Mechanical Drawings
2 3.2 System / Process Diagrams
2 3.3 Electrical / Instrument
2 3.4 Performance Data
2 4 Vendor Documentation (Chapter Not Applicable)
www.nov.com
Document Number: 10975496-FDD TOC 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Section
1 1 General Information
Chapter Not Applicable
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance
1 2.1 Procedures
www.nov.com
Document Number: 10975496-FDD TOC 2.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 02
Page: 1

Section
1 2.1 Procedures
Amphion Shipping and Preservation Requirements D801002013-SHP-001 02

Amphion Operator’s Guide – Grupo B354 16521509-MAN 01
Amphion Tool Controller Service Manual D811001117-MAN-001 02
Amphion Standard Technical Reference Manual D811000238-MAN-001 04
National Oilwell Varco Service Center Directory D811001337-DAS-001 06
www.nov.com
DWG NO. D801002013-SHP-001 SH 1 REV 02 TEXT DOCUMENT
APPLICATION REVISIONS
NEXT ASSY USED ON ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
REVISE ONLY IN MS WORD
Amphion Shipping and Preservation Requirements
© 2007 National Oilwell Varco NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO

THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED IN
ANY WAY WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF NATIONAL 1530 WEST SAM HOUSTON
OILWELL VARCO. NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO OWNS ALL
RIGHTS TO THIS WORK AND INTENDS TO ENFORCE ITS
PARKWAY NORTH
RIGHTS UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS AS A PUBLISHED HOUSTON, TX 77043
WORK
APPROVALS DATE AMPHION SHIPPING AND PRESERVATION
DRAWN C. GARCIA 12/7/09 REQUIREMENTS
CHECK R. GALLEGOS 12/7/09
SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO. REV
ENGINEER R. GALLEGOS 12/7/09 A D801002013-SHP-001 02
SCALE NONE D/N SHEET Page 1 of 2
Requirements for Packing, Shipping, Storage, and Preservation
General
1. All components contain computer equipment and/or electronic components. Do not expose to rain or other direct
moisture.
2. Store all components indoors in a location where temperature is between 10°C (50°F) and 30°C (86°F), and
humidity does not exceed 90%.
3. Do not drop any components.
1. Driller’s Workstation
1. Remove the HMI's from the workstation prior to shipment. Pack the HMI's separately; ensure that they are
adequately padded and protected from moisture.
2. Secure the chair and the HMI mounts in their transport positions using the hardware provided. There should
be an instruction placard mounted next to the weight indicator.
3. Put desiccant bags inside the left side arm assembly, the right side arm assembly, and the electronics j-box in
the center.
4. Wrap the workstation thoroughly in shrink wrap.
5. Crate securely and take other measures required for sea freight, if necessary.
6. The crate should be kept upright.
7. Upon arrival at the shipyard, the crate should be stored indoors in a climate-controlled environment, with
temperatures between 10°C (50°F) and 30°C (86°F), and humidity should not to exceed 90%.
2. Multi-Tool Control Cabinet

1. Place several desiccant bags inside the enclosure. Securely close the front door.
2. Wrap the MTC thoroughly in shrink wrap.
3. Crate securely and take other measures required for sea freight, if necessary. It is preferable to put the
cabinet in the crate on its back, but it is not required.
3. Stand-Alone Computers, J-boxes, and Sensors

1. These items will be packed by NOV for shipment. All items will be securely packed.
2. Crates requiring special handling due to containing sensitive equipment will be marked. Unless otherwise
marked, no special handling is required.

A D801002013-SHP-001 02
SCALE NONE SHEET Page 2 of 2
Amphion™
Operator’s Guide
Grupo B354
Grupo B354 Amphion Operator’s Guide
This document contains proprietary and confidential

information which is the property of National Oilwell Varco,
L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to National Oilwell Varco
hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited purposes only
and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in RIG SYSTEMS &
part, or use of this design or distribution of this information to AFTERMARKET
others is not permitted without the express written consent of 11000 Corporate Centre Drive
NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request or Houston, TX 77041
upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. This
document and the information contained and represented
herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
© National Oilwell Varco
Document Number Rev.
16521509-MAN 01
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Revision History
Monica Dale Andrew

01 07.10.2015 First Issue Maza Sanders Powell
Change Description
01 First Issue
Amphion™ GPL Statement

The Amphion drilling control system, covered by this manual, contains NOV proprietary software as well as third-party software that is licensed, or sublicensed, to
the user under GNU General Public License (GPL), which may provide for certain rights to the user relating specifically to such software. NOV will comply with the
GPL terms for as long as required by NOV’s license for such software (For example, if so required by NOV’s license to use the software in question, then at user’s
written request, NOV will furnish user with a copy of the source code for the third-party software by making that code available.).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall convey the right to utilize National Oilwell Varco trademarks, trade names, services, marks, or other National
Oilwell Varco proprietary materials without express written consent from NOV. Furthermore, you shall not have the right to publish the name of National Oilwell Varco
without prior written consent from NOV.
This software is provided with the prospect that it will be useful. However, NOV disclaims all warranties, representations, conditions, terms, etc., that are
not expressly stated in writing. This disclaimer includes, for example, any implied warranties, representations, conditions, and implied terms concerning
any of the following, regardless whether any of the foregoing is alleged to arise by law, by reason of custom or usage in the trade, by course of dealing,
or in any other manner: merchantability; fitness for a particular purpose; non-infringement; absence of viruses; results; workmanlike effort; non-
interference; and accuracy of informational content.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this software. If you did not receive the information, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. Alternatively, the GPL as published by the Free Software Foundation is available at:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html.
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page iii of x
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: General Information

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Personnel Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
General System Safety Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Proper Use of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Chapter 2: Amphion™ Overview

Main Features and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operator Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Touchscreen Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Workstation Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Left Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Right Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Main Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Alarms and Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Operator Tool Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Hook Load Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
(This Tool) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Joystick Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Back or Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Operator Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Choose Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Choose Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Language Translation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Clean Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Service Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Common Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
I/O Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Modbus Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
iii
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page iv of x
Table of Contents
Profibus Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Step 7 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Screen Communication Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
HTTP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Peers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Ownership Controls and Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Granting and Releasing Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Tool Controllers and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Optional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
RigSense and WITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Multi-System Integration (MSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Electronic Driller System™ (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Chapter 3: Alarms and Events

System Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Alarm and Event Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Alarm Acknowledgement and Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Alarm Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Alarm Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Chapter 4: Auxiliary
Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Power Slips Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cathead Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Torque and Pull Force Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Pull Force Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Defining Tong Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Defining a HC Torque Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Slow Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Select Cathead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Command Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Joystick Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Joystick Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
iv
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page v of x
Table of Contents
Rotary Support Table (RST) Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Torque and Speed Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Defining RST Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Zero Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Defining the RST Torque Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
RPM Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Lock Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
HPU Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Pressure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Motor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Rig Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Power Slips Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Joystick Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Auxiliary Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Cabin Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Wiper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Chapter 5: Chair (Workstation)

Workstation Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Tool Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Left Panel Switches and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Ownership Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Joystick Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Joystick Button and Slider Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Deadman Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Chair Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Deadman Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
DFSD Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Chair Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Multi-Tool Controller (MTC) Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Joystick Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Joystick Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Chair Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Hookload Gauge Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Calibration Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Chapter 6: Drawworks
Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Hook Load Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
v
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page vi of x
Table of Contents
Fault and Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Standpipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Park Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Brake Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Parking Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Derrick Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Block and Elevator Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Defining Block Travel Limit and Stop Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
High Travel Limit and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Low Travel Limit and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Drill Stop Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Block Speed Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Defining Maximum Block Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Lowering and Hoisting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Joystick Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Joystick Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Defining Hook Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Max Pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Drag Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Minimum Hook Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Weight on Bit and Hook Load Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Gauge Rotation Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Hook Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Zero WOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Gauge Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Hook Load Gauge Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Hook Load Gauge Full Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
AutoRotate WOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Hook Load Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Defining the Drawworks Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Mode Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Max Slow Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Slow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Slow Mode Joystick Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Slip & Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Bridge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
% Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Drag Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Zero Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Auto Driller Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Activating the Electronic Driller System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Activating or De-activating Autodrill Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Defining Parameter Setpoint Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Variable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Backup Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Operating with Backup Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
vi
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page vii of x
Table of Contents
Auto Driller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

Gain Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Filter Time Constant Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Shutdown Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Allow Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Auto Reamer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Pull Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Hoist Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Lower Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Auto Reaming Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Drilling Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Drawworks Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Auxiliary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Drive Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Drawworks Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Alarm and Fault Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Hook Load and Drum Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Alarms Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Motor Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Cooling Level, Chopper/DBR, and Ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Brake Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Capacity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Capacity Test Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Brake Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Brake Wear Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Gearbox Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Brake Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Drum and Block Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Motor/ VFD and Braking Resistor Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
DW Motor/Assigned VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Motor Winding Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
VFD Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Block Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
vii
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page viii of x
Table of Contents
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Full Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Elevator Position Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Hook Load Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Hook Load Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Standpipe Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Brake and Drum Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Brake Burnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Tool Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Enable or Disable an Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Hook Load Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Enable or Disable a Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Alarm Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Abnormal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Soft Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Category 2 Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
E-Stop (Category 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Chapter 7: Driller Auxiliaries

Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Pump Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Driller Auxiliaries Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Chapter 8: Mud Pumps

Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Mud Pumps Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Mud Pump Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
viii
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page ix of x
Table of Contents
Chapter 9: Power System

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Power System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Motor Control Center (MCC) Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Power Available Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Tool Power Available (General) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Power Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Chapter 10: Top Drive System (TDS)

Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Status Readings and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Drill Speed and Torque Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Slips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Speed and Torque Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Defining a Throttle Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Zero Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Defining a Drill Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Defining a Makeup Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Defining a Spin Speed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Defining a Spin Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Direction and Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Torque Wrench Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Make Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Break Out Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Elevator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Elevator Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Torque Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
IBOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Link Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Link Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Link Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Dolly Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
TDS Joystick Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Drill Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Link Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
ix
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page x of x
Table of Contents
Joystick Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Joystick Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Top Drive Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
TDS Motor Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Lube Motor and Blower Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
RTD Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Braking Resistor Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Dolly Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
ATOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Position Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Appendix A: Network Information

Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Opening a Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Command Descriptions and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Ping Command Switch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
IP Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Tracert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Nslookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Network Address Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
x
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
General Information 1
This section of the manual contains examples of Amphion

equipment, features, and operator interface screens, and
may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.
Conventions
This manual is intended for use by field engineering, installation, operation, and repair personnel.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein. National
Oilwell Varco® (NOV) will not be held liable for errors in this material, or for consequences arising
from misuse of this material.
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Notes, cautions, and warnings provide readers with additional information, and to advise the
reader to take specific action to protect personnel from potential injury or lethal conditions. They
may also inform the reader of actions necessary to prevent equipment damage. Please pay close
attention to these advisories.
The note symbol indicates that additional information is

provided about the current topics.
!
The caution symbol indicates that potential damage to
equipment or injury to personnel exists. Follow instructions
explicitly. Extreme care should be taken when performing
operations or procedures preceded by this caution symbol.
1-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
1 General Information Revision 01
Page 1-2 of 4
The warning symbol indicates a definite risk of

equipment damage or danger to personnel. Failure to
follow safe work procedures could result in serious or
fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment
damage, or extended rig down time.
Illustrations
Illustrations (figures) provide a graphical representation of equipment components or screen
snapshots for use in identifying parts or establishing nomenclature, and may or may not be drawn
to scale.
For component information specific to your rig configuration, see the technical drawings included
with your NOV documentation.
Safety Requirements
Operators should review and follow recommendations in NOV Product Bulletins for additional
information regarding safe operation, maintenance, and inspection criteria.
Failure to follow the recommendations in NOV Product

Bulletins may result in serious or fatal injury to
personnel, significant damage to equipment, and
extended rig downtime.
Reference: See http://www.nov.com/drilling/ for the NOV Product Information Bulletins and
Safety alerts.
NOV equipment is installed and operated in a controlled drilling rig environment involving
hazardous situations. Proper maintenance is important for safe and reliable operation. Procedures
outlined in NOV manuals are the recommended methods of performing operations and
maintenance.
!
To avoid injury to personnel or equipment damage,
carefully observe requirements outlined in this section.
1-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 1-3 of 4
Personnel Training
All personnel performing installation, operations, repair, or maintenance procedures on the
equipment, or those in the vicinity of the equipment, should be trained on rig safety, tool operation,
and maintenance to ensure their safety.
!
Personnel should wear protective gear during installation,
maintenance, and certain operations.
Contact the NOV Drilling Equipment training department for more information about equipment
operation and maintenance training.
Recommended Tools
Service operations may require the use of tools designed specifically for the purpose described.
NOV recommends that only those tools specified be used when stated. Ensure that personnel and
equipment safety are not jeopardized when following service procedures or using tools not
specifically recommended by NOV.
General System Safety Practices

The equipment discussed in this manual may require or contain one or more utilities, such as
electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, or cooling water.
!
Read and follow the guidelines below before installing
equipment or performing maintenance to avoid
endangering exposed persons or damaging equipment.
 Isolate energy sources before beginning work.

 Avoid performing maintenance or repairs while the equipment is in operation.
 Wear proper protective equipment during equipment installation, maintenance, or
repair.
Replacing Components
 Verify that all components (such as cables, hoses, etc.) are tagged and labeled
during assembly and disassembly of equipment to ensure correct installment.
 Replace failed or damaged components with NOV certified parts. Failure to do so
could result in equipment damage or injury to personnel.
1-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 1-4 of 4
Routine Maintenance
Equipment must be maintained on a routine basis. See the service manual for maintenance
recommendations.
!
Failure to conduct routine maintenance could result in
equipment damage or injury to personnel.
Proper Use of Equipment

NOV equipment is designed for specific functions and applications, and should be used only for its
intended purpose.
Service Centers
For a directory of NOV Service Centers, see NOV document number D811001337-DAS-001, titled
“Service Center Directory.” This document is located in the User Manual.
The link below provides after-hours contact information for emergencies or other equipment issues
requiring an immediate response by NOV service personnel.
http://www.nov.com/ContactUs/EmergencyContacts.aspx
1-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Amphion™ Overview 2
This section of the manual contains examples of Amphion

equipment, features, and operator interface screens, and
may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.
Main Features and Equipment

The Amphion system provides operators with control of drilling tools and processes from an
ergonomically-correct workstation. Usually located inside the driller’s cabin, the workstations offer
tool control and status information applicable to the operations being performed.
The LER and multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinets are considered safe areas for installing Amphion
components that carry no hazardous area classifications. Depending on your particular rig’s
configuration, it may contain variations of the following features and equipment:
 One or more operator workstations, equipped with touchscreens
 One or more multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinets
 Integrated operator interface application for National Oilwell Varco (NOV) and third-
party tools, systems, or processes, such as:
Alarm and Event System
Automated Drawworks System
Automated Roughneck
Bridge Racker and Tailing Arm
Casing Running Tool
Chair (Workstation) Diagnostics
Drawworks VFD Assignment Controls
Driller Auxiliaries
Fingerboard
Foxhole
Hydraulic BX Elevators
Hydraulic Cathead
Hydraulic Power Unit
Mud Pump Motor Assignment Controls
Motor Control Center (MCC)
Mud Pumps
2-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
2 Amphion™ Overview Revision 01
Page 2-2 of 42
PipeCat™
Pipe Racking System
Power Management System
Power Slips
Rotary Support Table
Silicon-Controlled Rectifiers (SCR)
Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) module
Multi-System Integration (MSI™) module
Top Drive System
Top Drive VFD Assignment Controls
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) System
RigSense® application, RigSense server

Zone Management System (ZMS)
 Engineering drawings
 Equipment service manuals
 Amphion tool controller service manual
 Amphion operator’s guide
 Amphion technical reference manual
2-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-3 of 42
Operator Workstation
The workstations are the user's interface to the control network and tools. A Wrap-Around™
workstation is shown here.
Located in the driller’s cabin, each workstation may contain:
 Amphion touchscreens (four shown here)
 Joysticks (two shown here)
 Two discrete switch control panels
 One chair (two styles shown here)
Standup/Sitdown Sitdown
Touchscreen Computers
Workstations include self-contained touchscreens that display tool control, drilling operation,
alarm, and status information. The Wrap-Around workstation can accommodate up to four
touchscreens, all with access to tools connected to the network.
2-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-4 of 42
Workstation Control Panels

Joysticks are used for tools that require controlled movement, such as the drawworks or the racker.
See section titled "Joysticks" on page 2-5.
Discrete switch controls are normally dedicated to frequently-used operations (such as opening
and closing the power slips or racker jaws).
While there are many possible combinations of controls and placement of the buttons and discrete
switches, two examples of workstation control panels are presented here. Specific controls and
their placement can vary widely from one rig to the next, depending on the customer’s needs.
Left Control Panel
Right Control Panel
2-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-5 of 42
Joysticks
Joysticks have a capacitive Deadman and holding the

joystick will activate the Deadman. Unless the override is
engaged, your hand must be physically around the joystick
handle in order to operate the equipment.
Left Joystick
The joystick mounted on the operator workstation’s left control panel can control:
 The top drive
 The mud pumps
Left Joystick Directional Control
Moving the joystick on the operator workstation’s left control panel can control the direction or
function of:
 The cathead
 The rotary table
2-5
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-6 of 42
Right Joystick
The joystick mounted on the operator workstation’s right control panel can control:
 The top drive
 The drawworks
 The power slips
Right Joystick Directional Control
Moving the joystick on the operator workstation’s right control panel can control the direction or
function of:
 The drawworks
 The top drive
The tool or tools that a joystick controls depends upon your particular rig configuration and tool
ownership. Tool ownership logic prevents the operator from taking ownership of both the
drawworks and the racker simultaneously. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-38.
Using the joystick to move the racker affects its destination, which varies depending on its current
mode (selected via the user interface).
2-6
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-7 of 42
If the joystick does not offer power slip controls, then the workstation’s control panel normally
contains a discrete switch for opening and closing the slips. This is in addition to touchscreen
controls.
If the joystick has the ability to control both the power slips and the drawworks, the workstation’s
control panel will not contain controls for opening and closing the power slips. However, the control
panel will contain a button that must be pressed in order to enable the power slips and allow the
operator to control the slips by using either the joystick or touchscreen controls.
See Chapter 4, titled "Auxiliary" and Chapter 6, titled

"Drawworks."
See section titled "Workstation Control Panels" on page 2-4.
Main Menu Navigation

This section of the operator’s guide provides a brief overview of the main components normally
included on the main menu navigation bar. See appropriately-titled sections below, and tool-
specific chapters for more detailed information about each tool’s menu and operator screens.
The navigation menu shown below displays along the bottom of most screens.
Active tool Navigation menu buttons
2-7
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-8 of 42
Alarms and Events

The main menu’s Alarms button blinks red when there is at least one active and unacknowledged
alarm. The button displays solid red when there is at least one active but already acknowledged
alarm. Otherwise, the button displays solid blue.
Press Alarms to display the tool Alarm menu.
The tool buttons blink red when there is at least one active and unacknowledged alarm for that
particular tool. The button displays solid red when there is at least one active but already
acknowledged alarm. Otherwise, the button displays solid blue.
Press the red tool button to display alarms associated with that tool. See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms
and Events" for more information.
2-8
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-9 of 42
Operator Tool Menus

Press Driller Tools to display the operator’s tool menu.
Current tool ownership status indicators display in the bottom left corner of each tool button (where
applicable). See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-38 for more information.
Press a button to select a tool and display its default operator screen. See tool-specific chapters in
this manual for more detail.
2-9
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-10 of 42
Hook Load Menu

Press Hook Load to display the Hook Load menu.
Press Hook Load to display the Hook Load Gauge screen.
The feedback hook load weight and weight on bit (WOB) readings are displayed on the analog
gauge, located in the center of the screen, and the digital readings are located in the top left and
right corners of the screen. The hook load reading is display only.
See tool-specific chapters in this manual for more detail.
2-10
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-11 of 42
(This Tool) Menu

The label on the tool menu button changes, depending upon the currently-selected tool. For
example, the top drive’s tool menu is labeled Top Drive.
Press the tool menu button to display its menu.
Most tools listed in the operator’s tool menu have tool-specific menus that normally include the
basic options shown here.
See section titled "Utility Menu"

on page 2-15.
See section titled "Common

Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-21.
See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms

and Events."
See section titled "Maintenance

Mode" on page 2-13."
See tool-specific chapter.
Press the Operator button to display the current tool’s operator screen.
See tool-specific chapters for more information about each

tool’s menu.
See sections below for information about each of the

above menu items.
2-11
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-12 of 42
Joystick Help
Press Joystick Help to display the Joystick Help screen.
Various joystick controls are labeled on the Joystick Help screen. The labels on the joystick
buttons and sliders change, depending upon the currently-selected tool. For example, the cathead
and rotary table controls are labeled in the image shown here.
See tool-specific chapters in this manual for more detail.
Back or Forward
Press Back or Forward to toggle between the current screen and the previous screen.
2-12
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-13 of 42
Maintenance Mode
Press <This Tool> --> Maintenance Mode to display the Maintenance Mode screen.
Press Active to engage maintenance mode for the appropriate tool controller (also referred to as
an "SBC"). Press Inactive to disengage maintenance mode. A green backlight indicates the
current selection.
Enable maintenance mode to engage tool override for maintenance purposes only.
Use with caution. Significant risk of equipment

damage and danger to personnel exists in
maintenance mode. Failure to observe and follow
proper safe working procedures could result in
serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant
equipment damage, and extended rig down time.
Controls are disabled at the operator workstation touchscreens when maintenance mode is
enabled.
From the diagnostic workstation (DWS) computer, select one of the following tools:
 Auxiliary (includes the Cathead, Power Slips, and Rotary Support Table)
 Top Drive (TDS)
2-13
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-14 of 42
Enabling Auxiliary maintenance mode places all auxiliary

tools into maintenance mode.
Operator Screens
Many tool screens contain common features shown in this section.
Operator Messages
Most tool screens contain messages for the operator that display along the bottom of the screen.
Keypads
Numeric keypads and alpha-numeric keyboards are pop-up windows that appear when the
operator presses a tool’s on-screen button, and is normally used to define a specific parameter for
a tool.
2-14
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-15 of 42
Utility Menu
Choose a tool then press Utility to display the Utility menu:
Choose Units
Choose a tool then press Utility --> Choose Units to display the Choose Units pop-up window.
Press the arrow up or down buttons to highlight and select a unit of measure.
Measurement units selected on this screen affect all

screens displayed on that particular touchscreen. Different
units of measure can be assigned to other touchscreens.
For example, one touchscreen can display metric, while
another displays U.S. measurements.
Press Close to return to the previous screen.
2-15
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-16 of 42
Choose Language
Choose a tool then press --> Utility --> Choose Language to display the Choose Language
pop-up window.
Pig Latin and English Russian and English
This screen provides a way for the operator to select English (default), or any other language (or
languages) that the operator screens are configured to support.
Press the arrow up or down buttons to highlight and select a language.
Languages selected here affect all screens displayed on

that particular touchscreen. Different languages can be
assigned to other touchscreens. For example, one
touchscreen can display Russian, while another displays
English.
2-16
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-17 of 42
Language Translation Editor

At the Choose Language pop-up window (see section titled "Choose Language" on page 2-16),
press Edit Translations to display the Language Translation Editor window.
Document General Add Delete Close
This window provides a way for the operator to edit the translations for languages other than
English, or add translations that are missing.
Translations are stored in the operator screens one phrase at a time. Any single-line string on a
screen has its own translation. (For example, the phrase “Drill Torque” is translated as a whole, as
opposed to word-by-word.)
Each screen document has its own set of translations.
Document
Press Document to display available translations for the last screen selected. (There may be no
translations if that particular screen has not been configured to include them.)
General
Press General to display general translations that apply to the navigation bar and other common
screens (for example, the diagnostic or alarm screens).
2-17
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-18 of 42
Add
Use this button to add a new translation:
1. Press Add to display the Add New Translation Key pop-up window.
2. Type the new translation into the space provided, then press Enter (or Enteray as
shown on the keyboard above).
The translation (“Home” in this example) appears in both the left and the right panes
of the Language Translation Editor window.
3. Press to select the new translation (in the bottom right pane) to display the keyboard
pop-up window again.
4. Type its translation as you want it to appear in that pane (see example shown
below).
2-18
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-19 of 42
5. Type the translation into the space provided, then press Enter to return to the
Language Translation Editor window.
Delete
Press Delete to delete an existing translation.
Close
Press Close to close the window.
Clean Screen
Choose a tool then press Utility --> Clean Screen to temporarily disable tool screens to allow
time for cleaning the touchscreen without accidentally pressing tool controls. Press Start to begin
the onscreen timer, which counts slowly backward from ten.
Press Start as many times as necessary, then press Return.
2-19
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-20 of 42
Service Pages
Service pages are not normally available from the operator workstation touchscreens, and
therefore are not addressed in detail in this manual.
Access the service pages from the touchscreen mounted in the multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinet.
The MTC touchscreen does not allow tool operation.
See the NOV document titled “Amphion Tool Controller Service Manual” for more information
about the service pages.
2-20
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-21 of 42
Common Diagnostics Menu
This section provides a general overview of the diagnostic

screens available through the operator interface. For more
detailed information about the tool controller service pages
interface, including advanced troubleshooting procedures,
see the NOV document titled “Amphion Tool Controller
Service Manual.”
Choose a tool then press Common Diagnostics to display the Common Diagnostics menu.
See general descriptions for each diagnostic screen in the sections below.
Press Close to return to the main menu.
2-21
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-22 of 42
I/O Diagnostic
Choose a tool then press Common Diagnostics --> I/O Diagnostic to display the I/O Diagnostic
screen.
The left side of the sample screen below contains buttons for selecting an I/O type (depending on
the currently-selected tool). Press to select and display information.
Item Name
I/O
Types
Information Sort buttons Current Value
 MOD: Modbus address. Information regarding commands originating from tools and
other Ethernet devices connected to the network.
 No Type: No communication method has been specified and no input/output is
expected at this location.
 DP1: Information from the first Applicom card on the first PROFIBUS DP network
(typically used for tools).
 NET: Information regarding commands originating from a touchscreen or control
panel.
 C2C: Controller-to-controller communication input devices only. The purpose of this
type is to receive input from the other controllers, not to send commands to them.
Press any of the sort buttons located along the bottom of the screen to sort information By Name,
Node, or Class.
Press the blue arrow up or down buttons to navigate through the diagnostic pages.
Press Back to return to the Common Diagnostics menu.
2-22
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-23 of 42
Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status

Choose a tool then press Common Diagnostics --> Controller-to-Controller Status to display
the Controller-to-Controller Status screen.
The controller graphic boxes display green to indicate normal communication, or red to indicate a
communication error. The controller name and current status display in the top left corner of the
controller graphic.
Press a controller box to display additional detail.
Code Message Comment
0 OK The other controller is functioning normally.
Client has not begun

The client was able to connect to the server, but
5632 receiving data from the
has not begun sending data.
server.
Client could not connect to its

5648 The other controller may not be running.
server.
2-23
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-24 of 42
Client believes that its server The other controller was connected and
5664
has stopped working. running normally, but has stopped running.
Modbus Status
Choose a tool then press Common Diagnostics --> Modbus Status to display the Modbus
Status screen.
The illustration shown here relates to the top drive. Green node graphics indicate that it is
operating and communicating properly; red indicates an alarm or communication error; gray
indicates the node is ignored.
Press a node to display detailed information related to its status (shown below).
The Node Status pop-up window lists all WebObjects on the controller with which the
communications node is associated. It also displays the value of each WebObject. The values are
live, and change as the values from the remote controller change.
2-24
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-25 of 42
Press the Node Status window to display the node’s Process Input image.
A process image is essentially a group of bits that the controller holds in its memory to maintain a
complete map of the current state of the inputs or outputs from a given communications node. The
Process Image pop-up window displays either all of the output or all of the input process image for
that communications subsystem mode.
Press Switch to Output Image to display the same information regarding the node’s output
image.
Press anywhere outside of the output image display to return to the Modbus screen.
Profibus Status
Choose a tool then press Common Diagnostics --> Profibus Status to display the Profibus
Network Status screen.
Green indicates the node is communicating through the Profibus network; red indicates the node
is not communicating through the network; yellow indicates the node is reporting diagnostic
information. The controller has not lost communication with the node, but the node may have a
problem.
2-25
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-26 of 42
The absolute encoder buttons normally display yellow at

startup, then turn green after approximately one minute.
Yellow is normal for emergency-stop (e-stop) conditions.
Press any node button to display a detailed node status pop-up window.
Node number
Status code
Profibus Status Codes
Code Message
0 Node is functioning normally
33 Node is not communicating with the network
36 Node is not configured
45 Dialog software is not memory-resident
47 Invalid board number
93 Driver is not accessible
255 IO_RefreshInput was not executed beforehand
2-26
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-27 of 42
Step 7 Status
Choose a tool then press Common Diagnostics --> Step 7 Status to display the Step 7 Status
screen.
This screen displays information from programmable logic controllers (PLCs). This Ethernet
communication protocol is not used on all communications systems.
Press any node to display additional information.
2-27
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-28 of 42
Press the status detail box to display the node’s input image.
Press the right arrow to display additional input image information, or press Switch to Output
Image to display the same information regarding the node’s output image.
Press anywhere outside of the output image display to return to the Step 7 Status screen.
2-28
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-29 of 42
Screen Communication Logs
Screen Communication Log troubleshooting screens in

this section are intended for use by trained NOV
technicians.
Choose a tool then press Common Diagnostics --> Screen Communication Logs to display
the default Screen Communication Logs window.
Press the tabs along the top of the window to display different communication information (see
general descriptions in the following sections).
Exceptions
The Exceptions window contains a list of errors that occurred during applet communications.
2-29
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-30 of 42
Controllers
Press Controllers to display the Controllers Communication Log window.
Amphion software communicates simultaneously with all the tool controllers connected to the
network. The Controllers Communication Log window displays basic information about each
tool controller, such as the name of the controller and the IP address used by each controller. This
window also displays when controllers appear and disappear from the network.
2-30
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-31 of 42
Tools
Press Tools to display the Tools Communication Log window.
The Tools Communication Log window displays basic information about each tool, such as the
controller name, a list of Web Object names, and the values for each of the Web Objects listed.
Press the Refresh Values button to refresh the values listed for the Web Objects.
Press the Tool drop-down arrow to display a list of tools.
Press a tool name to select a tool and display its Tools Communication Log window.
2-31
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-32 of 42
Alarms
Press Alarms to display the Alarms Communication Log window.
The Alarms Communication Log window displays basic information about each periodic alarm
update, including a date and time stamp for when an alarm update occurred.
2-32
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-33 of 42
Startup
Press Startup to display the Startup Communication Log window.
The Startup Communication Log window displays information about the process of starting up
the operator screens, collecting necessary information about the system, and assigning a profile.
2-33
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-34 of 42
HTTP Connections
Press HTTP Connections to display the HTTP Connections Communication Log window.
The HTTP Connections Communication Log window displays the last several messages
passed between the touchscreen software and the tool controllers.
2-34
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-35 of 42
Ownership
Press Ownership to display the tool Ownership Communication Log window.
The Ownership Communication Log window contains information about the tool ownership
system, such as a record of the ownership configuration file. Tool ownership is a built-in safety
feature, designed to prevent more than one operator from simultaneously controlling a tool. (See
section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-38.)
The top portion of this window contains information about each change in ownership state,
including a date and time stamp for when an ownership state change occurred.
Press the up or down arrows located at the top right portion of the window to scroll through the list
of ownership state changes.
2-35
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-36 of 42
Peers
Press Peers to display the Peers Communication Log window.
The Peers Communication Log window displays basic information, such as the peer ID number,
IP address, registry entry, customer name, and rig number.
2-36
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-37 of 42
Operator
Press Operator to display the Operator Communication Log window.
The Operator Communication Log window displays the commands passed between the
touchscreen software and the operator.
2-37
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-38 of 42
Tool Ownership
This section contains information about Amphion tool ownership, and is intended to provide rig
personnel with a basic understanding of the concept of tool ownership and how it affects rig
operations.
Amphion tools can be controlled from operator workstations using joysticks, discrete switches, and
touchscreen controls. For safety reasons, control of most tools is limited to one operator
(workstation) at a time.
All tools affected by Amphion tool ownership are “owned” by the system at startup. Consequently,
before a tool can be controlled from any workstation, the operator must submit an ownership
request by pressing the Ownership button located on the tool screen. Once a workstation
assumes ownership of a tool, that workstation retains ownership; subsequent ownership requests
from other workstations are invalid until ownership is released.
To prevent untimely operation shutdowns due to hardware

or power failures that affect workstation controls, the
controller releases tool ownership only from those
workstations affected by the failure. Hardware or power
failures that do not affect tool operation will not cause tool
ownership release.
Ownership Controls and Status

Where applicable, tool screens contain an Ownership button. The button’s color and text indicates
its ownership status.
 A green ownership button, displaying the word “Available,” indicates the tool is
available for ownership. Your station can assume ownership only if the button is
enabled, and the word “Take” appears in black text along the bottom of the button.
If the text “Ownership” appears in white, and the button is disabled, your station
cannot assume ownership of the tool. If you are unable to take ownership because
your station already has ownership of another conflicting tool, the name of that tool
appears in white text along the bottom of the button.
 An orange ownership button indicates that the tool is currently owned by one of
the operators. The text display inside of the button indicates the workstation that
currently owns the tool.
 A red ownership button indicates an emergency stop is engaged, and the tool is
unavailable.
2-38
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-39 of 42
Granting and Releasing Ownership

Where applicable, before granting tool ownership to a workstation, the controller verifies that the
following conditions are met:
 The IP address of the workstation requesting ownership has permission to control
the tool (see section titled "Tool Controllers and Security" on page 2-40).
 The tool is not owned by any other workstation.
When a tool is no longer required for the current operation, it should be released from ownership.
To release ownership of:
 A tool, press the Ownership button on the tool-specific HMI screen.
 All tools, press the Tool Ownership button on the workstation control panel.
To ensure safety of personnel and equipment during

periods of tool inactivity and prior to leaving the
workstation, release ownership of all tools and
equipment. Failure to follow this advisory may result in
serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant damage
to equipment, and extended rig downtime.
2-39
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-40 of 42
Tool Controllers and Security

An Amphion tool controller (sometimes referred to as an "ATC," or an "SBC") is an embedded
computer designed to run platform-independent software to control machinery in industrial
applications. The Amphion tool controller consists of a high-end processor with Ethernet
connectivity as the standard communication protocol, with optional Profibus hardware for tool
remote I/O communications where necessary.
Amphion controllers are traditionally located in safe area MTC cabinets, however certain situations
may require that they be installed in hazardous areas. In such cases, the appropriate certification
must be obtained, and they must be installed inside approved enclosures.
Administrative access to software stored on the tool controller is password protected to prevent
accidental modification to tool parameters or settings.
Optional Components
RigSense and WITS
RigSense is a stand-alone drilling instrumentation system used to provide drillers and other key
personnel with instant access to critical drilling data. It can display, plot, print, export, and archive
up to 255 channels of data, which can be retrieved and viewed over the entire life of the well.
RigSense transmits and receives Wellsite Information Transfer Specification (WITS) information.
WITS is a communication protocol that enables companies operating different computer systems
to share information using a standard format for data transfer.
RigSense can easily be tailored to any rig’s requirements, and the data can be viewed in either
time- or depth-based format.
See the MD Totco RigSense manual for more information.
Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™)

S-DAQ gathers data from rig sensors and equipment. Drilling parameters are displayed in realtime,
in both analog and digital formats. Each channel can be configured with alarm functions.
S-DAQ can apply algorithms to the data, then forward the information to applications such as
RigSense. S-DAQ and RigSense communicate using Ethernet.
Multi-System Integration (MSI)

Data for RigSense is supplied by MSI, which gathers data from sensors and equipment. It can
apply algorithms to the data, then forward the information to RigSense. MSI and RigSense
communicate using Ethernet.
See NOV document number 42TM62-33, titled "RigSense®/MSI User Manual" for more
information.
2-40
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 2-41 of 42
Electronic Driller System™ (EDS)

NOV’s Electronic Driller System is built into the drawworks and Amphion touchscreen control
systems.
EDS is designed to provide a constant drilling state at the bit, which cannot be achieved using
manual or other types of drawworks braking systems. The constant bit state is achieved through
closed-loop control of selected primary drilling parameters (such as weight on bit or delta
pressure), and the ability to regulate the disc brake for continuous feed of the drill line.
Continuously running secondary control parameters (rate of penetration and torque) provide
additional control necessary for a steady state during unexpected events, such as a drilling break
or stick-slip situation.
The driller can activate modes through the touchscreens, and adjust individual parameter
setpoints.
See product-specific NOV EDS documentation, and

Chapter 6, titled "Drawworks" for more information.
2-41
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 2-42 of 42
2-42
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Alarms and Events 3
This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator

interface screens and controls, and may or may not
represent your particular rig configuration.
System Alarms
The navigation menu bar’s Alarms button flashes red when there is at least one active and
unacknowledged alarm. The button displays solid red when there is at least one active, but already
acknowledged, alarm. Otherwise, the button displays solid blue.
When an alarm is triggered (and unacknowledged), the Alarms button flashes red on both the
navigation menu and tool menu (for tools that have an active alarm) as shown here.
Flashing Red = Active/Unacknowledged

Solid Red = Active/Acknowledged
Tool menu
Alarms button
Navigation menu
Alarms button
3-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
3 Alarms and Events Revision 01
Page 3-2 of 8
Press Alarms on the navigation menu to display the Alarms Menu. Flashing red tool buttons
indicate an active and unacknowledged alarm; solid red indicates an active, but acknowledged
alarm for that tool. Tools that have no active or unacknowledged alarms display solid blue.
Active/unacknowledged
alarm (flashing red)
Alarms Menu
3-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 3-3 of 8
Alarms and Events 3
Press a button to select a tool from the Alarms Menu, or choose a tool, and select Alarms to
display the Alarm Messages window.
The alarm system displays and stores the most recent 200 alarms for the currently-selected tool.
!
All alarm data clears when electrical power is removed
from the control system.
Alarm Message Display

 Red line items indicate that the alarm condition is active, and the alarm itself has not
been acknowledged.
 Yellow line items indicate that the alarm was acknowledged, but the alarm condition
has not been corrected.
 Orange line items indicate that the alarm condition was corrected, but has not been
acknowledged.
 Gray historical line items indicate that the alarm was acknowledged, and the
condition causing the alarm state was corrected.
 Blue line items are events of interest that have occurred, but do not indicate an
alarm condition.
3-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 3-4 of 8
Alarm and Event Sort

The alarms display (Default Sort) in the following order:
1. Unacknowledged/active alarms
2. Unacknowledged/inactive alarms
3. Acknowledged/active alarms
4. Acknowledged/inactive alarms
5. Events
Within each category, the alarms are sorted by:
1. Active Date (the date and time the alarm was triggered)
2. Inactive Date (the date and time the alarm condition was corrected)
3. Description (alphabetically by description)
Press any of the Sort buttons (located along the top of the screen) to sort by description, active
date, or inactive date.
 The Description column displays a general description of the alarm.
 The Active Date column displays the date and time the alarm was triggered.
 The Inactive Date column displays the date and time the alarm was cleared.
 The Acknowledged column displays the date and time the alarm was
acknowledged.
Alarm Acknowledgement and Detail

Press the Acknowledge Page button (located on the sort bar along the top of the Alarms screen)
to acknowledge all alarms currently displayed on the screen.
Press any individual alarm to display more detail.
3-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 3-5 of 8
Alarms and Events 3
The alarm detail includes an alarm ID, a description of the alarm condition, the date and time that
the alarm was tripped, cleared, and acknowledged, as well as its group, priority, and status.
The alarm shown here has not been acknowledged. Press Acknowledge to do so, then press
Close. The alarm displays yellow to indicate that it has been acknowledged (however, the alarm
condition remains active).
Press the yellow alarm line item again to view its details if necessary.
Press Close to return to the Alarms window.
3-5
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 3-6 of 8
Alarm Setup
Depending on your particular rig configuration, alarms can

be set for certain items on some tool screens. See tool-
specific chapters to determine whether a particular tool
screen offers this feature.
Certain tool screens may contain gauges, bar graphs, or digital readings that have alarm setup
capabilities. This depends on your specific rig configuration.
Press the gauge, bar graph, or digital reading to display the Alarm Configuration pop-up window.
You can set four alarm levels: high-high, high, low, or low-low.
Press Change Level to display the pop-up keypad. Define the alarm value, then press Set to close
the keypad.
Click Enable or Disable to turn the alarm on or off.
Press the description’s Change button to display the keyboard pop-up window. Type a brief
description of the alarm into the space provided, then press Enter to close the keyboard.
Press Close to close the Alarm Configuration pop-up window and save the values.
Press Turn Beeper Off to disengage the alarm horn inside the cabin. It is activated when the
alarm level reaches high-high or low-low.
3-6
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 3-7 of 8
Alarms and Events 3
Alarm Displays
Alarms display on the operator screen. For example, when the reading on a gauge reaches the
user-defined high alarm level (but remains below the high-high range), the graph or gauge
background displays yellow.
The same is true if the reading reaches the low range (but remains above the low-low range).
If the reading reaches the user-defined high-high range, or falls into the low-low range, the
background displays red, and the touchscreen computer (or HMI) beeps.
Alarm Sounds
Press the gauge, bar graph, or digital reading to display the Alarm Configuration pop-up window.
Disable the beeper by pressing the Turn Beeper Off button.
3-7
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 3-8 of 8
3-8
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Auxiliary 4
Operator Screen
Press Driller Tools --> Auxiliary to display the Auxiliary operator screen.
Tool Ownership
Press the Ownership button, located in the bottom right corner, to display the Ownership Control
window.
Assume ownership of the catheads, rotary support table (RST), and slips to enable controls. See
section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-38. Press OK to return to the operator screen.
4-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
4 Auxiliary Revision 01
Page 4-2 of 18
Power Slips Enable

Once ownership is taken, push the Slips Enable button, located on the driller chair’s left control
panel, to activate slips controls from the right joystick.
Slips Enable
See section titled "Joystick Help" on page 4-7.
Status Displays
Status displays are located along the right portion of the Auxiliary operator screen.
4-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-3 of 18
Auxiliary 4
Status displays indicate the current state for each of the following:
 Slips Open/Closed: Green indicates the current state of the slips. See section
titled "Power Slips Controls" on page 4-13.
 RST High Grease: Green indicates a RST high grease level condition exists; gray
indicates a high grease level condition does not exist.
 Maintenance Mode: Yellow indicates maintenance mode is active; gray indicates
maintenance mode is not active. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 4-
17.
 RST Linear Lock On: Yellow indicates the RST linear lock is on; gray indicates the
RST linear lock is not on. See section titled "Lock Controls" on page 4-11.
 HPU Low Level: Yellow indicates the HPU level has reached or fallen below the
low level range; gray indicates a normal state.
 HPU High Temp: Yellow indicates the HPU temperature has reached or exceeded
the high temperature range; gray indicates a normal state.
 HPU Override PB: Yellow indicates the local HPU override pushbutton has been
pressed; gray indicates the local override pushbutton has not been pressed.
 RST Pressure: Red indicates the RST pressure has fallen below an acceptable
range; gray indicates a normal state.
 Slips Pressure: Red indicates the slips pressure has fallen below an acceptable
range; gray indicates a normal state.
 RST Low Grease: Red indicates the RST grease level has fallen below an
acceptable range; gray indicates a normal state.
 HPU Low Low Level: Red indicates the HPU level has reached or fallen below the
low low level range; gray indicates a normal state.
 HPU High High Temp: Red indicates the HPU temperature has reached or
exceeded the high high temperature range; gray indicates a normal state.
 HPU Estop: Red indicates an active HPU E-stop; gray indicates the HPU E-stop is
not active.
4-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-4 of 18
Cathead Controls
Torque and Pull Force Displays
Vertical Torque and Pull Force graphs display on the top left portion of the Auxiliary operator
screen.
Digital readings are represented by blue or green bars that rise and fall to indicate the current
values. Black markers indicate the current setpoint values.
Pull Force Setpoint

The system calculates the Pull Force Setpoint value, dividing the HC torque setpoint by the tong
length to define the appropriate hydraulic pressure required to achieve the specified line pull value.
If the operator presses Pull before the closed loop control system reaches the appropriate
pressure value, an interlock message displays ("pressure setpoint not reached"). Once the
pressure setpoint is reached, the interlock clears, and the pull can continue normally. During the
actual pull operation, the pressure output is static, so the loop is inactive.
4-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-5 of 18
Auxiliary 4
Defining Tong Length

The Tong Length button is located in the top left portion of the Auxiliary operator screen. Press
Tong Length to display its keypad.
Define the cathead tong length value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Defining a HC Torque Setpoint
Define the tong length value before defining the HC torque

setpoint value.
The HC Torque button is located in the top left corner of the Auxiliary operator screen. Press HC
Torque to display its keypad.
Define the cathead torque setpoint value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the
keypad. Use the blue arrow up or down buttons located at the bottom of the Torque graph to
incrementally increase or decrease the HC Torque value.
4-5
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-6 of 18
Slow Speed
The Speed - Slow toggle button is located in the top center portion of the Auxiliary operator
screen. Press the Speed - Slow toggle button to operate the cathead at a slower speed during
pull-in operations. Slow mode has no effect on pay-out operations; it is automatically energized
during the first second to prevent the line from snapping (due to tension being released too
quickly) then de-energized to allow pay out at normal speed.
A green backlight indicates slow mode is active. Press Speed - Slow again to disable slow mode.
Select Cathead
The Select Cathead controls are located underneath the Speed - Slow button.
Press the Select Cathead - Make Up or Break Out button. A green backlight indicates the current
selection.
Command Controls
The Command controls are located underneath the Select Cathead controls.
Press the Command - Pay or Pull button to define the direction of the cathead. A green backlight
indicates the current selection.
This function may also be controlled using the left joystick. See section titled "Joystick Help" on
page 4-7.
4-6
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-7 of 18
Auxiliary 4
Joystick Help
Press Joystick Help, located on the main menu bar, to display the Joystick Help screen.
Various joystick controls are labeled on the Joystick Help screen. The Cathead and Rotary Table
are controlled with the left joystick, and the Power Slips are controlled with the right joystick (as
shown above).
The driller must have ownership of the auxiliary tools in

order to see the Cathead, Rotary Table, and Power Slips
control labels on the joystick help screen.
See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 4-1 for more

information.
4-7
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-8 of 18
Joystick Tool Menu

Press the Joystick Help button, located on the main menu bar next to Hook Load, to display the
Joystick tool menu.

on page 2-15.

Press Back, located on the main menu bar, to return to the previous Auxiliary screen.
4-8
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-9 of 18
Auxiliary 4
Rotary Support Table (RST) Controls

Torque and Speed Displays
Vertical Torque and Speed (RST throttle) graphs display at the top center of the Auxiliary
operator screen.
values. Black markers indicate the current operator-defined setpoint values.
Defining RST Throttle

The RST Throttle button is located above the Speed (RPM) graph. Press RST Throttle to display
its keypad pop-up window.
Define the RST throttle (speed) value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Use the blue arrow up or down buttons located at the bottom of the Speed graph to incrementally
increase or decrease the RST Throttle value.
4-9
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-10 of 18
Zero Throttle
The Zero - Throttle button is located in the top right portion of the Auxiliary operator screen.
Press the Zero - Throttle button to remove throttle from the rotary support table and reduce its
speed to zero rpm. A green backlight indicates zero throttle is active.
Defining the RST Torque Setpoint

The RST Torque button is located in the top center portion of the Auxiliary operator screen. Press
RST Torque to display its keypad.
Define the drill torque limit value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. Use
the blue arrow up or down buttons located at the bottom of the Torque graph to incrementally
increase or decrease the RST Torque value.
4-10
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-11 of 18
Auxiliary 4
RPM Override
The RPM - Override button is located to the right of the Zero - Throttle button.
Press and hold the RPM - Override button to override the current operator-defined speed setpoint
for the rotary support table and allow the rpm to increase. A green backlight indicates override is
active.
!
Pressing the RPM Override button could cause equipment
damage.
Releasing the RPM - Override button will automatically slow the rpm back to the operator-defined
speed setpoint.
Lock Controls
The lock controls are located underneath the RPM - Override button.
Press the Lock - Off or On button to set the rotary support table linear lock mode:
 Press On to engage the linear lock.
 Press Off to disengage the linear lock.
A green backlight indicates the current selection.
!
Although engaging the lock prevents the RST from turning,
it may move slightly until the lock is secure.
4-11
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-12 of 18
Direction
The rotary support table Direction controls display in the right center portion of the Auxiliary
operator screen.
Press Direction - Forward or Reverse to define the rotary support table spin direction. A green
backlight indicates the current selection.
This function may also be controlled using the left joystick. See section titled "Joystick Help" on
page 4-7.
HPU Controls
Pressure Display
A vertical HPU Pressure graph displays in the bottom left portion of the Auxiliary operator screen.
A digital reading is represented by a green bar that rises and falls to indicate the current pressure
value.
Motor Controls
Motor controls for the HPUs are located to the right of the Pressure graph display.
Press the On/Off toggle button to control the HPUs. A green backlight indicates the HPU is on; a
gray backlight indicates the HPU is off.
4-12
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-13 of 18
Auxiliary 4
Rig Air Pressure

A vertical Rig Air Pressure graph displays in the bottom center portion of the Auxiliary operator
screen.
A digital reading is represented by a green bar that rises and falls to indicate the current rig air
pressure value.
Power Slips Controls

The power slips controls are located in the bottom right portion of the Auxiliary operator screen.
Press the Command - Open or Close button to open or close the power slips. A green backlight
4-13
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-14 of 18
Joystick Controls
The powers slips can also be controlled using the right joystick.
 Press the Power Slips Open button to open the power slips.
 Press the Power Slips Close button to close the power slips.
The Slips Enable button must be pressed to activate the slips controls from the right joystick. See
section titled "Power Slips Enable" on page 4-2.
Messages
Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.
4-14
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-15 of 18
Auxiliary 4
Auxiliary Tool Menu

Press the Auxiliary button, located on the main menu bar, to display the Auxiliary tool menu.

on page 2-15.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and

Events."

Mode" on page 4-17.
See section titled "Cabin Controls"

on page 4-16.
See section titled "Operator

Screen" on page 4-1.
4-15
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-16 of 18
Cabin Controls
Press Auxiliary --> Cabin Controls to display the Cabin Controls screen.
Wiper Controls
The Wiper (1-3) controls are used to control each of the wipers.
Press Wiper - Slow, Fast, Clean, or Spray to select a wiper mode:
 Press Slow to run the wiper in slow mode.
 Press Slow again to stop the wiper.
 Press Fast to run the wiper in fast mode.
 Press Fast again to stop the wiper.
 Press Clean to run the wiper at a selected speed while also spraying wiper solution.
For example, press Slow and then Clean to run the wiper in slow mode while
spraying wiper solution.
 Press and hold Spray to discharge the wiper solution.
Messages
4-16
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 4-17 of 18
Auxiliary 4
Maintenance Mode
Press Auxiliary --> Maintenance Mode to display the Maintenance Mode screen.
Press Auxiliary SBC - Active to engage maintenance mode for all auxiliary tools. Press Auxiliary
SBC - Inactive to disengage maintenance mode. A green backlight indicates the current
selection.
See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-13.
4-17
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 4-18 of 18
4-18
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Chair (Workstation) 5
Workstation Status Screen

Press Driller Tools --> Driller Chair to display the driller’s (default) Chair Status screen.
Tool Signals
Green tool signals indicate the current tool operation or the position of the switch or joystick.
When the operator is not actuating the switch or button, the signal display is gray.
5-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
5 Chair (Workstation) Revision 01
Page 5-2 of 12
Green signal displays also confirm that the signal from the discrete switch to the workstation’s
remote I/O and tool controller was successfully received. Failure to display green when the
workstation’s switch or button is actuated indicates a faulty switch or I/O point.
See section titled "Operator Workstation" on page 2-3 for

information about workstation controls.
Left Panel Switches and Buttons

The ADS, Slips, and TDS status displays are located on the left center portion of the Chair Status
screen. Their controlling switches and buttons are located on the left panel of the driller chair.
Status indicators display green to indicate the current selection.
Ownership Release
The Ownership - Release All status display is located on the right center portion of the Chair
Status screen.
The Ownership - Release All indicator displays green when the Tool Ownership button is
pressed on the right panel of the driller’s chair; otherwise, it displays gray. See section titled
"Granting and Releasing Ownership" on page 2-39.
5-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 5-3 of 12
Joystick Status
The Left and Right Joystick displays are located along the top portion of the Chair Status
screen. A green joystick axis background indicates the joystick axis is in use. A gray joystick axis
background indicates the joystick axis is not in use.
The yellow indicator on the graphs displays the current position of the joystick. If the display does
not depict the correct position (for example, if the joystick is pressed forward, but the yellow
indicator is not at the top of the y-axis), check for active joystick alarms. (See section titled
"Joystick Help" on page 5-8)
Joystick Button and Slider Displays
Buttons
Slider
Buttons display green to indicate that the associated button on the joystick is depressed; black
indicates an idle state; red indicates a fault or alarm state.
Sliders display realtime movement when the associated slider on the joystick is moved; red
indicates a fault or alarm state.
5-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 5-4 of 12
Deadman Displays
!
Joysticks have a capacitive Deadman and holding the
joystick will activate the Deadman. Unless the override is
engaged, your hand must be physically around the joystick
handle in order to operate the equipment.
The Deadman indicators are located in the top left and right portions of the Chair Status screen.
The Deadman indicators display Active in green to indicate that the Deadman is engaged;
InActive indicates the Deadman is not engaged.
Chair Status Displays

The chair status displays are located along the top right portion of the Chair Status screen.
Status indicators display the following information:

 PS - 24 V DC (1-3): Green indicates the 24-volt DC power supplies are working
properly; red indicates a fault state.
 Ethernet Switch (1 and 2): Green indicates the Ethernet switches are
communicating properly; red indicates a fault state.
 DF Tools EStop: Red indicates the emergency stop is engaged; green indicates
the emergency stop is not engaged.
5-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 5-5 of 12
Deadman Override
The Deadman Override buttons, located in the center left and right portions of the Chair Status
screen, are back ups to the capacitive deadman on the joysticks.
The left and right joystick handles (also referred to as a "capacitive deadman") must be physically
held in order to operate the drawworks, unless the override is engaged.
Press and hold the Deadman Override to operate the joystick without regard to the capacitive
deadman.
DFSD Status
The DFSD Status displays are located along the bottom of the (default) Chair Status screen.
Red displays indicate the emergency stop is engaged; green indicates the emergency stop is not
engaged. The text next to the display indicates the emergency stop type and location.
5-5
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 5-6 of 12
Chair Adjustment
The Chair Adjustment button is located in the bottom right portion of the Chair Status screen.
Press Chair Adjustment to display the Chair Adjustment controls. A blue backlight indicates the
current selection.
Press a button to adjust the chair as follows (descriptions are for buttons displayed beginning at
the top row, then from left to right):
 Press the Traverse Forward or Traverse Backward button to move the entire chair
forward or backward.
 Press the Up or Down button to increase or decrease the chair height.
 Press the Lean Forward or Lean Backward button to move the seat back forward
or backward.
 Press the Rotate Seat back Up or Rotate Seat back Down button to lift the chair
up from the back of the chair or to lower the seat back.
 Press the Left or Right button to rotate the chair in a clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction.
 Press the Rotate Seat front Up or Rotate Seat front Down button to tilt the seat
front up or down.
 Press the Footrest Up or Footrest Down button to increase or decrease the
footrest height.
5-6
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 5-7 of 12
Multi-Tool Controller (MTC) Status

The MTC Status button is located in the bottom right portion of the Chair Status screen. Press
MTC Status to display the MTC Status screen. A blue backlight indicates the current selection.

 <tool> OLM: Green indicates proper communication with the OLM; red indicates a
fault state.
 Ethernet Switch (1-4): Green indicates the Ethernet switches are communicating
 PS - 24 V DC (1-5): Green indicates the 24-volt DC power supplies are working
 Converter (MSI and Rig Sense): Green indicates the converters are
communicating properly; red indicates a fault state.
 Temperature: Displays current internal temperature for the MTC enclosure.
Messages
5-7
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 5-8 of 12
Joystick Help
Various joystick controls are labeled on the Joystick Help screen. The joysticks have a capacitive
Deadman, and holding the joystick will activate the Deadman.
See section titled "Joysticks" on page 2-5 for more

information.
5-8
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 5-9 of 12
Joystick Tool Menu

Joystick tool menu.

on page 2-15.

Press Back, located on the main menu bar, to return to the previous Chair Status screen.
5-9
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 5-10 of 12
Chair Tool Menu

Press the Driller Chair button, located on the main menu bar, to display the workstation menu.

on page 2-15.


and Events."
See section titled "Hookload

Gauge Calibration" on page 5-11.
See section titled "Workstation

Status Screen" on page 5-1.
5-10
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 5-11 of 12
Hookload Gauge Calibration

Press Driller Chair --> Hookload Gauge Calibration to display the Hookload Gauge
Calibration screen.
!
This process calibrates the value displayed on the operator
workstation’s hookload gauge. It does not affect calibration
of the hookload sensors themselves. Use this calibration
procedure only if the workstation gauge does not
correspond to the values displayed on the Drawworks
screen. See Chapter 6, titled "Drawworks."
Press Start Calibration to start the hookload gauge calibration process.

Follow the screen prompt to complete the calibration process.
Press Reject to stop the calibration process.
5-11
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 5-12 of 12
Calibration Status Displays

The calibration status displays are located in the top right portion of the Hookload Gauge
Calibration screen.

 Calibration Active: Green indicates calibration is active; gray indicates calibration
is not active.
 Calibration Succeeded: Green indicates calibration succeeded; gray indicates
calibration has not succeeded.
 Calibration Aborted: Red indicates calibration has aborted; gray indicates
calibration has not aborted.
Messages
5-12
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Drawworks 6
Operator Screen
Press Driller Tools --> Drawworks to display the Drawworks operator screen.
Tool Ownership
Assume ownership of the drawworks to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on
page 2-38.
Hook Load Reading

The current hook load weight displays in the top left portion of the Drawworks operator screen.
A yellow backlight indicates the drawworks is operating on a single hook load sensor; a red
backlight indicates all hook load sensors are faulted or disabled; a white backlight indicates a
normal state with no fault. See section titled "Hook Load Sensors" on page 6-65.
Also, see section titled "Weight on Bit and Hook Load Gauge" on page 6-15.
6-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
6 Drawworks Revision 01
Page 6-2 of 78
Fault and Status Displays

Fault and status displays are located along the right portion of the Drawworks operator screen.

 E-Stop: Red indicates a category 0 emergency stop is detected; gray indicates a
normal state.
 CAT2 Stop: Red indicates a category 2 emergency stop is detected; gray indicates
a normal state.
 Soft Trip: Red indicates a drawworks soft trip is detected; gray indicates a normal
state.
 Chair System: Red indicates a fault is detected with the workstation controls; gray
indicates a normal state.
 Drive System: Red indicates a fault is detected in the drive system; gray indicates
a normal state.
 Brake System: Red indicates a fault is detected in the brake system; gray indicates
a normal state.
 Other Alarms: Red indicates an auxiliary fault; gray indicates a normal state.
 Override: Red indicates the override is engaged; gray indicates a normal state.
There is a Drawworks Override button located on the left panel on the driller’s
chair. Pushing and holding the Drawworks Override button allows for movement
beyond the upper limit and lower limits. It also doubles as an Alarms Reset button.
 Power Limit: Red indicates loss of communication (and thus ability to limit power)
with the power system SBC; gray indicates power limit is not active; yellow
indicates power is being actively limited. See Chapter 9, titled "Power System."
 SAB Deployed: Yellow indicates the service access basket (SAB) is not in its home
position; gray indicates it is in its home position. Upon initial deployment, the
drawworks will stop. Drawworks speed will be limited to 10% of the operator-defined
speed setting after the operator centers the joystick.
 Tool Interlock: Red indicates that further tool movement is prevented by an active
interlock; gray indicates a normal state.
6-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-3 of 78
Drawworks 6
Also, see section titled "Alarm Definitions" on page 6-77,

and Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events."
Standpipe
The current Standpipe pressure is displayed in the top right portion of the Drawworks operator
screen.
The standpipe psi is display only.
Park Status
The current Park Status is displayed in the top right corner of the Drawworks operator screen.
The park status is display only.
Brake Pressures
The parking and service brake graphs are located in the bottom left portion of the Drawworks
operator screen and display current brake pressure.
 Park Brake (1 and 2): A yellow bar rises and falls to show brake pressure feedback
for each parking brake.
 Service Brake (1 and 2): A light blue bar rises and falls to show brake pressure
feedback for each service brake.
6-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-4 of 78
Parking Brake Controls

periods of drawworks inactivity and prior to leaving
the workstation, engage the drawworks parking brake
and then release ownership of the drawworks. Failure
to follow this advisory may result in serious or fatal
injury to personnel, significant damage to equipment,
and extended rig downtime.
See section titled "Granting and Releasing

Ownership" on page 2-39 for more information.
This function is controlled using the driller chair’s left control panel Parking Brake discrete switch
(Off/Auto or On).
Parking Brake
6-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-5 of 78
Drawworks 6
Derrick Graph
The derrick graph displays in the left portion of the Drawworks operator screen. The derrick graph
contains markers for both high and low travel limits and stops; and contains a yellow drill stop
point marker.
High travel limit

High travel stop
Proximity Switches
Elevator position
Low travel stop
Low travel limit
Drill stop point
Proximity Switch indicators display red to indicate a fault or open circuit state.
Block and Elevator Position

The Top of Block and the Elevator Position displays are located to the right of the derrick graph.
Red block and elevator position backgrounds indicate the block requires calibration. White
indicates the system is calibrated and accurate. See section titled "Block Calibration" on page 6-
54.
6-5
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-6 of 78
Defining Block Travel Limit and Stop Values

The Drawworks operator screen contains controls for defining block travel limits and stops; and
displays the high travel operator-defined values.
High Travel Limit and Stop

The High Travel Limit and Stop controls display in the top left portion of the Drawworks operator
screen. Press High Travel Limit or High Travel Stop to display the appropriate keypad.
Highest block height
High block stop point
Use the high travel limit keypad to define the maximum block height value, then press Set to
confirm the value and close the keypad.
Use the high travel stop keypad to define the high travel stop value. The block stops here before
reaching its maximum travel limit. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
To continue travel to the high travel limit after stopping at the high travel stop, zero the joystick
(return to home position), then move the joystick again in the hoist direction.
To continue to travel beyond the high travel limit after stopping, zero the joystick, push and hold the
Drawworks Override button, then move the joystick again in the hoist direction.
When using the Drawworks Override, normal speed limits

are active; therefore, care should be taken when doing so.
Deceleration limits are also active and going fast, the
system would still have to decelerate at the normal rate,
which could be dangerous close to the crown.
6-6
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-7 of 78
Drawworks 6
Low Travel Limit and Stop

The Low Travel Limit and Stop controls display in the left center portion of the Drawworks
operator screen. Press Low Travel Limit or Low Travel Stop to display the appropriate keypad.
Lowest block height
Low block stop point
Use the low travel limit keypad to define the lowest possible block height value, then press Set to
confirm the value and close the keypad.
Use the low travel stop keypad to define the low travel stop value. The block stops here before
reaching its low travel limit. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
To continue travel to the low travel limit after stopping at the low travel stop, zero the joystick (return
to home position), then move the joystick again in the lower direction.
Pressing the Drawworks Override button will be required to go further than the low travel limit.
!
When in override, the speed and deceleration limits are still
active, and if care is not taken with the speed being driven,
damage could occur.
6-7
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-8 of 78
Drill Stop Point

The Drill Stop Point button displays in the bottom left portion of the Drawworks operator screen.
Press Drill Stop Point to display its keypad.
Use the drill stop point keypad to define a drill stop point value.
Enter a negative value to allow the elevators to travel below the drill floor, and the Link Tilt feature
of the top drive to be used.
!
There is no automatic Link Tilt. If the driller fails to tilt the
links, the elevators will hit the floor if this value is set to a
negative number.
When the links are fully retracted (in Drill mode), the top drive elevators are raised several feet
above their normal (Float) position. The blocks are then able to travel to a lower position before the
elevators come in contact with the drill floor.
Enter a positive value if the elevators are not retracted.
Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
The Drill Stop Point is active only when autodrilling. Also,

the lower travel and stop limits are disabled during
autodrilling. See section titled "Auto Driller Mode" on page
6-26.
6-8
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-9 of 78
Drawworks 6
Block Speed Graph

The block speed graph is located along the left portion of the Drawworks operator screen. The
graph displays the block’s lowering and hoisting rate.
Max hoist limit
Max lower limit
The maximum hoist and lower speed markers indicate the current speed limits, as the system may
limit speed more than the operator-defined values. For instance, in the image shown here, the max
lower limit is set for 221.1, but the marker is pointing to about 150, as the system is limiting based
on other factors.
The Block Speed graph contains a digital reading (ft/min) to the right of the graph and a blue bar
that rises and falls to indicate the current hoisting rate value.
6-9
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-10 of 78
Defining Maximum Block Speeds

The Max Hoist and Lower buttons are located on the left portion of the Drawworks operator
screen. Press Max Hoist or Max Lower to display its keypad.
Define maximum speed values, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Active speed limit values are displayed on the control buttons.
The maximum hoisting and lowering speed values are

limited by the number of lines strung. Other system
constraints (such as hook load) can limit travel speeds.
6-10
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-11 of 78
Drawworks 6
Lowering and Hoisting Controls

This function is located on the driller’s workstation right control panel. It is controlled by moving the
drawworks joystick forward (Lower) or backward (Hoist).
Joystick Help
Various joystick controls are labeled on the Joystick Help screen. The Drawworks is controlled
with the right joystick (as shown above).
The driller must have ownership of the Drawworks in order

to see the Drawworks control labels on the joystick help
screen.

information.
6-11
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-12 of 78
Joystick Tool Menu

Joystick tool menu.

on page 2-15.

Press Back, located on the main menu bar, to return to the previous Drawworks screen.
6-12
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-13 of 78
Drawworks 6
Defining Hook Load Limits

Use the max pull limit controls on the operator screen to define a maximum hook load weight for
the drawworks. The value set here depends upon the operation being performed. This value is
used to calculate a velocity limit during hoisting.
The actual measured hook load during hoisting operations may be slightly higher or lower than the
value entered, as the measurement is taken at one end (deadline).
The velocity limit does not override the deceleration

rates of the system. Therefore, if the limit is reached
and the system is moving fast, it decelerates
according to the calculated deceleration rate. This
could cause a large overshoot of the entered hook
load value. Use caution when running in tight
formation. This protection cannot prevent against
over-pull in every situation. It is ultimately the driller’s
responsibility to prevent over-pull.
The Mode and Hook Load Limits are displayed along the top left portion of the Drawworks
operator screen.
Max Pull
Press Max Pull to display its keypad.
Define a maximum pull limit value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
6-13
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-14 of 78
Drag Limit
The Drill Limit button is located in the top center portion of the Drawworks operator screen. Press
Drag Limit to display its keypad.
Define a drag limit value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Minimum Hook Load

The Minimum Hook Load button is located in the top center portion of the Drawworks operator
screen. Press Min Hook Load to display its keypad.
Define a minimum hook load limit value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
6-14
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-15 of 78
Drawworks 6
Weight on Bit and Hook Load Gauge

The current weight on bit (WOB) and hook load weight gauge is located in the top center portion of
the Drawworks operator screen.
The analog gauge contains the current feedback WOB reading in the outer gauge and the current
feedback hook load reading within the inner gauge.
The red needle moves along the outer edge of the outer gauge to point to the current WOB.
The green needle moves along the outer edge of the inner gauge to point to the current hook load
weight.
Gauge Rotation Controls

The gauge rotation controls are used to rotate the WOB gauge. The Hook Load gauge remains
stationary during all other selected operations.
 Press the single right arrow to rotate the gauge counter-clockwise in small
increments.
 Press the double right arrow to rotate the gauge counter-clockwise in large
increments.
 Press the single left arrow to rotate the gauge clockwise in small increments.
 Press the double left arrow to rotate the gauge clockwise in large increments.
6-15
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-16 of 78
Hook Load
Press Hook Load located on the main menu bar.
Press Hook Load --> Hook Load Gauge to display the Hook Load Gauge screen.
The current hook load weight and weight on bit (WOB) displays are located in the top left and right
corners of the screen. The hook load reading is display only.
This gauge is identical to the one displayed on the Drawworks operator screen. See section titled
"Weight on Bit and Hook Load Gauge" on page 6-15 and section titled "Hook Load Reading" on
page 6-1 for more information.
6-16
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-17 of 78
Drawworks 6
Zero WOB
This button is only active when the driller has ownership of

the drawworks.
The Zero WOB button is located in the top right corner of the Hook Load Gauge screen.
Press Zero WOB to zero the current WOB reading.
Gauge Configuration
The Gauge Config button is located in the top left corner of the Hook Load Gauge screen.
Hook Load Gauge Configuration Options
The hook load gauge configuration buttons are only active

when the driller has ownership of the drawworks.
Press Gauge Config to display the Hook Load Gauge Configuration window.
Press OK to return to the Hook Load Gauge screen.
6-17
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-18 of 78
Hook Load Gauge Full Scale

Hook Load Gauge Full scale controls are located in the top portion of the Hook Load Gauge
Configuration window.
Press a toggle button to select the full scale range for the Hook Load gauge to display. A green
The increments displayed on the Hook Load gauge will change depending on the current
selection.
AutoRotate WOB
Auto rotate WOB controls are located in the bottom portion of the Hook Load Gauge
Configuration window.
Press Enable or Disable to activate or de-activate auto rotation of the WOB gauge. A green
Configuration changes affect all instances of this gauge

type.
6-18
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-19 of 78
Drawworks 6
Hook Load Tool Menu

Press the Hook Load Gauge button, located on the main menu bar next to Joystick Help, to
display the Hook Load tool menu.

on page 2-15.

Press Back, located on the main menu bar, to return to the previous Drawworks screen.
6-19
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-20 of 78
Defining the Drawworks Mode

Mode Select
The Mode button and display is located in the top left corner of the Drawworks operator screen.
Press Mode to display the automated drawworks system Mode Select window.
Press a button to select a mode. A green backlight indicates the current selection. Press OK to
return to the operator screen.
 Normal: Used to operate the drawworks at 100% of the maximum speed.
 Slow: Used to operate the drawworks at speeds up to the operator-defined Max
Slow Speed. See "Max Slow Speed." Slow mode can also be activated or de-
activated by pressing the Mode - Slow button on the operator screen.
 Brake Only: Used in power loss situations. Allows free spooling of the drill line and
limits operation of the drawworks to brake use only, at the operator-defined
maximum speed. Mode will display Brake Only on the operator screen.
 Slip & Cut: Permits drilling line to be slipped to a new position and cut. See section
titled "Slip & Cut" on page 6-22. Mode will display Slip & Cut on the operator
screen.
Max Slow Speed

Press Max Slow Speed to display its keypad.
Define a maximum slow speed, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Press OK to return to the operator screen.
6-20
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-21 of 78
Drawworks 6
Slow Mode
The slow mode button is located on the bottom left portion of the Drawworks operator screen.
Slow mode is used for fine position control. During slow mode the joystick controls are scaled to
the driller-entered maximum up to 20 feet per minute. All position-based limits and safeties are
active.
Press the Mode - Slow button to activate and de-activate the slow mode. A yellow backlight
indicates slow mode is active. Also, the Mode digital display will read Slow.
Slow mode can only be entered from Normal mode.
Slow Mode Joystick Control

Slow mode can also be controlled using the driller chair’s right joystick.
 Press the joystick’s ADS Slow Mode toggle button, located on the bottom side of
the joystick, to activate slow mode.
 Drawworks must be stopped, and the joystick centered, for the joystick push button
to de-activate slow mode.
6-21
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-22 of 78
Slip & Cut

While this mode is active, the drum speed is limited to the operator-defined value (maximum drum
spool speed), and all position-based limits and safeties are disabled. In other words, this mode
allows free spooling of the drill line and block without position protection. All brake functions are
normal.
Slip & Cut mode bypasses High and Low Travel Limit
settings, allowing free movement of the block without
position protection. Potential damage to equipment or
injury to personnel exists. Exercise extreme caution in
this mode.
1. Ensure that motors are assigned and auxiliaries are turned on.
2. Press Slip & Cut to select the mode.
3. Press Ok to display the Confirm Slip & Cut Operation pop-up window. Press
Cancel to abort and return to the Drawworks operator screen.
4. Press Yes! Start Slip & Cut from Driller Chair or Local Station to display the
associated Slip & Cut Control screen.
6-22
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-23 of 78
Drawworks 6
Alternatively, press No to abort the procedure and return to the previous screen.
Driller Chair Local Station
5. Press the RPM button to display the maximum drum speed keypad.
6. Define a maximum drum revolution speed value, then press Set to confirm the value
and close the keypad.
7. If you choose to perform this procedure from the driller’s chair:
 After closing the keypad, press OK, then perform the necessary slip and cut
operations.
 Press Mode and select Normal. The drawworks mode resets to Normal, and the
operation is complete. Press OK to return to the operator screen.
6-23
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-24 of 78
If you choose to perform this procedure from the local station:

 After closing the keypad, press Next >>. The following pop-up window appears:
8. Press Transfer To Local to request that control be transferred to the local control
station.
The Local Station Indicator flashes green when the transfer request is received,
and displays solid green when accepted.
9. From the local control station, turn the switch to Accept to accept the transfer
request. The lamp on the local station is blinking at the same time as the image
shown above, and indicates the local operator can accept control.
Accepting control unparks the drawworks, making the Hoist and Lower buttons on
the local station active.
10. Perform the necessary slip and cut operations, then request that control be returned
to the driller by turning the switch mounted on the local control panel to Release.
11. Press Accept Control from the operator workstation touchscreen.
6-24
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-25 of 78
Drawworks 6
The indicator flashes green until the operator accepts the transfer.
12. Press Close.
The drawworks mode resets to Normal.
Press Mode again to display the drawworks Mode Select pop-up window (see
section titled "Mode Select" on page 6-20) to select another mode.
!
Perform a full block calibration after each slip & cut
operation. See section titled "Block Calibration" on page 6-
54.
Bridge Protection
The Bridge Protection controls display in the top right portion of the Drawworks operator screen.
Press Bridge Protection - Off or Auto to activate or de-activate the bridge protection. A green
% Drag
Drag is the difference between the current hook load and the hook load when zeroed. Calculation
is the same as WOB, but is zeroed at different times.
The Drag displays are located in the top right portion of the Drawworks operator screen. A
vertical graph indicates the feedback for drag percentage.
100% is the value entered as the Max Drag Limit. See

section titled "Drag Limit" on page 6-14.
6-25
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-26 of 78
Drag Displays
The Drag displays are located in the top right portion of the Drawworks operator screen.

 Graph Bar: Displays green when the drag is enabled and there is no warning.
 Graph Bar: Displays yellow when the drag is enabled and there is an exceeding
limit warning.
 Graph Bar: Displays red when the drag exceeds 1.5 times the limit, the system was
still moving, and the subsequent shutdown occurred.
 Enabled: Displays green to indicate the drag is enabled; gray to indicate the drag is
disabled. Enabled indicates that when lowering, the drag limit will attempt to lower
speed to keep drag within the operator-defined limit. Drag will automatically be
disabled if lower than 5 ft above the lower stop point. This allows the drill set to set in
slips without drag limit affecting operation.
Zero Drag
Press the Drag button to display the zero drag confirmation window.
 Press Ok to automatically reduce the current drag to zero.

 Press Cancel to abort and return to the Drawworks operator screen.
Drag is automatically zeroed when lowering above 5 ft. below the upper stop point.
Auto Driller Mode

Auto driller mode launches (and allows operation of the drawworks through) the Electronic Driller
SystemTM (EDS) application. The Auto Driller controls are located in the right center portion of
the Drawworks operator screen.
6-26
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-27 of 78
Drawworks 6
Activating the Electronic Driller System

1. Press the Auto Driller - On button to turn auto driller on. Auto Driller can be turned
on or off if the system is parked or not parked. See section titled "Parking Brake
Controls" on page 6-4.
When the drawworks is parked and the Auto Driller is turned on, the Auto Driller
status reading changes from Off to Ready. If the system is not parked when the
Auto Driller is turned on, Auto Driller turns on.
Press Close to return to the Drawworks operator screen. Press the Auto Driller -
Off button to turn auto driller mode off.
2. Manually release the parking brake.
Once torque transfer completes, auto driller begins running, and the auto driller
status displays a green backlight and the text status changes to On.
During manual drilling operations, the rate of penetration

(ROP) value is zero. If auto driller is active, but there is no
movement, ensure that the ROP setpoint value is
acceptable, and the operator-defined number of lines
strung is correct.
See section titled "Defining Parameter Setpoint Values" on

page 6-29, and section titled "Block Calibration" on page 6-
54.
6-27
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-28 of 78
Brake Controls

periods of drawworks inactivity and prior to leaving
the workstation, engage the drawworks parking brake
and then release ownership of the drawworks. Failure
to follow this advisory may result in serious or fatal
injury to personnel, significant damage to equipment,
and extended rig downtime.
See section titled "Granting and Releasing

Ownership" on page 2-39 for more information.
The Brake Controls are displayed in the bottom right portion of the Drawworks operator screen.
1. Press the Brake - On button to engage the brake.
Press Ok to set the brake or Cancel to abort and return to the Drawworks operator
screen.
2. Press Brake - Off/Auto to disengage the brake.
Press Ok to release the brake or Cancel to abort and return to the Drawworks
operator screen.
The brake will automatically engage if no commanded movement occurs within a
time period, but it will not disengage based on joystick movement.
6-28
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-29 of 78
Drawworks 6
Activating or De-activating Autodrill Parameters

Autodrill parameters are located in the bottom center portion of the Drawworks operator screen.
Press the colored WOB (Weight On Bit), Torque, or Delta P (pressure) buttons to activate or de-
activate a parameter. A light blue highlight around the button indicates it is active.
ROP is active by default when auto driller mode is turned

on.
Digital readings display above each parameter’s vertical graph. Black markers on the graphs
indicate the operator-defined setpoint values.
Activate or
De-activate
Defining Parameter Setpoint Values

The system attempts to reach the ROP setpoint and all other parameters are limiters which reduce
ROP when needed to keep below the setpoints. Whichever parameter has the most lifting ROP is
in control. If drilling operation speeds increase and WOB decreases (for instance, when
encountering a softer formation), the system again attempts to reach the ROP setpoint value.
Activate the parameter (see section titled "Activating or De-activating Autodrill Parameters" on
page 6-29), then press its Setpoint button to display its keypad pop-up window.
Activate or
Deactivate
Variable Adjust
Define
Setpoint
Current
Setpoint Value
Define the setpoint value, then press Set to confirm the value and return to the operator screen.
6-29
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-30 of 78
If auto driller mode is on, but there is no movement, ensure

that the ROP setpoint value is acceptable, and the
operator-defined number of lines strung is correct. See
section titled "Block Calibration" on page 6-54.
Variable Adjustment
The realtime drilling trend display (see section titled "Drilling Trends" on page 6-38) is driven by
digital signals received at certain intervals. Dampening (also referred to as “time-constant
adjustment”) can improve the readability of the weight on bit (WOB) and delta pressure displays by
limiting the frequency of the display update.
Press the (WOB or Delta P) Variable Adjust button to display its pop-up window.
Variable Adjust
Press the down or up blue arrow buttons to decrease or increase the value.
Press the left (Faster) or right (Slower) arrow buttons to adjust the signal refresh interval.
Press Close to return to the Drawworks operator screen.
You can also zero or adjust the parameter value at this

screen by pressing Zero, WOB, or Zero Delta P.
Also, see section titled "Zero WOB" on page 6-17.
6-30
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-31 of 78
Drawworks 6
Backup Controls
Backup Controls are only expected to be used in the

event of a chair failure. These controls are not intended for
primary control of the Drawworks.
See Chapter 5, titled "Chair (Workstation)" for more

information.
Press Backup Controls, located in the bottom right portion of the Drawworks operator screen, to
display the Control Location window.
Press the Control Location - Backup button to enable backup controls using the touchscreen.
A green backlight indicates the current selection and the Backup Controls button will display
yellow on the operator screen.
6-31
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-32 of 78
Operating with Backup Controls

Backup controls are located within the Control Location window.
Control buttons display the following information:

 Press the red circle and slide it up to hoist the drawworks. The input from the
touchscreen is proportional; a small movement of the circle will generate a slow
movement in the drawworks.
 Press the red circle and slide it down to lower the drawworks. The input from the
touchscreen is proportional; a small movement of the circle will generate a slow
movement in the drawworks.
 Press Override to override normal control of the drawworks. This button does the
same function as the chair override button.
 Press Control Location - Normal to re-enable normal control of the drawworks.
Press Close to return to the Drawworks operator screen.
6-32
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-33 of 78
Drawworks 6
Auto Driller Setup

Press Auto Driller Setup, located in the bottom right portion of the Drawworks operator screen,
to display the Auto Driller Setup window.
Gain Factor
Press and drag the black slider or press the blue Lower or Higher buttons to adjust the
appropriate variable’s gain factor.
Filter Time Constant Adjustment

Dampening (also referred to as "time constant adjustment") can improve the readability of the
WOB and delta pressure displays by limiting the frequency of the display update. Press and drag
the black slider or press the blue Faster or Slower buttons to adjust the appropriate signal refresh
interval.
6-33
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-34 of 78
Shutdown Limit
Shutdown limit buttons are located along the center of the Auto Driller Setup window. Press the
appropriate Shutdown Limit button to display its keypad.
Define shutdown limit values, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Active shutdown limit values are displayed on the control buttons.
Allow Hoist
Allow Hoist controls are located in the bottom right portion of the Auto Driller Setup window.
Press the Allow Hoist - Disable or Enable buttons to disable or enable hoisting.
A green backlight indicates the current selection. If hoist is enabled, the system can hoist to
attempt to control the Torque or Delta P variable.
Press Close, at the Auto Driller Setup window, to return to the Drawworks operator screen.
6-34
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-35 of 78
Drawworks 6
Auto Reamer Setup
Auto Reamer is used only when autodriller is on. If it is

enabled and setup, it will automatically hoist and lower at
the entered speeds for the distance entered. If enabled, it
will start hoisting when the autodriller drills to the drill stop
point.
Auto reamer will continue to ream up and down until the

driller turns the reamer off or commands movement with
the joystick. See section titled "Auto Driller Mode" on page
6-26.
Press Auto Reamer Setup, located in the bottom right portion of the Drawworks operator screen,
to display the Auto Reaming Setup window.
Enable
Press the Enable toggle button to enable or disable the reaming feature.
The text display changes to reflect the status, Ready or Disabled.
Also, the Reamer status display, located in the center of the Drawworks operator screen, reflects
the current status, Ready, Disabled, or Active.
6-35
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-36 of 78
Pull Limit
The Pull limit button is located in the top portion of the Auto Reaming Setup window. Press Pull
Limit to display its keypad.
Define the setpoint value, then press Set to confirm the value and return to the Auto Reaming
Setup window.
Hoist Speed
The Hoist Speed button is located in the center portion of the Auto Reaming Setup window. Press
Hoist Speed to display its keypad.
Setup window.
6-36
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-37 of 78
Drawworks 6
Lower Speed
The Lower Speed button is located in the center portion of the Auto Reaming Setup window.
Press Lower Speed to display its keypad.
Setup window.
Distance
The Distance button is located in the bottom portion of the Auto Reaming Setup window. Press
Distance to display its keypad.
Setup window.
6-37
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-38 of 78
Auto Reaming Help

The Help button is located in the bottom portion of the Auto Reaming Setup window. Press Help
to display the Auto Reaming Help window.
Press Close to return to the Auto Reaming Setup window.

At the Auto Reaming Setup window, press Close to return to the Drawworks operator screen.
Drilling Trends
Press Drilling Trends located, in the bottom right corner of the Drawworks operator screen, to
display a realtime graph that charts the data for activated drilling parameters. The colors on the
graph correspond to the active parameters on the Drawworks operator screen.
Press Ok to return to the Drawworks operator screen.
Messages
6-38
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-39 of 78
Drawworks 6
Drawworks Tool Menu

Press the Drawworks button, located on the main menu bar, to display the Drawworks tool menu.

on page 2-15.


and Events."
See section titled "Tool Diagnostic"

on page 6-75.
See section titled "Calibration"

on page 6-54.
See section titled "Status" on page

6-42.
See section titled "Operator" on

page 6-40.
6-39
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-40 of 78
Operator
Press Drawworks --> Operator to display the Drawworks Operator menu.
Auxiliary Controls
Press Drawworks --> Operator --> Auxiliary Controls to display the Auxiliary Controls screen.
Assume ownership of the drawworks to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on
page 2-38.
Status Displays
 Motor Running: Green indicates the motor is running; gray indicates the motor is
not running; red indicates a fault or alarm state.
 The current Mode status displays in the top left corner and is display only. See
section titled "Mode Select" on page 6-20.
 The current Park Status displays in the top right corner and is display only. See
section titled "Parking Brake Controls" on page 6-4.
 The Fault and Status indicators display along the right portion of the screen. See
section titled "Fault and Status Displays" on page 6-2.
6-40
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-41 of 78
Drawworks 6
Manual Controls
Auxiliaries typically start and stop automatically. This

screen is for testing or if the driller needs a particular
auxiliary on or off. E-stops will shutdown the auxiliaries and
the auxiliaries will need to be restarted manually on the
Auxiliary Controls screen.
Operator controls for the blowers and lube pumps are located below their respective status
displays.
 Press Stop to manually stop a pump or blower motor.

 Press Start to manually start a pump or blower motor.
Messages
Assignments
Press Drawworks --> Operator --> Assignments to display the Assignments screen.
Press the appropriate Deassign or Assign button to assign or de-assign VFD motors to the
drawworks. A green backlight displays the current selection.
6-41
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-42 of 78
Drive Status Displays

Drive status displays are located underneath the drawworks VFD motor controls.

 Drive Ready: Green indicates the assigned motor is ready to run; gray indicates
the motor is not ready to run.
 Drive Running: Green indicates the VFD motor is assigned and running; gray
indicates the VFD motor is not running.
 Drive Fault: Red indicates a fault or alarm condition; gray indicates a normal state.
Status
Press Drawworks --> Status to display the Drawworks Status menu.
Drawworks Status
Press Drawworks --> Status --> Drawworks to display the Drawworks Status screen.
6-42
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-43 of 78
Drawworks 6
Status Displays
Messages
Alarm and Fault Status Indicators

Hook load sensors, drum encoders, motors, brake, chopper, temperatures, and pressure status
indicators display throughout the Drawworks Status screen.
See the NOV model-specific drawworks “Alarm & Fault

Response Specification” document for detailed drawworks
alarm information.
Also, see section titled "Alarm Definitions" on page 6-77,

and Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events."
Hook Load and Drum Encoder

The hook load and drum encoder status indicators are located in the top left portion of the
Drawworks Status screen.
 Hook Load - Sensor (1, 2, and 3): Red indicates failure on a sensor; gray indicates
no failure.
 Drum Encoder (1, 2, and 3): Red indicates failure on an encoder; gray indicates no
failure.
6-43
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-44 of 78
Alarms Reset
The alarms reset button is located in the top right portion of the Drawworks Status screen.
Press Alarms Reset to reset alarm displays after appropriate action has been taken to clear the
condition.
Motor Displays
Motor displays are located in the top center portion of the Drawworks Status screen.

 Blower Running: Green indicates the blower is running; red indicates a blower
start was attempted, but there was no feedback; gray indicates no attempted start.
 Diff Pressure Low: Red indicates that the difference between the suction and the
exhaust pressure of the blower is too low, and the motor is not receiving proper air
flow; gray indicates a normal state.
 Air Diff Temp High: Red indicates the air differential temperature is exceeding the
permissible limit; gray indicates a normal state.
 Exhaust: Displays the current exhaust temperature (°F) reading. A red backlight
indicates the exhaust temperature is not within an acceptable range; a yellow
backlight indicates a pre-alarm condition that requires monitoring; a white backlight
 Speed: Displays the current speed (rpm) value.
 Torque: Displays the current torque (ft-lb) value.
 VFD Status: Green indicates the VFD is assigned and ready; gray indicates the
VFD is not assigned; yellow indicates the VFD is assigned but not ready; red
indicates the VFD is assigned and there is a fault or alarm condition.
6-44
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-45 of 78
Drawworks 6
Cooling Level, Chopper/DBR, and Ambient

The Cooling Level, Chopper/DBR, and Ambient status displays are located underneath the
Motor Displays.

 Cooling Level: Red indicates the coolant level has fallen below an acceptable
range; green indicates the coolant level is normal.
 Chopper/DBR Status: Green indicates the chopper is running; red indicates an
alarm state.
 Ambient: Displays the current ambient air temperature (°F) reading. A red backlight
indicates the ambient air temperature is not within an acceptable range; a yellow
Brake Tests
The Brake Tests displays are located in the center of the Drawworks Status screen.
Capacity Test
Use the brake capacity test to verify that the friction brake has the torque capacity to hold the rated
load by applying torque from the motor against the friction brake. Each brake side is tested
separately. The air applied brake is also tested.
!
The system must be parked with minimal hook load (empty
traveling assembly) prior to beginning this test.
6-45
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-46 of 78
Press Capacity Test to display the Brake Capacity Test pop-up window.
Press Yes! Start Brake Capacity Test.
The Yes! Start Brake Capacity Test button is only active

when all drives are assigned. See section titled
"Assignments" on page 6-41.
The system begins applying torque to the motors with a very small speed command, attempting to
detect drum movement.
A green Pass display indicates the brake passed the test; a red Fail display indicates the brake
failed the test.
6-46
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-47 of 78
Drawworks 6
Brake Load capacity readings display underneath the Pass/Fail displays.

The Total Load Capacity displays the total brake load capacity. A green backlight indicates the
brake passed the test; a yellow backlight indicates a reduced brake capacity; a red backlight
indicates the brake failed the test. Repeat the procedure until the test is successful.
Press Close to return to the Drawworks Status screen.
Capacity Test Status Displays

The capacity test status displays are located in the center of the Drawworks Status screen.

 Pass: Green indicates the brake passed the capacity test.
 Fail: Red indicates the brake failed the capacity test.
 Load Capacity: Displays the current brake load capacity (klb). A green backlight
indicates the brake passed the test; a yellow backlight indicates the brake slipped
during the test and there is a reduced brake capacity; a red backlight indicates the
brake failed the test.
Brake Valve Test

The Valve Test checks the valves that control the brakes.
This test can only be started when the driller has

ownership of the drawworks and the drawworks is parked.
Press Valve Test, located in the center of the Drawworks Status screen, to display the Brake
Valve Test pop-up window.
Press Yes! Start Brake Valve Test.

6-47
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-48 of 78
A progress window displays until the test is complete.
Brake Wear Measurement

Verify that the friction brake is placed in the correct state (all pressure removed from the air applied
section and 100 psi applied to the spring applied section) when selected for wear measurement.
Each brake is checked separately while the other brake is fully applied (100 psi in spring-applied,
and zero psi in the air-applied section).
The Measurement button is located in the center of the Drawworks Status screen. Press
Measurement to display the Brake Measurement Assist pop-up window.
This test can only be started when the driller has

ownership of the drawworks and the drawworks is parked.
6-48
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-49 of 78
Drawworks 6
Press Measure Brake (1 or 2) to put those brakes into the proper state for measurement. In order
to test the other brake, press the Reset button.
Pressing Reset places the brake back into the parked

condition (zero pressure on spring-applied; 50 psi on air-
applied).
Gearbox Displays
Gearbox (1 and 2) status displays are located in the bottom center portion of the Drawworks
Status screen.
Status readings display the following information:
 Lube Oil (°F): Displays lube oil temperature. A red backlight indicates an active
high temperature alarm; a yellow backlight indicates a pre-alarm condition that
requires monitoring.
 Lube Oil (psi): Displays lube oil pressure. A red backlight indicates an active low
pressure alarm; a yellow backlight indicates a pre-alarm condition that requires
monitoring.
 Pump Running: Green indicates the pump is running; gray indicates the pump is
not running; red indicates a fault state.
6-49
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-50 of 78
Brake Displays
Brake (1 and 2) displays are located in the bottom left and right portions of the Drawworks Status
screen.

 Park Apply Fail: Red indicates an alarm state; gray indicates a normal state.
 Park Release Fail: Red indicates an alarm state; gray indicates a normal state.
 Servo Fail: Red indicates an alarm state; gray indicates a normal state.
 Bypass Fail: Red indicates an alarm state; gray indicates a normal state.
 Air Supply: A digital reading displays air supply pressure (psi). A red backlight
indicates a significant lack in air pressure due to a Category 2 E-stop; a yellow
 Coolant - Inlet (°F): A digital reading displays coolant inlet temperature. A red
backlight indicates the coolant inlet temperature is not within an acceptable range; a
yellow backlight indicates a pre-alarm condition that requires monitoring; a white
backlight indicates a normal state.
 Coolant - Outlet: A digital reading displays coolant outlet temperature (°F). A red
backlight indicates the coolant outlet temperature is not within an acceptable range;
a yellow backlight indicates a pre-alarm condition that requires monitoring; a white
 Coolant - Delta Temp: Red indicates that the difference between the coolant inlet
and outlet temperature is not within an acceptable range; gray indicates a normal
state.
 Coolant - Inlet (psi): A digital reading displays coolant inlet pressure. A red
backlight indicates the coolant inlet pressure is not within an acceptable range; a
 Coolant - Flow (gal/m): A digital reading displays coolant flow. A red backlight
indicates the cooling water flow is not within an acceptable range; a yellow backlight
indicates a pre-alarm condition that requires monitoring; a white backlight indicates
a normal state.
6-50
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-51 of 78
Drawworks 6
 Service Brake: The pressure graph contains a digital reading above it and a light
blue bar that rises and falls to indicate the current service brake pressure value. A
red backlight indicates the service brake pressure is not within an acceptable range;
a yellow backlight indicates a pre-alarm condition that requires monitoring; a white
 Park Brake: The pressure graph contains a digital reading above it and a yellow
bar that rises and falls to indicate the current parking brake pressure value. A red
backlight indicates the parking brake pressure is not within an acceptable range; a
Drum and Block Status Information

Drum and block status information is located in the bottom center portion of the Drawworks
Status screen.
Digital readings display the following information:

 Elevator Position: Displays block position. A red backlight indicates the block
requires calibration.
 Drum Setpoint: Displays drum speed setpoint.
 Drum Speed: Displays drum speed feedback.
Drive
Press Drawworks --> Status --> Drive to display the Motor/VFD Status screen.
6-51
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-52 of 78
Motor/ VFD and Braking Resistor Status Displays

Status displays for the motor/VFD and braking resistors are located in the center of the Motor/VFD
Status screen.
Status and fault indicators display the following information:

 Ready: Green indicates the drive is ready; gray indicates an idle state.
 Assigned: Green indicates the drive is assigned; gray indicates the drive is not
assigned.
 Fault: Red indicates a fault state; gray indicates a normal state.
 Running: Green indicates the drive is running; gray indicates an idle state.
 Chopper Fault: Red indicates the drive system is reporting an active chopper fault;
gray indicates a normal state.
 High Temperature: Red indicates an active high temperature alarm; gray indicates
a normal state.
 Air Flow Alarm: Yellow indicates an active air flow alarm; gray indicates a normal
state.
DW Motor/Assigned VFD
DW (A-C) Motor/Assigned VFD status digital displays are located in the top center portion of the
Motor/VFD Status screen.
Digital readings display the following information:

 Speed Command: Displays motor commanded speed.
 Speed Feedback: Displays actual motor speed.
 Torque Limit: Displays the positive motor torque limit to the drive.
 Torque Feedback: Displays the actual motor torque from the drive.
6-52
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-53 of 78
Drawworks 6
Motor Winding Temperatures

Motor winding temperature digital displays are located along the bottom portion of the Motor/VFD
Status screen.
The temperature feedback for each of the motor phases is displayed (A, B, and C). A red backlight
indicates the motor winding temperature is not within an acceptable range; a yellow backlight
indicates a pre-alarm condition that requires monitoring; a white backlight indicates a normal
state.
VFD Fault Reset

The VFD Fault Reset button is located in the top right portion of the Motor/VFD Status screen.
The VFD Fault Reset button issues a reset command to the VFD drive when faulted. Press VFD
Fault Reset to reset the VFDs after the appropriate action has been taken to clear faults.
Messages
6-53
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-54 of 78
Calibration
Press Drawworks --> Calibration to display the Drawworks Calibration menu.
Block Calibration
Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> Block Calibration to display the first Block Height
Calibration screen.
Status Displays
Messages
Full Calibration
1. Ensure that the system is parked, then press Full Calibration to begin.
6-54
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-55 of 78
Drawworks 6
Once full block calibration begins, the block normally

travels at 25% of its normal speed. The last calibration
value will also be erased.
2. Press Yes to display the next block height calibration screen.
6-55
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-56 of 78
3. Press Lines Strung to select the appropriate number of lines.
4. Select the number of lines strung and then verify the Current Selection value
displayed is correct. Press Close to return to the Block Height Calibration screen.
5. Press Continue to display the next block height calibration screen.
6. Move the drum to a transition between layers, then press the button that
corresponds to that layer transition (1st, 2nd, or 3rd).
6-56
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-57 of 78
Drawworks 6
7. Press Continue to display the next Block Height Calibration screen.
8. Lower the block until the elevator rests on the slips, rotary table, or at a known height
position, then press the Set Elevator Position button to display its keypad.
9. Enter the current elevator position value, then press Set to confirm the value and
close the keypad.
10. Verify that the new value displayed is correct, then press Continue.
6-57
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-58 of 78
11. Press either Calculate Length of Assembly Automatically or Enter Length of

Assembly Manually.
!
Select the manual method only if the system cannot
automatically calculate the length of the assembly due to
unavailable targets (for example, if the top drive is parked
in the side skid), or due to proximity switch failure.
 If you selected Calculate Length of Assembly Automatically, the following screen

appears; move the block past the proximity sensors to continue calibration.
6-58
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-59 of 78
Drawworks 6
 If you selected Enter Length of Assembly Manually, skip to step 13.
12. If you selected Calculate Length of Assembly Automatically, the block calibration
is complete. Press Finish, then skip the remaining steps of this procedure.
!
The block travel speed is no longer reduced to 25%; it now
moves at 100%.
6-59
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-60 of 78
13. If you selected Enter Length of Assembly Manually, the following screen appears.
Follow the remaining steps of this procedure.
14. Manually measure the length of the traveling assembly (from the top of the block, to
the bottom of the elevator).
15. Press the measurement button (shown above in feet), then enter the value using the
keypad.
16. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
6-60
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-61 of 78
Drawworks 6
17. Verify that the new value displayed is correct, then press Continue.
18. Press Finish. Block height calibration is complete.
!
The block travel speed is no longer reduced to 25%; it now
moves at 100%.
6-61
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-62 of 78
Elevator Position Calibration
Elevator Position Calibration can be used when assembly

length is physically changed.
The first Block Height Calibration screen displays.
1. Press Elevator Position Calibration to display the Elevator Position Reset

window.
6-62
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-63 of 78
Drawworks 6
2. Move the elevator to a known position (such as the drill floor at 0.0 feet), then press
the New Elevator Position button to display the keypad.
3. Define the position, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
The following window appears.
4. Press Set Elevator Position to store the value, then press Close.
Elevator position reset is complete.
6-63
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-64 of 78
Hook Load Tare

Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> Hook Load Tare to display the Hook Load Tare calibration
screen.
1. Press the Tare Weight button (shown above in klb) to display its keypad.
2. Define the tare weight, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
6-64
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-65 of 78
Drawworks 6
3. Verify that the new value displayed is correct, then press Save.
Press Reset to reset the tare weight value.
Hook Load Sensors
Hook load sensor digital readings display weight on the hook load. The three sensors’ readings
should be close in number. One that is significantly off indicates a failing sensor.
Weight Displays
 Actual: Displays the feedback weight of the hook load.
 Tared: Displays the tared weight of the hook load.
Messages
6-65
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-66 of 78
Standpipe Tare
!
Turn mud pumps off before performing this procedure.
Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> Standpipe Tare to display the Standpipe Sensor
Selection and Tare screen.
1. Press Use Sensor (1 or 2) to select a sensor. A green backlight indicates the

current selection.
2. Press Zero Standpipe Pressure to zero the Current Standpipe Pressure reading.
Pressure Displays
 Actual: Displays the feedback pressure of the standpipe sensor.
 Tared: Displays the tared pressure of the standpipe sensor.
Messages
6-66
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-67 of 78
Drawworks 6
Brake
!
This procedure should only be done in the event of brake
pad replacement or brake pad surface contamination.
Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> Brake to display the Brake Maintenance and Calibration
screen.
Status Displays
6-67
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-68 of 78
Brake and Drum Displays

Brake and drum readings and displays are located in along the right portion of the Brake
Maintenance and Calibration screen.

 Drum Command: Displays drum speed command.
 Drum Speed: Displays drum speed feedback.
 Total Motor Torque: Displays the total motor torque value.
 Hook Load: Displays the feedback hook load weight value.
 Air Supply: A digital reading displays air supply pressure (psi).
 Service Brake: The pressure graph contains a digital reading above it and a light
blue bar that rises and falls to indicate the current service brake pressure value.
 Park Brake: The pressure graph contains a digital reading above it and a yellow
bar that rises and falls to indicate the current parking brake pressure value.
 Park Solenoid: Green indicates the disengage solenoid is activated; gray indicates
the disengage solenoid is not activated.
Messages
6-68
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-69 of 78
Drawworks 6
Brake Burnish

brake calibration, remove the line from the drum, verify
hook load is close to zero, and ensure the drawworks
is parked. Failure to follow this advisory may result in
1. Ensure that the line is removed from the drum, the hook load is close to zero, and
the system is parked, then press Next to begin.
6-69
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-70 of 78
2. If the Burnish Operation pop-up window appears, correct the alarm condition(s) and
then press Close.
3. Press Next. Alternatively, press Cancel to abort the calibration and return to the
Brake Maintenance and Calibration screen.
6-70
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-71 of 78
Drawworks 6

brake burnishing, do not confirm the line is off the
drum unless the line has actually been removed from
the drum. Failure to follow this advisory may result in
4. Press Line OFF - Confirm to the confirm that the line has been removed from the
drum. A green backlight indicates the current selection.
6-71
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-72 of 78
5. Press Brake - Off/Auto to unpark the drawworks. A green backlight indicates the
current selection.
6. Press OK.
To ensure safety of equipment during brake

burnishing, monitor the disc temperature to ensure it
remains below 180 °F. Failure to follow this advisory
could result in damage to the brake.
6-72
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-73 of 78
Drawworks 6
7. Use the chair joystick to control speed.
Burnish Active Displays

 Max Drum Speed: Displays drum speed setpoint.
 Time Left: Displays the countdown value in seconds for the amount of time left for
the torque transfer to the service brake to complete.
 Messages: Displays status of the brake burnish process.
8. Press Finish to stop brake burnishing.
6-73
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-74 of 78
9. Wait for the torque transfer to complete and the drawworks to park. The brake
burnish calibration is complete.
10. Perform a block position and height calibration before returning to normal operation.
See section titled "Block Calibration" on page 6-54.
6-74
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-75 of 78
Drawworks 6
Tool Diagnostic
Press Drawworks --> Tool Diagnostic to display the Tool Diagnostic menu.
Encoders
Press Drawworks --> Tool Diagnostic --> Encoders to display the Encoder Diagnostic screen.
Three sensors are used to calculate the block position.
Status Displays
 Count: Displays the current count value for each encoder.
 Master: Displays green to indicate the encoder is being used for speed and height
calculations; gray to indicate the encoder is not being used for calculations.
 Fault: Displays red to indicate an encoder failure; gray to indicate a normal state.
6-75
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-76 of 78
Enable or Disable an Encoder

Press the appropriate Enable or Disable button to enable or disable an encoder.
!
For safety reasons, NOV recommends that all three
encoders are enabled at all times.
Messages
Hook Load Sensors

Press Drawworks --> Tool Diagnostic --> Hook Load Sensors to display the Hook Load
Diagnostic screen.
Status Displays
 Hook Load (lb): Displays the hook load weight for each sensor.
 Master: Displays green to indicate the sensor is being used for speed and height
calculations; gray to indicate the sensor is not being used for calculations.
 Fault: Displays red to indicate a sensor failure; gray to indicate a normal state.
6-76
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 6-77 of 78
Drawworks 6
Enable or Disable a Sensor

Press the appropriate Enable or Disable button to enable or disable a sensor. A green backlight
Messages
Inconsistencies between hook load readings could indicate

a sensor failure.
!
For safety reasons, NOV recommends that all three
sensors be enabled at all times.
Alarms
See the NOV model-specific drawworks “Alarm & Fault

Response Specification” document for detailed drawworks
alarm information.
Also, see Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events."
Alarm Definitions
Trip
Action taken by the control system in response to an abnormal condition.
Abnormal Condition
 The measurement of a process variable that is outside the normal operating
conditions. This value is determined by, or based upon, the recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer.
 Loss of communication with the variable frequency drive (VFD).
 Loss of communication with remote I/O of the drawworks control system.
 Loss of utilities (air supply, cooling water, electrical).
 Failure of an instrument connected to the control system.
6-77
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 6-78 of 78
Fault
 Instrument failure or process condition that makes the signal to the control system
greater than 20.2 ma, or less than 3.8 ma.
 A condition in which two components on the same circuit are not in the same state
(for example, a switch and relay not in the same state where monitored).
Alarm
A text message displayed on the alarm banner and the Alarms screen until cleared. Abnormal
conditions, faults, soft trips, and all category stops generate an alarm.
Soft Trip
A condition where continued operation may cause damage to the drawworks or its associated
systems. The trip bit is set, and an alarm triggers, notifying the driller of the condition. When the
driller moves the joystick below the +/- 25% position, commands above 25% are limited to 25% of
the driller-defined maximum. Once the system is parked, it remains parked until the fault is cleared
or acknowledged.
Category 2 Stops
 The first type of category 2 stop is a controlled stop with power remaining available
to the VFDs/motors. Joystick commands are disabled. After drum speed is reduced
to zero rpm, the spring brakes are set. Once they are engaged and the load is
secured, the speed and torque commands to the VFDs are zeroed. If the system
cannot be decelerated by the motors, the friction brakes stop the drum before the
solenoid valves de-energize, and the system initiates a Category 2 - Brake Only
stop (described below).
 The second type is referred to as a Brake Only stop, which is a controlled stop that
reduces joystick movement commands to zero. VFDs shut down, and the friction
brake speed controller decelerates the system to zero rpm. After drum speed
reaches zero rpm, power to the brake system’s solenoid valves is removed, which
sets the spring-applied brakes.
 The third type is referred to as a Category 2 Stop Open Loop stop, which initiates
the same sequence of events as the Brake Only stop, except the friction brake is
applied to achieve a calculated deceleration rate, without speed control. This stop is
initiated when an encoder fault is detected, and the system cannot determine which
encoder is valid.
E-Stop (Category 0)
Category 0 emergency stops immediately removes power to the VFDs and motors (uncontrolled
stop; VFDs trip and coast to a stop), removes pressure from the spring-applied brakes, and applies
full pressure to air-applied service brakes. This stop can be initiated either automatically by the
control system, or by manually pushing the E-Stop button located on the driller workstation control
panel.
6-78
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Driller Auxiliaries 7
Operator Screen
Press Driller Tools --> Driller Auxiliaries to display the Driller Auxiliaries operator screen.
Pump Controls
Press the Stop or Start button to stop or start a pump. A green backlight indicates the current
selection.
7-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
7 Driller Auxiliaries Revision 01
Page 7-2 of 2
Driller Auxiliaries Tool Menu

Press the Driller Auxiliaries button, located on the main menu bar, to display the Driller
Auxiliaries tool menu.

on page 2-15.


and Events."

7-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Mud Pumps 8
Operator Screen
Press Driller Tools --> Mud Pumps to display the Mud Pumps operator screen.
Tool Ownership
Assume ownership of the mud pumps to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on
page 2-38.
Messages
For further details on the operation, configuration, and set

up of the mud pumps, refer to the mud pumps’
manufacturer’s operation manual.
8-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
8 Mud Pumps Revision 01
Page 8-2 of 4
Mud Pumps Tool Menu

Press the Mud Pumps button, located on the main menu bar, to display the Mud Pumps tool
menu.

on page 2-15.


and Events."
See section titled "Mud Pump

Status" on page 8-3.

8-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 8-3 of 4
Mud Pumps 8
Mud Pump Status

Press Mud Pumps --> Mud Pump Status to display the Mud Pump Status screen.
All information on the Mud Pump Status screen is display-only.
Messages

up of the mud pumps, refer to the mud pumps’
8-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
8 Mud Pumps Revision 01
Page 8-4 of 4
8-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Power System 9
Overview
The Power System SBC is acting as a gateway for information from the ABB Power Management
System (PMS) PLC. The ABB PMS PLC is performing all calculations. The Power System SBC
passes this information, as necessary, to the tool SBCs. The "Total Available Power" on the Power
System Overview screen represents the total power that the ABB PMS PLC has allocated for
drilling purposes, in kilowatts (kW). The "Total Used Power" is the total consumed power, in kW.
The Power System SBC passes this information into the tool SBCs. The Power Limiting algorithm
within the tool SBCs will ensure that each tool remains within the available power limits.
See section titled "Power Available Calculations" on page 9-6.
Operator Screen
Press Driller Tools --> Power System to display the Power System Overview operator screen.

up of the power system, refer to the power system’s
9-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
9 Power System Revision 01
Page 9-2 of 6
Power System Menu

Press the Power System button, located on the main menu bar, to display the Power System
menu.

on page 2-15."


Events."
See section titled "Motor Control

Center (MCC) Status" on page 9-5.
See section titled "Drives" on

page 9-4.
See section titled "Generators" on

page 9-3.

9-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 9-3 of 6
Power System 9
Generators
Press Power System --> Generators to display the (default) Generator 1 screen.
Choose a generator from the menu along the right portion of the screen to display its status
screen. A blue backlight indicates the current selection.

9-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 9-4 of 6
Drives
Press Power System --> Drives to display the (default) Drive 1 Status screen.
Choose a drive from the menu on the right portion of the screen to display its drive screen. A blue

9-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page 9-5 of 6
Power System 9
Motor Control Center (MCC) Status

Press Power System --> MCC Status to display the MCC Status screen.

9-5
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page 9-6 of 6
Power Available Calculations

Tool Power Available (General)
Individual tools read power capacity and power consumed values from the power system’s tool
controller to determine the available power value. Programming code stored on each tool’s
controller determines whether the power available value is sufficient for its purposes, or if the tool
needs to go into power limit mode. See the following section titled "Power Limiting."
In other words, the power system tool controller does not determine whether a tool is placed in
power limit mode; rather, the individual tool’s controller determines this, based on the power
available value and the parameters set up within the tool’s controller.
Power Limiting
Generally speaking, if the power demands exceed the power available, the maximum power
consumption allowed for all drives is reduced simultaneously. While there is normally no
prioritization of one tool versus another (unless your rig is configured as such), power may not be
reduced proportionally between the tools consuming power. The system is designed to ensure that
there is always enough torque to hold the static load of the drawworks. In addition, power limiting is
dynamic, so all power can be diverted to a single drive if the other drives are not demanding that
power.
The motor control center (MCC) and lighting circuits are not subject to power limiting, so the power
they consume also reduces the total shared power available.
9-6
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Top Drive System (TDS) 10
Operator Screen
Press Driller Tools --> Top Drive to display the Top Drive operator screen.
Tool Ownership
Assume ownership of the top drive to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page
2-38.
10-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16525109-MAN
10 Top Drive System (TDS) Revision 01
Page 10-2 of 28
Status Readings and Displays

Drill Speed and Torque Displays
Vertical Drill Speed (throttle) and Torque graphs display along the left portion of the Top Drive
operator screen.
values. Black markers indicate the current operator-defined setpoint values.
See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page

10-5 for information about defining various setpoint values.
Current throttle (drill speed), drill torque, makeup torque, spin speed, and spin torque values
display along the top of the Top Drive operator screen. See section titled "Speed and Torque
Controls" on page 10-5.
Interlock
The current Interlock status is displayed in the top right portion of the Top Drive operator screen.
The interlock status display changes to reflect the current status, Trip or Drill.
10-2
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-3 of 28
Press Interlock to display the Select pop-up window.
 Drill: Press Drill to override the interlock.

 Trip: Press Trip to activate an interlock between the power slips and the TDS
elevators. This interlock requires that one of the two be closed and prevents the
driller from opening the elevators if the slips are open and vice versa.
Press Close to return to the Top Drive operator screen.
Dolly
The current Dolly status is displayed to the right of the Interlock display.
The dolly status display changes to reflect the current status, Retracted, Extended, or Unknown.
An unknown display indicates the dolly is between being retracted and extended or is not moving.
See section titled "Dolly Controls" on page 10-13.
Slips
The current Slips status is displayed in the top right corner of the Top Drive operator screen.
The slips status display changes to reflect the current status, Up, Set, or Unknown. An unknown
display indicates the slips are between being open and closed or are not moving.
See section titled "Power Slips Controls" on page 4-13.
10-3
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-4 of 28
Status Displays
Status indicators display along the right portion of the Top Drive operator screen.
 IBOP Closed: Green indicates the internal blowout preventer (IBOP) is closed;
gray indicates the IBOP is open. See section titled "IBOP" on page 10-10.
 BX Elev Closed: Green indicates the BX elevator is closed; gray indicates the BX
elevator is open. See section titled "Elevator" on page 10-14.
 RLA Home: Green indicates the rotating link adapter (RLA) is in the home position;
gray indicates the RLA is not in the home position. See section titled "Link Rotation"
on page 10-12.
 Brake On: Yellow indicates the brake is engaged; gray indicates the brake is not
engaged. See section titled "Brake Controls" on page 10-11.
 Power Limit: Yellow indicates power is being actively limited; gray indicates power
limit is not active; red indicates loss of communication (and thus the ability to limit
power) with the power system SBC. See Chapter 9, titled "Power System."
 Ramp Failed: Red indicates the motor ramp-up failed; gray indicates a normal
state with no fault. See section titled "TDS Motor Status Displays" on page 10-18.
 Drive Fault: Red indicates a variable frequency drive (VFD) fault; gray indicates a
normal state with no fault. See section titled "TDS Motor Status Displays" on page
10-18.
 Hydraulic Alarm: Red indicates hydraulic pressure has fallen below acceptable
limits; gray indicates the hydraulic pressure is normal.
!
If the top drive continues rotating with low hydraulic
pressure, severe equipment damage may occur.
 Lube Alarm: Red indicates the gear box lubrication pressure has fallen below an
acceptable level; gray indicates the pressure is normal. See section titled "TDS
Motor Status Displays" on page 10-18.
 Blower Alarm: Red indicates a blower fault; gray indicates a normal state with no
fault. See section titled "TDS Motor Status Displays" on page 10-18.
10-4
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-5 of 28
Messages
Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen. Messages include operational status
information (such as brief descriptions of interlock conditions that are preventing certain
operations).
Speed and Torque Controls

Defining a Throttle Limit
The Throttle button displays in the top left corner of the Top Drive operator screen. Press
Throttle to display the throttle setpoint keypad.
Define a maximum throttle (drill speed) value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the
keypad.
Press the blue arrow up or down buttons located at the bottom of the Drill Speed graph to
incrementally increase or decrease the Throttle setpoint value. See section titled "Drill Speed and
Torque Displays" on page 10-2.
This function can also be controlled using the driller chair’s left joystick. See section titled "Drill
Speed" on page 10-14.
Zero Throttle
The Zero Throttle button displays in the bottom left portion of the Top Drive operator screen.
Press Zero Throttle to remove throttle from the top drive and reduce its speed to zero rpm.
This function can also be controlled using the driller chair’s left joystick. See section titled "Drill
Speed" on page 10-14.
10-5
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-6 of 28
Defining a Drill Torque Limit

The Drill Torque button displays in the top left portion of the Top Drive operator screen. Press
Drill Torque to display the drill torque limit keypad.
Define a drill torque limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Press the blue arrow up or down buttons located at the bottom of the Torque graph to
incrementally increase or decrease the Drill Torque value.
Defining a Makeup Torque Limit

The Makeup Torque button displays to the right of the Drill Torque button. Press Makeup Torque
to display the make-up torque limit keypad.
Define a makeup torque limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
10-6
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-7 of 28
Defining a Spin Speed Limit
The top drive must be turned off before setting spin

parameters.
The Spin Speed button displays to the right of the Makeup Torque button. Press Spin Speed to
display the spin speed keypad.
Define a spin speed limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
Defining a Spin Torque Limit

The Spin Torque button displays to the right of the Spin Speed button. Press Spin Torque to
display the spin torque keypad.
Define a spin torque limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.
10-7
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-8 of 28
Direction and Mode Controls

The top drive Direction and Mode controls display in the top center portion of the Top Drive
operator screen.
Press Direction - Forward, Off (disable), or Reverse to define the top drive’s spin direction. A
green backlight indicates the current selection.
Press Mode - Drill, Spin, or Torque to select a top drive mode:
 Select Drill mode to run the top drive at the Throttle (drill speed) and Drill Torque
setpoints. See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 10-5.
 Select Spin mode to run the top drive at the operator-defined Spin Speed and Spin
Torque setpoints. See section titled "Defining a Spin Speed Limit" on page 10-7.
 Press and hold the Torque button to run the top drive using the operator-defined
Makeup Torque setpoint. Release the button to return to Spin mode. See section
titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 10-5.
 Press and hold the Torque button to execute a make up or break out sequence.
The selected direction determines if it is a make up or break out sequence. TW
displays on the button as a reminder that the Torque Wrench is in Auto and will be
used when the Torque button is pressed.
Torque Wrench Mode

To alert the operator that torque wrench will be used, a TW displays on the Torque button if:
 Direction is in Reverse and the mode is in Drill.
 Direction is in Forward, mode is in Drill, and torque wrench is in Auto mode.
Make Up Sequence
 With the Top Drive direction set to Forward: When the Torque button is pressed the
Top Drive will verify that the connection is shouldered by first executing a spin in
sequence. When the feedback torque is at or greater than the spin torque setting,
the torque limit is then ramped up to the makeup torque setting. Once the torque
feedback is equal to or greater than the makeup torque setting, the connection is
complete and the operator can release the Torque button. At this point the torque
limit will then be ramped down.
10-8
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-9 of 28
If the Torque Wrench is in Auto, the first action in the

sequence will be to set the RLA Lock and close the torque
wrench clamp. The last action in the sequence is to
release the clamp. See section titled "Torque Wrench" on
page 10-10.
Break Out Sequence

 With the Top Drive direction set to Reverse: When the Torque button is pressed the
Top Drive will begin to ramp the torque limit to the maximum torque setting. When
the connection breaks and the torque feedback is less than the spin torque setting,
the Top Drive will then go into the spin out phase and stay there until the operator
releases the Torque button.
If the operator selects Torque while in Drill mode the

Torque Wrench will always be used whether or not the
Top Drive is in Auto mode. If the connection needs to be
broken out without using the Torque Wrench, the operator
must select Torque mode while in Spin mode.
Elevator Controls
The top drive’s elevator rotation and elevator controls are located in the top center portion of the
Top Drive operator screen.
Elevator Rotation
 Press Down to rotate the elevator down.
 Press Up to rotate the elevator up.
Elevator
 Press Open to open the elevator.
 Press Arm to prepare the elevator to close.
The elevator can also be controlled using the driller chair’s left joystick. See section titled "Elevator"
on page 10-14.
10-9
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-10 of 28
Torque Wrench
The top drive’s torque wrench controls are located in the left center portion of the Top Drive
operator screen.
 Press and hold the Clamp button to manually clamp the torque wrench onto the drill
pipe.
 Press the Auto toggle button to use automatic torque wrench mode during makeup
operations.
IBOP
The top drive’s internal blowout preventer (IBOP) controls are located in the bottom center portion
of the Top Drive operator screen.
 Press Open to manually open the IBOP.

 Press Auto to automatically open and close the IBOP during operations.
 Press Close to manually close the IBOP.
10-10
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-11 of 28
The IBOP is also controlled using the driller chair’s left control panel IBOP discrete switch (Open
or Close).
IBOP
Brake Controls
If there is a VFD fault active, the brake is held in the

applied state and cannot be released until the fault is
cleared.
The Brake controls are located in the center of the Top Drive operator screen.
Press the Brake - Off, Auto, or On buttons to set the top drive brake mode:
 Press Off to disengage the brake.
 Press Auto to automatically disengage the brake when the operator demands
throttle, and automatically engage the brake when the operator returns the speed to
zero throttle position. The brake will not engage until the drive stops, and is not
holding torque.
 Press On to engage the brake.
10-11
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-12 of 28
Link Controls
The Link Rotation and Link Tilt controls are located in the right center portion of the Top Drive
operator screen.
Link Rotation
Use Link Rotation controls to rotate both the torque wrench and the link tilt assemblies.
 Press and hold the CW (clockwise) - Jog or CCW (counter-clockwise) - Jog button
to rotate the link adapter in the selected direction. Link rotation can also be
controlled using the driller chair’s right joystick. See section titled "Link Rotation" on
page 10-14.
 Press and hold the CW - Home or CCW - Home button to set the link adapter in the
home position.
The Link Tilt controls must be in Float to enable RLA or Link Tilt rotation. A green backlight
Link Tilt
Press the Link Tilt - Drill, Float, or Tilt buttons to control the elevator links:
 Select Drill to tilt the elevator links backward into a position that allows drilling
operations to proceed. Link tilt - drill can also be controlled using the driller chair’s
right joystick. See section titled "Elevator" on page 10-14.
 Select Float to allow the elevator links to float into a neutral position. Link tilt - float
can also be controlled using the driller chair’s right joystick. See section titled
"Elevator" on page 10-14.
 Select Tilt to tilt the elevator links forward to the preset derrickman and mousehole
positions. Press the button once to tilt forward to the preset derrickman position.
Link tilt - tilt can also be controlled using the driller chair’s right joystick. See section
titled "Elevator" on page 10-14.
10-12
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-13 of 28
Dolly Controls
The Dolly controls are located in the bottom left portion of the Top Drive operator screen.
The Dolly has four control buttons:

 Auto
 Manual
 Extend
 Retract
The Extend and Retract buttons have different functions depending on whether the Dolly is in
Auto (by selecting the Auto button) or Manual (by selecting the Manual button).
When in Auto, press the Extend or Retract button once and the Dolly will complete the motion,
decelerate, and stop at the destination.
When in Manual, press and hold the Extend or Retract buttons for the function to complete.
Releasing the buttons will result in the Dolly decelerating and stopping.
This function can also be controlled using the driller chair’s right joystick. See section titled "Dolly"
on page 10-14.
There are also displays associated with the Dolly:
 Fully Extended: Displays green when the dolly is fully extended.
 Dolly Bar Graph: A blue bar rises and falls, reflecting the current dolly position.
 Fully Retracted: Displays green when the dolly is fully retracted.
10-13
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-14 of 28
TDS Joystick Controls

The top drive’s throttle can also be controlled using the driller chair’s left joystick.
Drill Speed
 Top drive drill speed (throttle) can be increased (push slider forward) or decreased
(press slider back) by using the left joystick’s left slider.
 Top drive throttle can be reduced to zero rpm by using the Top Drive Zero Throttle
control button located on the bottom left of the left joystick.
The top drive’s elevator, dolly, and link rotation are controlled using the driller chair’s right joystick.
Elevator
 Press the Elevator Link Float button to allow the elevator links to float into a neutral
position.
 Press the Elevators Open button to open the elevator.
 Press the right joystick’s right slider forward to select Elevator Links Tilt to tilt the
elevator links forward to the preset derrickman position.
 Press the right joystick’s right slider back to select Drill Down to tilt the elevator links
backward into a position that allows drilling operations to proceed.
 Press the Elevator Arm/Close button to prepare the elevator to close.
Dolly
 Press the right joystick’s left slider forward to select Dolly Auto Extend to set the
dolly to automatically extend.
 Press the right joystick’s left slider back to select Dolly Retract to retract the dolly.
Link Rotation
 Press the right joystick’s RLA Rotate slider, located on the bottom side of the
joystick, left or right to select CW (clockwise) or CCW (counter-clockwise) to rotate
the link adapter in the selected direction.
10-14
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-15 of 28
Joystick Help
Various joystick controls are labeled on the Joystick Help screen. The Top Drive is controlled with
the right joystick (as shown above).
The driller must have ownership of the Top Drive in order

to see the top drive control labels on the joystick help
screen.

information.
10-15
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-16 of 28
Joystick Tool Menu

Joystick tool menu.

on page 2-15.

Press Back, located on the main menu bar, to return to the previous Top Drive screen.
10-16
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-17 of 28
Top Drive Tool Menu

Press the Top Drive button, located on the main menu bar, to display the Top Drive tool menu.

on page 2-15.


Events."

Mode" on page 10-27.
See section titled "Calibration" on

page 10-23.
See section titled "Operator" on

page 10-18.
10-17
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-18 of 28
Operator
Press Top Drive --> Operator to display the Top Drive Operator menu.
Motors
Press Top Drive --> Operator --> Motors to display the Auxiliary Controls screen.
Assume ownership of the top drive to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page
2-38.
TDS Motor Status Displays

Motor status indicators display along the right portion of the Auxiliary Controls screen.
 Lube Oil Pressure: Green indicates the lube oil pressure is ok; gray indicates
there is no oil pressure detected.
 Blower Pressure SW: Green indicates there is air pressure coming from the
blower; gray indicates there is no air pressure detected from the blower.
 Temp Alarm: Red indicates a temperature alarm; gray indicates a normal state.
10-18
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-19 of 28
 Temp Abort: Red indicates a warning that the temperature has fallen outside of an
acceptable range; gray indicates a normal state.
 Lube Oil Temp: Red indicates the lube oil temperature has fallen outside of an
acceptable range; gray indicates the lube oil temperature is ok.
Drive Information
Current drive status displays are located in the top center portion of the Auxiliary Controls
screen.
 Speed: Displays the actual speed of the motor.
 Speed Command: Displays the current speed command value received by the
motor.
 Torque: Displays the actual torque on the motor.
 Torque Limit: Displays the operator-defined torque limit value. See section titled
"Speed and Torque Controls" on page 10-5.
 Assigned: Displays green to indicate the drive is assigned; gray to indicate it is not
assigned.
 Ready: Displays green to indicate the drive is ready; gray to indicate an idle state.
 Running: Displays green to indicate the drive monitor is running; gray to indicate
an idle state.
 Fault: Displays red to indicate an active fault state; gray to indicate a normal state.
10-19
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-20 of 28
Fault Reset
The Fault Reset button is located in the top center portion of the Auxiliary Controls screen.
Press the Fault Reset button to clear fault displays after the condition is corrected. A green
!
Resetting the faults does not clear active faults or alarms.
Lube Motor and Blower Controls

The Lube Motor and Blower controls are located along the left portion of the Auxiliary Controls
screen.
 Motor Running: Green indicates the motor is running; gray indicates the motor is
not running.
 Press the Blower - Stop or Start button to manually stop or start the lube or blower
motor. A green backlight indicates the current selection.
10-20
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-21 of 28
RTD Displays and Controls

Resistance temperature device (RTD) A, B, and C displays and controls are located along the
bottom of the Auxiliary Controls screen.
 Input Failure: Displays red to indicate the temperature has fallen outside of an
acceptable range; gray to indicate a normal state.
 Abort: Displays red to indicate the temperature has remained outside of an
acceptable range and the motor will be stopped; gray to indicate a normal state.
 Temperature: Displays the current temperature for each of the RTDs.
 Press the Lockout toggle button to manually lockout or release a RTD. A red
Lockout backlight indicates the RTD is locked out; gray indicates the RTD is not
locked out.
Braking Resistor Status

The Braking Resistor Status displays are located to the right of the RTD displays and controls.
 Chopper Fault: Red indicates the drive system is reporting an active chopper fault;
gray indicates a normal state.
 High Temperature: Red indicates an active high temperature alarm; gray indicates
a normal state.
 Air Flow Alarm: Yellow indicates an active air flow alarm; gray indicates a normal
state.
Messages
10-21
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-22 of 28
Trends
Press Top Drive --> Operator --> Trends to display the Trends screen.
The Trends screen displays the top drive’s drilling speed and torque values graphically:
 Press Speed (Day) to display drilling speed data for the past 24 hours.
 Press Speed (Hour) to display drilling speed data for the past hour.
 Press Torque (Day) to display torque speed data for the past 24 hours.
 Press Torque (Hour) to display torque speed data for the past hour.
See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page

10-5.
10-22
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-23 of 28
Calibration
Press Top Drive --> Calibration to display the Top Drive Calibration menu.
Dolly Calibration
Press Top Drive --> Calibration --> Dolly Calibration to display the (default) Dolly Calibration
screen.
Ownership must be established, the top drive must be turned on, and maintenance mode must be
enabled before calibration can begin. Green Top Drive On and In Maintenance Mode displays
indicate that both states are true. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-38 and section
titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 10-27.
Use with caution. Significant risk of equipment

damage and danger to personnel exists in
maintenance mode. Failure to observe and follow
proper safe working procedures could result in
equipment damage, and extended rig down time.
Press a button to select a calibration step, then follow screen prompts to calibrate the top drive.
Messages
10-23
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-24 of 28
Set Up
Press Set Up, located in the center left portion of the (default) Dolly Calibration screen, to display
the Dolly Configuration screen.
Follow screen prompts to calibrate the dolly.

Messages
10-24
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-25 of 28
ATOS
Press ATOS, located in the center left portion of the (default) Dolly Calibration screen, to display
the Dolly ATOS screen.

Messages
10-25
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-26 of 28
Position Calibration
Press Position Calibration, located in the center of the (default) Dolly Calibration screen, to
display the Dolly Position screen.

Messages
10-26
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Revision 01
Page 10-27 of 28
Maintenance Mode
Press Top Drive --> Maintenance Mode to display the Maintenance Mode screen.
Press TDS SBC - Active to engage maintenance mode for the top drive. Press TDS SBC -
Inactive to disengage maintenance mode. A green backlight indicates the current selection.
See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-13.
10-27
www.nov.com
16525109-MAN
Page 10-28 of 28
10-28
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Network Information A
This chapter contains general information about the

Amphion control system, and may or may not represent
your particular rig configuration.
Network Commands
Opening a Command Prompt
1. Press <Ctrl+Escape> to display the Windows® Start menu.
2. Click Run, then type cmd into the field provided.
Figure A-1. Command prompt
3. Press <Enter> or click OK.

4. At the C:> prompt, type the appropriate network command, then press <Enter>.
Command Descriptions and Syntax

Ping
Use the ping command with a url, IP address, or host name to test network connectivity, or to
verify communication. Use the ping localhost command if both the host name and IP address are
unknown (see Figure A-5 on page A-3).
See section titled "Network Address Assignments" on page A-5 in this appendix for a complete IP
address list.
A-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
16521509-MAN
A Network Information Revision 01
Page A-2 of 6
Figure A-2. Ping using a url address
Figure A-3. Ping using the host name
Figure A-4. Ping using an IP address
A-2
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page A-3 of 6
Figure A-5. Ping localhost
Ping Command Switch Options
Figure A-6. Ping command switch options
Use the ping command to display a list of command switches.
Syntax example: ping -t 123.45.67.8

IP Config
Use the ipconfig command to determine the domain name server (DNS), IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway assigned to the current computer.
Use the ipconfig /all command to list the IP address, subnet mask address, and other information
for each network card to which the current computer is connected.
Tracert
Use the tracert command and either the url or IP address to display hop information (all network
devices between the computer and the destination address).
Syntax example: tracert www.varco.com or tracert 123.45.67.8
A-3
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page A-4 of 6
Nslookup
Use the nslookup command and a url address to troubleshoot name resolution issues. Displays
server name and IP address information.
Syntax example: nslookup www.varco.com
Figure A-7. Nslookup command
A-4
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Revision 01
Page A-5 of 6
Network Address Assignments
See NOV document number D801000721-GEN-001, titled

“Amphion Standard DCDA Network IP Addresses,” or your
rig-specific “Amphion Network Topology” document.
A-5
www.nov.com
16521509-MAN
Page A-6 of 6
A-6
www.nov.com
™
Amphion
Tool Controller Service Manual
For use with www versions 1.6.0 and earlier
Reference Reference Description

Amphion Tool Controller
D811001117-MAN-001
Service Manual
L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to
hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited purposes only National Oilwell Varco
and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in RIG SOLUTIONS
part, or use of this design or distribution of this information to
others is not permitted without the express written consent of
11000 Corporate Centre Drive
D811001117-MAN-001 02
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Revision History
Laurie Jane Paul

02 27 Oct 2009 Second Issue
Braaten Kellstrom Williams
Laurie Paul
01 22 Jun 2009 First issue Jeff Faga
Braaten Williams
Change Description
01 First Issue
02 Second Issue to rename document title and reformat using new template style.

This program contains proprietary as well as free software; you can redistribute and/or modify the free portion of the software under the terms of the GNU General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. To viewand/or obtain a copy of the
free software used in this product,please visit ftp://ftp.amphion.nov.com/gpl/.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall convey to you the right to utilize National Oilwell Varco trademarks, trade names, services marks or other
National Oilwell Varco proprietary materials.
In addition, you shall not have the right to publish the name of National Oilwell Varco without the prior permission of National Oilwell Varco in writing.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Licensealong with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page i of x
Table of Contents

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
NOV Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Chapter 2: Amphion™ Control Overview

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Multi-Tool Controller (MTC) Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Network Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tool Controller Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Advantech™ Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Beckhoff™ Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
CompactFlash® Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Ethernet (ENET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Profibus (Process Field Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
COM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Mouse/Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Main Service Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Controller Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Locating Tool Controller IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
What is Profibus? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Tool Controllers and NOV Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Chapter 3: Getting Started

Connecting to the Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
TCP/IP Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
With a DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Without a DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
i
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page ii of x
Table of Contents
Verifying the Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Determining an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Using the CompactFlash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Using a Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Using a Monitor and Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Browser Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Disable Proxy Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Install Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Java Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Open UDP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Chapter 4: Network Links

IP Network Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Device or Tool Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Edit Address List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Add a New Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Add a Group Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Rename a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Delete a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Edit a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Delete a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Send Address List to Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Show or Hide IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Investigate Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Chapter 5: Software Management Links

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Backup and Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Varball Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Upload a Varball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Install, Download, or Delete a Varball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Back Up a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Software Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Install WWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ownership Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Process Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Tool Jar File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Install Controller Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Install .tgz or .tar.gz Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Library Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Install Operating System Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Install Applicom® Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Install Documentation Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Transfer Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Uploading Files to the Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
ii
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page iii of x
Table of Contents
Tool Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Modifying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Downloading a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Quick Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Chapter 6: Debug Monitor

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Standard Debug Item Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Selecting Items to Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Creating a Link to Monitored Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Graphing Data for Individual Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Recording and Graphing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
The Graph Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Saving Recorded Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Graph Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Graph Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Show All Graphs on Same Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Show All Graphs Stacked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Show All Graphs Full Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Show All Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Plot One Object Against Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Object Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Plot Information Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Move, Size, Display (On/Off), and Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Individual Graph Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Mousing Inside the Graph Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Changing and Saving Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Chapter 7: I/O Diagnostics

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
I/O Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Profibus DP1 or DP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Controller-to-Controller (C2C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
No Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Step7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cyberbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
I/O Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
I/O Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Setting or Forcing Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Displaying Input/Output Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
iii
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page iv of x
Table of Contents
Chapter 8: Scheduler Diagnostics

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Selecting Tool Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Changing Communication Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Show Distribution Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Show C2C Inconsistencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Chapter 9: Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Screen Communication Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tool Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
HTTP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Write Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Chapter 10: Cyberbase Status

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Tool Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
HTTP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Write Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Chapter 11: Modbus Status

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
HTTP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Write Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
iv
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page v of x
Table of Contents
Chapter 12: Profibus Network Status

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
HTTP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Write Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Chapter 13: Step 7 Status

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Process Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
HTTP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Write Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Chapter 14: State Diagrams

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
State Diagram Language Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Unified Modeling Language Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Diagnosing Problems Using State Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Chapter 15: Axis Controller

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Selecting an Axis Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Axis Controller Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Override Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Position Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Feedback Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Maximum Negative Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Maximum Positive Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Quick Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
v
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page vi of x
Table of Contents
Editing a Field Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

Axis Controller Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
State Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Execution Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Chapter 16: Download Alarms
Chapter 17: Operator Screen Configuration

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Current Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
My Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Main Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Changing the Current Tool Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Adding a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Changing the Button Title and Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Deleting a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Moving a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Setting the Default Tool Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Restoring Original Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Saving Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Chapter 18: Service Pages Configuration

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Show or Hide the Path Editor Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Show or Hide the State Diagram Viewer Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Add or Delete Custom Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Add a Custom Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Delete a Custom Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Chapter 19: Ownership Configuration

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Load Ownership File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Save Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Tool Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Add a Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Edit a Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Remove a Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Set the Base IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Change Item Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Edit Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
vi
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page vii of x
Table of Contents
HMIs (Touchscreens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7

Add a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Edit a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Remove a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Change Item Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Add a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Edit a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Remove a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Change Item Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Add a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Edit a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
Remove a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
Edit a Group’s Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
Remove a Tool from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
Exclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
Add an Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
Edit an Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
Remove an Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18
Add Preconfigured Main Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18
Editing a Button’s Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
Remove All Preconfigured Main Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21
Add a Process Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21
Select the Navigation Bar’s Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-23
Add a Tool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-24
Edit a Tool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-25
Add a Link to a Tool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-26
Edit a Tool Button Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-27
Remove a Link from a Tool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-27
Remove a Tool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-28
Chapter 20: Simulation Control

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Enable and Turn On Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Disable or Pause Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Define a Tool Controller as a Dedicated Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Set WebObjects Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Load an Existing a Simulation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Download a Simulation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
vii
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page viii of x
Table of Contents
Upload a Simulation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Chapter 21: Array Manipulator

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Chapter 22: Trigger Editor

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Reference Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Creating an Event Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Boolean Value Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Numeric Value Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Editing a Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Deleting a Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Chapter 23: Consistency Checker

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Chapter 24: Set Date and Time

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Chapter 25: Path Editor

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Selecting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Changing Point Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
Setting Path Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
Adding, Deleting, and Editing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
Adding Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
Deleting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8
Editing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8
Adding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
Selecting a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
Show or Hide Teach Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
Learning a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
Show Traverse Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
Set Traverse Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
viii
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page ix of x
Table of Contents
Show or Hide Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13

Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-14
Fingerboard Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
Guess Fingerboard Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
Edit Fingerboard Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
Show or Hide Fingerboard Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
Open Fingerboard Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
Chapter 26: Set IP Address on Network Device

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Chapter 27: Controller Links

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
Java® Virtual Manager (JVM) Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Log Manager/Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
Restart the JVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
Flashing the Applicom® Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8
Verifying that the Tool Controller is Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9
Restarting the Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10
Halting the Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10
Operator Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
Chapter 28: Advanced Operations

Replacing a Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
Removing and Installing a CompactFlash™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
Tool Controller IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
About the admin_config.xml File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7
The Controller Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-8
The Webserver Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-10
The Logging Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
Interfacing With Linux® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15
Tool Controller User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15
Installing PuTTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-16
Starting an Interactive Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-16
Connecting to the Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-18
Listing Tool Controller Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-18
Installing Tool Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-19
Restarting the JVM (restartj9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-19
Rebooting the Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-20
Linux Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-20
cd, ls, ls -l, pwd, cp, mw Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-21
ps Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-21
top Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-22
ix
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page x of x
Table of Contents
netstat Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-22

Vi Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-23
Appendix
Profibus Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
I/O Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
I/O Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Node Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Byte and Bit Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Setting Up and Using AmphiCom™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
SERVICE Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
SBC Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Using AmphiCom with Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Dynamic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Writing Data to the Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Visual Basic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
x
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 1-1 of 4
General Information
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein. National
Oilwell Varco (NOV®) will not be held liable for errors in this material, or for consequences arising
from misuse of this material.
Conventions
Notes, cautions, and warnings provide readers with additional information, and to advise the
reader to take specific action to protect personnel from potential injury or lethal conditions. They
may also inform the reader of actions necessary to prevent equipment damage. Pay close
attention to these advisories.
Notes

provided about the current topics.
Cautions
!
equipment or injury to personnel exists. Follow instructions
explicitly. Extreme care should be taken when performing
operations or procedures preceded by this caution symbol.
Warnings

observe and follow proper procedures could result in
property loss, or significant equipment damage.
1-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 1-2 of 4
Illustrations
snapshots for use in identifying parts or establishing nomenclature, and may or may not be drawn
to scale.
Safety Requirements
NOV equipment is installed and operated in a controlled drilling rig environment involving
outlined in NOV manuals are the recommended methods of performing operations and
maintenance.
!
Personnel Training
equipment, or those in the vicinity of the equipment, should be trained on rig safety, tool operation,
!
Contact the NOV training department for more information about equipment operation and
maintenance training.
Recommended Tools
NOV recommends that only those tools specified be used when stated. Ensure that personnel and
equipment safety are not jeopardized when following service procedures or using tools not
specifically recommended by NOV.
1-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 1-3 of 4

The equipment discussed in this manual may require or contain one or more utilities, such as
!
R Isolate all energy sources before beginning work.

R Avoid performing maintenance or repairs while the equipment is in operation.
R Wear proper protective equipment during equipment installation, maintenance, or
repair.
R Verify that all components (such as cables, hoses, etc.) are tagged and labeled
during disassembly and reassembly of equipment to ensure correct installment.
R Replace failed or damaged components with NOV certified parts. Failure to do so
could result in equipment damage, or personal injury.
Routine Maintenance
Equipment must be maintained on a regular and routine basis. See the service manual for
maintenance recommendations.
!

NOV equipment is designed for specific functions and applications, and should be used only for
their intended purpose.
1-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 1-4 of 4
NOV Service Centers

The link below provides after-hours contact information for emergencies or other equipment issues requiring
an immediate response by NOV service personnel.
http://www.nov.com/contact_us/24hr_EmergencyList.asp
Also see NOV document number D811001337-DAS-001, titled “Service Center Directory.”
1-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 2-1 of 12
Amphion™ Control Overview
Introduction
The Amphion™ service pages interface provides extensive information about how the tool is
performing. The interface is Web-based, accessible using a Web browser. A technician can
connect to most devices connected to the network to monitor its performance and help diagnose
problems.
This manual explains how to:
R Connect to the device
R Configure device settings
R Replace a tool controller
R Identify performance problems
R Identify communication problems
This manual does not address drilling operation screens or

specific tool calibration procedures. Please refer to tool-
specific documentation, or the rig-specific Amphion
operator’s guide for additional information.
2-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
2 Amphion™ Control Overview Revision 02
Page 2-2 of 12
Multi-Tool Controller (MTC) Cabinet

The MTC cabinet houses the workstation and network control components, and is normally
located in the drill floor local electrical room (LER).
Network Switches
The MTC cabinet contains redundant network switches developed particularly for use in industrial
environments. They allow construction of switched Ethernet networks that conform to the IEEE
802 and 802.3u standard using copper wire or optical fiber in a ring topology. Switches are
mounted by snapping them onto a standard DIN rail.
Power Supplies
Two redundant 24-volt DC power supplies provide power via a common bus to most components
inside the MTC. In general, each component has its own circuit breaker to provide maximum
maintenance flexibility.
There are also two 5-volt power supplies dedicated to the Advantech tool controllers, and two 24-
volt power supplies dedicated to the Beckhoff tool controllers that work in parallel to share power
demands. One, however, is sufficient should the other fail.
The multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinet provides power distribution for workstation equipment, and
supports dual redundant uninterruptible power supply (UPS) feeds. It is designed for installation in
a safe area, and supports bottom-entry cable penetration.
See rig-specific engineering cabinet assembly diagram

and electrical connection diagram for more detailed
information.
2-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 2-3 of 12
Amphion™ Control Overview 2
Tool Controller Hardware

The tool controller assembly, located in the control system (MTC) cabinet, is an industrial CPU to
which you can connect using a browser. Two typical tool controllers are shown here.
Advantech™ Tool Controller
COM 1 Power
Ethernet ON
Fuse
status lights (10-Amp/250-Volt)
COM
OFF
LAN F U SE Profibus
status light
E
Ethernet
US
FU
F SE
KEY
MSE BLINKING
RST
Mouse/ GREEN = OK
Power
Keyboard status light
VGA
PWR HDD
COMPACT
Hard disk drive
FLASH status light
Video DP1
Profibus DP1
Compact
Flash card
2-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 2-4 of 12
Beckhoff™ Tool Controller
CPU status
Profibus status indicators CPU Module
indicator Power status
indicator
Ethernet CX Profibus Scanner

port 1
DRL-DPM-BKF
BECKHOFF BECKHOFF BECKHOFF
BradCommunications
BF
ST
Profibus
Ethernet
port 2
CompactFlash CompactFlash Power

Profibus card insert card eject connections
Power
!
Do not remove the CompactFlash® card before turning off
power. Do not turn off the tool controller while it is
controlling a tool or communicating with other devices on
the network.
R Advantech: Press the Power button on the tool controller to turn it on or off.
R Beckhoff: Press the tool controller’s individual circuit breaker located inside the
MTC cabinet to turn it on or off.
Refer to your rig-specific MTC assembly drawing for the exact location of the power
switch.
The Power LEDs display green when the tool controller is on.
2-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 2-5 of 12
CompactFlash® Card
Tool controllers contain a processor and memory, and run a specialized version of the Linux™
operating system. A Java™ Technology program is embedded on a removable device called a
CompactFlash memory card. On the Advantech tool controller, the CompactFlash card is installed
in a slot in the tool controller chassis, secured by a screw-down panel. The Beckhoff tool controller
has a CompactFlash eject button.
The CompactFlash LED (HDD) blinks when the card is in use (information is being read or
written).
Communication Ports
!
Although some tool controllers have keyboard, mouse, and
monitor ports similar to a standard PC, they should not be
used during normal operations.
Connecting directly to the tool controller using the COM1

or the keyboard/mouse and video ports is a non-standard
procedure for this product. To prevent possible equipment
damage, do not experiment with connections.
Ethernet (ENET)
Connects the tool controller to the local area network (LAN).
R Advantech: A green light located near the port displays solid green when
communication is established, and another blinks yellow when the tool controller is
sending or receiving data.
R Beckhoff: LAN 1 or LAN 2 (related to Ethernet ports 1 and 2) displays solid green
when communication is established, and blinks when the tool controller is sending
or receiving data.
Profibus (Process Field Bus)
Profibus is optional. Connects the tool controller to remote I/Os. The Profibus communication
status indicator normally displays green, indicating a ready status. Blinking green indicates that
data is being transmitted or received.
Blinking red LEDs indicate a data exchange error. Steady red indicates a wiring problem, a bus
speed discrepancy, or a node-address conflict. Blinking red and green indicates that the Applicom
card was flashed, but there is no Profibus hardware attached to it.
COM1
Can be used to connect a computer to the tool controller using a a serial cable (Advantech only).
Mouse/Keyboard
PS/2 port that can be used to connect an keyboard or mouse to the tool controller (Advantech
only).
2-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 2-6 of 12
Video
Can be used to connect an SVGA monitor to the tool controller (Advantech only).
Main Service Page

Type the appropriate tool controller’s IP address into your Web browser’s address field to connect
to the tool controller interface.
Click the IP Network link located on the left side of the page to display a grouped list of devices
connected to the network.
The center and right side of the page contains additional links to the current tool controller
interface. See general descriptions below.
The top right corner of the page displays the current controller’s tool name.
Page options are not the same for all tool controllers.
After selecting a link, click the Contents link to return to main service page.
You can also use the Back or Forward buttons in your browser to navigate between pages.
2-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 2-7 of 12
IP Network
Contains links and information about devices connected to the rig network, including IP address
assignments, communication status information, and IP configuration options. See Chapter 4,
titled "Network Links” for more information.
Software Management
Contains links to software version information and software installer and file transfer utilities
(normally used by rig technicians and software engineers). See Chapter 5, titled "Software
Management Links” for more information.
Diagnostics
Contains links to I/O and other communication status screens. Also contains a link to axis
controllers and state diagrams (where applicable), which are interactive documents used to debug
tool problems. See the following chapters in this manual for more information:
R Chapter 6, titled "Debug Monitor”
R Chapter 7, titled "I/O Diagnostics”
R Chapter 8, titled "Scheduler Diagnostics”
R Chapter 9, titled "Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status”
R Chapter 10, titled "Cyberbase Status”
R Chapter 11, titled "Modbus Status”
R Chapter 12, titled "Profibus Network Status”
R Chapter 13, titled "Step 7 Status”
R Chapter 14, titled "State Diagrams”
R Chapter 15, titled "Axis Controller”
R Chapter 16, titled "Download Alarms”
Configuration
This section contains links to the following modules. See the appropriately-titled chapter for
additional information.
R Operator Screen Configuration
R Service Pages Configuration
R Ownership Configuration
R Simulation Control
R Array Manipulator
R Trigger Editor
R Consistency Checker
R Set Date and Time
R Path Editor
R Set IP Address on Network Device
2-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 2-8 of 12
Controller Links
Contains the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) status and restart controls, the current tool controller’s
status, halt, start, and restart controls, and Applicom card flash controls. Also contains a link to the
current tool controller’s log manager files, the operator’s drilling control touchscreen interface, and
other NOV technical documentation.
R See the rig-specific Amphion operator’s guide for information about the operator’s
drilling control (touchscreen) software interface.
R See Chapter 27, titled "Controller Links.”
2-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 2-9 of 12
Locating Tool Controller IP Addresses

R See NOV document number D801000721-GEN-001, titled “Amphion Standard
DCDA Network IP Addresses.”
R Refer to the Amphion user’s or technical reference manual for a complete list of IP
addresses.
R Use the main service page’s IP Network link. See section titled "Device or Tool
Selection" on page 4-2, and section titled "Investigate Address" on page 4-8”.
R Refer to rig and network drawings.
R The IP address of the tool controller may be printed on the CompactFlash card
label. Remove the card from the tool controller and look at the label.
R See section titled "Determining an IP Address" on page 3-8.
2-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 2-10 of 12
What is Profibus?
Process Field Bus (Profibus) refers to the hardware. Profibus DP is the software (communication
protocol) for connecting multiple industrial devices on a shared pathway or channel (bus).
Laptop
Ethernet Computer
Hub
Tool Tool Tool

Controller #1 Controller #2 Controller #3
DP1 DP1 DP1
Profibus Profibus Profibus
Sensor Digital Actuator VFD Sensor Digital Actuator Sensor Digital Actuator Encoder
I/O I/O I/O
I/O Devices on Tool #1 I/O Devices on Tool #2 I/O Devices on Tool #3
Features:
R Ability to connect I/O devices and simple field devices to an automation system
R Flexible communication for peer-to-peer networking and data collection
R High-speed data transfer of small volumes of data between central and peripheral
devices
R High data integrity
R One master can service several slaves
R Several masters can participate on the bus
See a complete description of this protocol at http://www.profibus.com.
2-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 2-11 of 12
Tool Controllers and NOV Tools

Ethernet communication is used for network communication, and Profibus DP is used to
communicate between tool controllers and the remote I/Os. Profibus refers to the hardware,
whereas Profibus DP refers to the protocol for connecting multiple industrial devices on a shared
pathway or channel (bus).
One Applicom® communication card installed in some tool controllers provides Profibus
communication with individual tool remote I/Os, when required.
A tool controller may have one Applicom card (master) or no Applicom cards. The card (labeled
DP1) communicates with the remote I/O.
The tool controller program sends read and write commands to the ApplicomIO® interface, which
transfers them through the master Applicom card to the slave (point or node on the tool). If the
program sends a “read” command, the slave responds by sending input back to the tool controller.
If the program sends a “write” command, the slave responds by performing the command.
Tool Profibus Card Profibus

Controller (inside tool Device
controller)
Control Program
DP Master DP Slave
IO_ReadByte...
Input data Input data
Applicom IO®
interface
Output data Output data
IO_WriteQByte...
Flashing an applicom uploads the configuration as set in

the applicom.zip file located in the /varco/data/applicom
folder to the Applicom card, and is burned to EEPROM.
Once the Applicom card has been flashed, the settings are
retained until flashed with a different configuration.
See Chapter 27, section titled "Flashing the Applicom®

Card" on page 27-5 for instructions.
2-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 2-12 of 12
2-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-1 of 18
Getting Started
Connecting to the Tool Controller

1. Connect your computer to the rig network. See section titled "TCP/IP Network
Settings" on page 3-3.
2. Determine the IP address of the tool controller.
There are several ways to do this. See section titled "Determining an IP Address" on
page 3-8.
3. Type the tool controller’s IP address into the Web browser’s address field, then
press <Enter> to display the main service page (shown here).
If you are able to connect to the main service page, your computer settings do not
require adjustment.
If you are unable to connect, see section below.
To optimize your browser for the Web interface, see section

titled "Browser Settings" on page 3-13.
If you are unable to connect to the tool controller interface:
3-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
3 Getting Started Revision 02
Page 3-2 of 18
1. Verify that the tool controller is turned on. See section titled "Power" on page 2-4.
2. Verify that the Profibus communication status light card is blinking. See illustrations
in section titled "Tool Controller Hardware" on page 2-3.
3. Verify that the Ethernet cable is connected the tool controller, and the Ethernet
indicator lights display green. To locate the port and the indicator lights, see
illustrations in section titled "Tool Controller Hardware" on page 2-3.
4. Verify that your computer is connected to the network.
5. Ping the tool controller. See section titled "Verifying the Connection" on page 3-7.
6. Verify that the computer’s IP address is correct. Each IP address consists of four
parts, separated by periods:
xxx.xxx.xxx.yyy
The first three parts (xxx.xxx.xxx) are the same for all devices. The fourth part
(yyy) must be unique for each device on the network.
If another computer is already connected to the network, the address you are
attempting to assign to your system may already be in use. Ping the address you
are attempting to use. If you get a response, the address is already taken.
For more information, see section titled "Determining an IP Address" on page 3-8.
3-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-3 of 18
Getting Started 3
TCP/IP Network Settings

Your computer may already be set up to connect to the network automatically. If not, configure
network settings manually as described in this chapter.
NOV standard computer settings have DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol) enabled, as
most rigs have a DHCP server. Computers use DHCP to automatically obtain configuration
information that allows them to join networks. Specific procedures depend upon your particular
rig’s DHCP server.
To connect directly to a single tool controller, or if the rig does not have a DHCP server. See
section titled "Without a DHCP Server" on page 3-5.
If you are attempting to connect to a non-NOV network, and cannot connect after following the
procedures outlined in this chapter, contact your network administrator for assistance.
With a DHCP Server

Connect your computer to the network, and attempt to connect to the controller computer. If you
are unable to connect, it may be necessary to repair your network connection by clearing existing
IP address settings:
1. Click Start --> Run.
2. Type cmd into the space provided, then press <Enter>.
A command line prompt window appears.
3. Type ipconfig, then press <Enter> to display the network settings for each
adapter.
Q The IP address beginning with 128.1.x.x for the first adapter indicates that it is
configured for the 128.1.0.0 network.
Q IP addresses of 0.0.0.0 indicate that the adapter is not configured because the
computer is using dial-up networking.
4. Type ipconfig /release, then press <Enter>.
5. Type ipconfig /renew, then press <Enter> to receive a new IP address from
the DHCP server.
3-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-4 of 18
6. Type exit, then press <Enter> to close the window.
The name of the Ethernet adapter varies depending on the

manufacturer. If you unsure about which adapter to select,
repeat the steps in this section for each Ethernet adapter
listed to identify one that works.
If you are still unable to connect:

1. Click Start --> Control Panel --> Network Connections.
2. Right-click Local Area Connection, the click to select Repair from the pop-up
menu.
3-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-5 of 18
Getting Started 3
Without a DHCP Server

1. Click Start --> Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Network Connections icon to display the Network Connections
pop-up window.
3. Right-click Local Area Connection, then click to select Properties from the menu
to display the Local Area Connection Properties window.
4. Scroll down to display and click to select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click
Properties to display the pop-up window shown here.
5. Click to select the Use the following IP address radio button.
3-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-6 of 18
To connect to another network using DHCP, select Obtain

an IP address automatically.
6. Type the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway into the spaces
provided.
If you do not have rig-specific settings, see NOV document number
D801000721-GEN-001, titled “Amphion Standard DCDA Network IP Addresses.”
Two computers on the same network cannot have the

same IP address. Make sure the IP address for your
computer is not already in use.
7. Click OK.
8. Click OK again to close the Properties window.
3-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-7 of 18
Getting Started 3
Verifying the Connection

The ping command tests the network connection between your computer and the tool controller.
2. Type cmd into the space provided, then press <Enter>.
A command line prompt window appears.
3. Type ping [IP address] into the space provided, then press <Enter>.
The figure shown here illustrates successful communication with the tool controller.
If you cannot access the service pages, but are able to ping the tool controller:
R Verify that you used the correct IP address when attempting to connect to the
service pages.
R Shut off the tool controller, then ping it again to verify that the IP address is no
longer part of the network. Turn the tool controller back on. Verify the IP address
again. If you are still able to ping the tool controller, allow it to run for up to four
hours. A known issue exists, wherein tool controller start-up time is slow under
certain conditions.
R Verify that the CPU running light, located on the front of the control system cabinet,
is on. If the tool controller program has stopped running, this light will not be
illuminated.
If ping responds with “Request timed out,” the IP address for the tool controller is incorrect. See
section titled "Determining an IP Address" on page 3-8.
3-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-8 of 18
Determining an IP Address
The IP address is stored in the CompactFlash™ in the tool controller. This procedure explains how
to bypass normal procedures and determine the IP address directly from the CompactFlash.
To prevent damage to the tool controller, do not

experiment with commands while connected to a
computer as described in this section.
There are three ways to access this information directly:

R Using the CompactFlash card and your computer.
R Using a serial cable between the tool controller and your computer (Advantech tool
controllers only).
R Using a monitor and keyboard connected to the unit.
The Advantech tool controllers have COM1, video, and

mouse/keyboard ports. The Beckhoff tool controllers may
or may not include a module containing DVI and USB
ports. See the illustrations in section titled “Tool Controller
Hardware” on page 2-3 for port locations.
Using the CompactFlash Card

1. Mount the CompactFlash card on your computer using a compact flash adapter.
2. Open Windows® file explorer and locate the device named VARCO_FAT, then
double-click to open.
3. Locate and double-click the file named Win2Flash.exe.
After the application gathers data, it displays the IP address (in addition to other
information about the card).
Using a Serial Connection

1. Connect the tool controller to a computer using a serial (null modem) cable between
the COM1 port on the tool controller and your computer’s serial port. To locate the
COM1 port on the tool controller, see section titled "Tool Controller Hardware" on
page 2-3.
2. Click Start --> Programs --> Accessories.
3. Launch the HyperTerminal application.
4. HyperTerminal may automatically prompt you to create a new connection. If not click
File --> New Connection to display the View Properties window.
3-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-9 of 18
Getting Started 3
Arrow-down button
Configure button
5. Click the Connect To tab if necessary.

6. Click the Connect using arrow-down button and click to select COM1.
7. Click Configure to display the COM1 Properties window.
Click the down arrow next to each port setting and select the following from the
drop-down menus:
Q Bits per second: 9600
Q Data bits: 8 data bits
Q Parity: None
Q Stop bits: 1t
Q Flow control: None
8. Click Apply, then click OK.
9. Click the Settings tab.
10. Click to select the Terminal keys radio button.
3-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-10 of 18
11. Click the Emulation arrow-down button and click to select ANSI.
12. Set the Backscroll buffer lines to 500.
13. Click OK.
14. Shut down the tool controller. Wait five seconds, then turn the unit on again to cycle
power.
The program displays a series of messages followed by a login prompt.
15. Continue with step 3 in section titled "Using a Monitor and Keyboard" on page 3-11
below.
3-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-11 of 18
Getting Started 3
Using a Monitor and Keyboard

1. Connect a VGA monitor and a keyboard to the tool controller.
2. Turn the tool controller off, wait five seconds, then turn the unit on again to cycle
power.
3. After initial startup messages, type root at the login prompt and press <Enter>.
4. Type ifconfig, then press <Enter>.
The IP address and other network information displays.
The IP address begins with the prefix inet addr.
3-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-12 of 18
If the information you need is located earlier in the buffer,

press and hold the <Shift> key, then press the <Page Up>
key to scroll through the information.
5. Type exit, then press <Enter>.

6. Disconnect the serial cable or monitor and keyboard connections.
3-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-13 of 18
Getting Started 3
Browser Settings
National Oilwell Varco (NOV®) recommends using Microsoft® Internet Explorer version 5.5 or later
to connect to the tool controller. Other browsers may work, but have not been tested (versions 5.5,
6.0, 7.0, and 8.0 have been tested). Instructions in this manual are based on the assumption you
are using Internet Explorer version 6.0
This section provides steps for optimizing your browser to work with the tool controller.
Disable Proxy Server

1. Launch Internet Explorer.
2. Click Tools --> Internet Options to display the Internet Options pop-up window.
3. Click to select the Connections tab.

4. Click LAN Settings to display the Local Area Network (LAN) Settings pop-up
window (shown below).
3-13
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-14 of 18
Deselect
5. Click to deselect Use a Proxy Server and click OK.
Contact your system administrator if the proxy server

option is disabled.
6. Click OK again to close the Internet Options window.
3-14
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-15 of 18
Getting Started 3
Install Java
1. Launch Internet Explorer.
2. Type www.java.com into the browser’s address field.
3. Click Free Java Download, then follow screen prompts to install java on your
computer.
4. Restart Internet Explorer.
5. Connect to the tool controller by following instructions in the section section titled
"Connecting to the Tool Controller" on page 3-1.
Java Settings
1. Click Start --> Control Panel --> Java to display the Java Control Panel pop-up
window.
2. If necessary, click to select the General tab, then click Settings to display the
screen shown below.
3-15
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-16 of 18
Deselect
3. If necessary, click to deselect the Keep temporary files on my computer radio

button.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK again to close the Java Control Panel pop-up window.
3-16
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 3-17 of 18
Getting Started 3
Open UDP Ports

A feature in Windows XP Service Pack 2 blocks UDP streaming data coming from the tool
controller, forcing the applets to use an alternative HTTP servlet method of communication, which
can slow communications considerably.
Although it is possible to unblock whole programs in Windows Firewall, NOV recommends
unblocking specific ports instead.
1. Click Start --> Control Panel, then double-click Windows Firewall to display the
Windows Firewall pop-up window.
2. Click to select the Exceptions tab.

3. Click Add Port to display the Add Port pop-up window (shown below).
3-17
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 3-18 of 18
4. Click to select UDP.

5. Type widget udp 10109 (for UDP port 10109) into the space provided in the
Name field.
6. Type 10109 into the space provided in the Port Number field.
7. Click OK to return to the Windows Firewall pop-up window.
8. Click Add Port again to display the Add Port pop-up window.
9. Repeat steps 5 - 7 to appropriately name and open the following ports:
Q 10110
Q 10111
Q 10112
Q 10113
Q 10114
Q 10115
Q 10116
Q 10117
Q 10118
Q 10119
Q 10120
3-18
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 4-1 of 10
Network Links
IP Network Menu
Click IP Network to display the IP Network menu.
Click to select a group and display a list of all known devices connected to the network within that
group, or click to select an action (discussed later in this chapter).
4-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
4 Network Links Revision 02
Page 4-2 of 10
Device or Tool Selection

Click IP Network --> NOV Tool Controllers (or any other group) to display a list of all known
devices connected to the network within that group.
If the network links system is still attempting to communicate with a device the text displays in
yellow, and the message “not yet tested” displays next to its name.
Devices that do not respond to a ping display in red, along with an “unresponsive to ping” status
message.
If the ping is successful, the text display is black, and no status message appears.
Close and reopen the menu to refresh the ping status

message displays.
Click to select a device from the submenu to display its main service page, as shown in section
titled "Main Service Page" on page 2-6.
Click the Show or Hide IP Addresses toggle menu item to display or hide each device’s IP
address. See section titled "Show or Hide IP Addresses" on page 4-8.
4-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 4-3 of 10
Network Links 4
Edit Address List

Click IP Network --> Edit Address List to display the device groups connected to the network.
From this window, you can add, delete, and rename device groups, or add, delete, and rename
device names within each group.
Click the icon located to the left of the group to expand and display the devices within the group.
Click OK or cancel to close the window and return to the main Web page.
4-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 4-4 of 10
Add a New Group

Right-click Network Device Groups, then click Add Group.
Type a group name into the space provided, then click OK to close the Add Group pop-up window.
The new group is now listed in the Edit Address List window.
See "Add a Group Device” below.
Add a Group Device

Right-click the device group, then click Add Network Device.
Type the device name and valid IP address into the spaces provided, then click OK to return to the
Edit Address List window. The new device is listed within the group.
4-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 4-5 of 10
Network Links 4
Rename a Group
Right-click the device group, then click Edit Group Name.
Type a name into the space provided, then click OK to close the Change Group Name pop-up
window. The new group name is listed in the Edit Address List window.
Delete a Group
Right-click the device group, then click Delete Group.
Click Yes or No to confirm or cancel and return to the Edit Address List window.
4-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 4-6 of 10
Edit a Device
Right-click a network device, then click Edit Network Device.
Type the appropriate information into the spaces provided, then click OK to save changes and
return to the Edit Address List window.
Delete a Device
Right-click a network device, then click Delete Network Device.
Click Yes or No to confirm or cancel and return to the Edit Address List window.
4-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 4-7 of 10
Network Links 4
Send Address List to Controllers

Click IP Network --> Send Address List to Other Controllers to update and store IP address
information to the tool controllers.
After a few minutes the Copy Results confirmation window appears.
Click OK to close the window.
4-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 4-8 of 10
Show or Hide IP Addresses

Click IP Network --> Show IP Addresses or Hide IP Addresses toggle menu command to
display or hide the assigned network device IP addresses.
Click the toggle menu command again to show or hide the IP address information.
Investigate Address
Use the address investigator to evaluate the communication status of devices connected to the
network using the ping command, then (if successful) attempts to make an HTTP connection.
Click IP Network > Investigate Address, then type an IP address into the space provided.
Click OK to begin the investigation.
Not every device that is online and on the network will

respond to a ping.
If the device responds to the ping request, the system then attempts to make an HTTP connection.
If the device responds with its name (as shown below), the device is likely an NOV tool controller.
4-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 4-9 of 10
Network Links 4
If the HTTP request returns error code 404 (file not found), the system attempts to locate the
device’s default web page. I/O devices and network switches have their own Web servers,
whereas an HMI does not. If the remote device responds to the ping, but does not have a Web
server, the device is likely an HMI (operator workstation touchscreen), and displays the message:
“refused HTTP connection. Windows HMI?” (see below).
If the remote device responds to the ping, but the device is not a tool controller, and has a Web
server, the investigator will display that page’s title in most cases (see below), which helps the
operator to determine the device type.
4-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 4-10 of 10
Certain devices, such as network switches, require a user

name and password.
If the HTTP request returns error code 503, the address is probably assigned to V-DAQ™. The
system verifies this, then displays a message to that effect.
Click OK to close the window.
4-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-1 of 22
Software Management Links
Overview
The purpose of this module is to report software version information installed, and allow the
operator to back up, restore, or install software to the system.
!
Several functions within the Software Management
module require an administrator password. Only trained,
qualified personnel should install or update tool controller
software.
An administrative password is required the first time the user attempts to access a restricted
function. A password is not required again unless the browser is closed and restarted.
Type the password into the space provided, then click OK to continue.
Click the Contents link at any time to return to the main

service page.
5-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
5 Software Management Links Revision 02
Page 5-2 of 22
Software Versions
Click Software Versions to display an overview of the currently selected tool controller’s software
configuration.
Click Show Details to display additional information, such as software versions and error
messages (see below).
Click the Contents link to return to the main service page.
5-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-3 of 22
Software Management Links 5
Backup and Restore

Click Backup and Restore, then type the administrator password into the space provided if
necessary.
Click Login to continue and display the Tool Personality Manager page.
Varballs currently
stored on the
tool controller
Varball Overview
A varball is an archive of tool controller files that are not a generic flash image, but rather files that
make that tool’s flash card unique. The varball is essentially an archive of the tool’s “personality,”
and is commonly referred to as its “personality archive” file.
Upload a Varball
Click Browse to locate and select an existing varball file stored on your computer’s hard drive or
an accessible server.
Click Upload Varball to upload the selected file to the tool controller.
Uploading a varball simply stores the file to the tool

controller. See installation instructions in section titled
"Install, Download, or Delete a Varball" on page 5-4.
5-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-4 of 22
Install, Download, or Delete a Varball

All varballs currently stored on the tool controller’s flash card are listed beneath the Upload
Varball entry field. Each file lists the last modified date, which is normally the date that the archive
was created. However, if the file was downloaded, erased, then uploaded again, the date of the
last upload displays.
Each varball listed includes the option to install, download, or delete.
R Click the associated Install button to overwrite the existing varball with the selected
file. The tool controller restarts after a new varball is installed.
R Click the associated Download button to download and save the varball to your
computer’s hard drive or to an accessible server.
R Click the associated Delete file to delete the varball from the tool controller.
Back Up a Controller
Use Create New Personality Archive to create a backup of the controller’s tool- and rig-specific
files (its “personality”); this creates a new varball file and stores it on the tool controller. The file is a
snapshot of the controller’s current configuration. It can be stored on the controller and used at a
later time to restore the controller’s configuration, copied to your computer’s hard drive, or stored
on an off-site server for safe keeping. This file might also be useful to NOV support services to
help trouble shoot problems occurring on the rig.
1. Click Create New Personality Archive.
A new varball file displays at the bottom of the list, with today’s date and time stamp
associated with it.
2. Click that file’s Download button.
3. At the File Download confirmation pop-up window, click Save.
4. At the Save As pop-up window, define a destination for the file being downloaded.
5-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-5 of 22
Software Installer
This feature provides a way for the operator to install the software modules or files to one or all tool
controllers.
Click the Software Installer link, then type the administrator password into the space provided (if
necessary).
Click Login to continue and display the Software Installer page.
Click the arrow-down button to display the drop-down list of software module options, then click to
select a module. See general descriptions of each software module below.
5-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-6 of 22
Install WWW
The www version software contains the basic programming framework designed for the
operator’s tool control screens. It includes Web server extensions, HTML pages, common utilities,
diagnostics, and the navigation menu system. This software is constantly being improved, and is
therefore updated quite regularly.
Every tool controller on the rig should contain the same

www software version.
1. At the main Software Installer page, ensure that Install WWW is selected from the
drop-down list, then click Begin to display the first screen.
The current www version displays near the top of the screen.
2. Click Browse to locate and select a different www file located on your hard drive or
an accessible network server.
3. Once the www file is defined, click to select either This Controller Only or All
Controllers.
Selecting “This Controller Only” installs software only

to the currently-selected tool. Selecting “All
Controllers” installs software to all tool controllers
listed in the current ownership.xml file.
Use proper lock and “tag out” procedures before

implementing.
4. Click Next to continue.
5-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-7 of 22
After installation, each affected tool controller restarts. The new software becomes
active upon startup.
5. Restart all operator touchscreen computers to ensure that software changes are
recognized.
See the NOV document number D811000238-MAN-001, titled “Amphion Technical
Reference Manual” for detailed startup and shutdown procedures.
To uninstall a www update, install the previous version.
Ownership Configuration File

The ownership.xml file helps determine the tool’s IP address and specifies permissions for each
tool. It also provides structure for the operator’s screen navigation system, and assists in providing
a network map for tool controllers to communicate with one another.
Every tool controller on the rig should contain the same

ownership configuration file.
1. At the main Software Installer page, click the arrow down button to display the
software installation drop-down menu.
2. Click to select Install Ownership Configuration File, then click Begin to display
the first screen.
5-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-8 of 22
3. Click Browse to locate and select a file located on your hard drive or an accessible
network server.
4. Once the ownership configuration file is defined, click to select either This
Controller Only or All Controllers.
This file should be the same on every tool controller

connected to the rig network. The ownership.xml file
can be uploaded to a single tool controller, or to every
tool controller on the network.

listed in the current ownership.xml file. It will not
install software to tool controllers listed on the new
ownership.xml file.

implementing.

After installation, each affected tool controller restarts. The new software becomes
active upon startup.
6. Restart all operator touchscreen computers to ensure that the new software
changes are recognized.
See the NOV document number D811000238-MAN-001, titled “Amphion Technical
Reference Manual” for detailed startup and shutdown procedures.
5-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-9 of 22
Process Screen
The typical screen document communicates with only one tool, and the document is normally
located on that tool controller. A process screen is a screen document that communicates with
more than one tool at a time. Therefore, process screen documents are normally hosted on a
number of, if not all, tool controllers.
This file should be the same on every tool controller that

hosts a process screen file.
2. Click to select Install Process Screen, then click Begin to display the first screen.
3. Click Browse to locate and select a process screen file located on your hard drive or
an accessible network server.
5-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-10 of 22
4. Once the process file is defined, click to select either This Controller Only or All
Controllers.
Selecting This Controller Only installs software only to

the currently-selected tool. Selecting All Controllers
installs software to all tool controllers listed in the current
process screen file.
Tool controllers do not require a restart after installing new

process screen documents. The updated screen displays
when the operator reloads or navigates to the screen.
Tool Jar File

Tool-specific controller software is contained within tool jar files. Use this option to install an
upgrade to a specific tool controller.
!
Use this option only under the supervision of trained and
certified NOV software personnel.
2. Click to select Install Tool Jar File, then click Begin to display the first screen.
5-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-11 of 22
3. Click Browse to locate and select the tool jar file you wish to install from your
computer’s hard drive or an accessible network server.
4. Click Next to continue installation and restart the controller.
5-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-12 of 22
Install Controller Archive

2. Click to select Install Controller Archive, then click Begin to display the first
screen.
The current version of the controller archive displays near the top of the screen.
3. Click Browse to locate and select the controller archive file you wish to install from
your computer’s hard drive or an accessible network server.
4. Once the controller archive file is defined, click to select either This Controller Only
or All Controllers.


implementing.
5-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-13 of 22
Install .tgz or .tar.gz Archive

2. Click to select Install Any .tgz or tar.gz Archive, then click Begin to display the first
screen.
3. Click Browse to locate and select the archive file you wish to install.
4. Once the file is defined, click to select either This Controller Only or All
Controllers.

ownership.xml file.
5-13
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-14 of 22
Library Component
Library components are base controller software modules, upon which tool-specific software
modules are built.
Library component software updates can be installed on one or all controllers.
2. Click to select Install Library Component, then click Begin to display the first
screen.
3. Click Browse to locate and select the library component update file you wish to
install from your computer’s hard drive or an accessible network server.
4. Click to select either This Controller Only or All Controllers.


implementing.
5-14
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-15 of 22
Install Operating System Scripts

Operating scripts (sometimes referred to as the “base layout”) located on the tool controller run the
startup program and help with basic utilities (such as archiving tool personality files and restarting
the controller). The operating scripts occasionally require updates during other software updates.
Updates to all scripts are included in a single archive file.
2. Click to select Install Operating System Scripts, then click Begin to display the
first screen.
The current script file version displays near the top of the screen.
3. Click Browse to locate and select a different file located on your computer’s hard
drive or an accessible network server.


implementing.
5-15
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-16 of 22
Install Applicom® Configuration

The tool controller gathers data a number of ways, one of which is over a Profibus network
connection using the controller’s Applicom card. This card must be configured prior to use.
!
A trained NOV software specialist should conduct or
supervise any installation or update of the Applicom
configuration file.
2. Click to select Install Applicom Configuration, then click Begin to display the first
screen.
3. Click Browse to locate and select an Applicom configuration file from your
computer’s hard drive or an accessible network server.
5-16
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-17 of 22
Install Documentation Archive

Online manuals for tool controller are stored in their own archive, separate from the www installer
archive. Documentation archives should be the same on every controller.
2. Click to select Install Documentation Archive, then click Begin to display the first
screen.
3. Click Browse to locate and select a documentation archive file.


ownership.xml file.
5. Click Next to continue installation.
5-17
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-18 of 22
Transfer Files
Several functions within the Software Management

module require an administrator password. Only trained,
qualified personnel should install or update tool controller
software.
At the main service page, click the Transfer Files link to display the currently-selected controller’s
File Transfer page.
A modify file link displays to the right of all files that can be
modified. See section titled "Modifying a File" on page 5-
20.
5-18
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-19 of 22
Uploading Files to the Tool Controller

1. Click the Browse button to locate and select a file from your computer’s hard drive.
The file displays in the previously blank space to the right of the Upload File button.
2. Click Upload File to begin the process.
3. The uploaded filename displays at the bottom of the main File Transfer page’s file
list.
Tool Controller Files

Click the Show Parent Directory link to display the next-highest, or parent directory, of the
currently-selected directory.
Click the Show Parent Directory link again to expand the directory (partial screen shown below).
5-19
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-20 of 22
Modifying a File
1. If necessary, click to select a parent directory folder to display its file contents.
A modify file link displays to the right of all files that can be
modified.
2. Click Modify File. to display the File Transfer page.
3. Click to select either Delete, Rename, Make Backup, or Cancel Modifications:

Q Select Delete to delete the file.
Q Select Rename to rename the file, then type the new name into the space
provided.
Q Select Make Backup to create a backup copy of the file. The file displays
beneath the original, containing a bak extension as shown here.
Q Click Cancel Modifications to exit the screen without making any changes to
the file.
5-20
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 5-21 of 22
Downloading a File
Follow these procedures to copy files from the tool controller to your computer’s local hard drive.
1. If necessary, click to select a directory folder to display its file contents.
2. Click to select a file.

3. At the File Download pop-up window, click Save.
4. Follow screen prompts to complete the download process and save the file to your
computer’s hard drive.
5-21
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 5-22 of 22
Quick Links
A group of links to commonly-used files display near the bottom of the main File Transfer page.
See section titled "Downloading a File” above.
5-22
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-1 of 20
Debug Monitor
Overview
The Debug Monitor module is an advanced diagnostic and monitoring feature of the Amphion tool
controller interface. In addition to diagnosing problems and monitoring tool performance in real
time, you can change stored tool information, record, and graph tool performance data. It provides
a way to display every possible parameter stored on the controller.
Information in this section is intended for use by

trained, qualified personnel only. Debug Monitor
allows you to change values for items stored in the
controller. Use extreme caution when changing these
values. Although some protections are built in, some
changes may bypass safety interlocks, allowing free
movement of the tool, which can result in collisions,
serious damage to equipment, or serious or fatal
injury to personnel.
Click OK to continue.
6-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
6 Debug Monitor Revision 02
Page 6-2 of 20
Standard Debug Item Descriptions

In addition to tool-specific items, the following basic debug items appear in the Chooser screen for
most tool controllers:
R controller.name: Displays the assigned name of the controller, normally a rig-
specific controller and tool name.
R controller.recording: Displays a Boolean value, indicating whether the controller is
recording data. Twenty different parameters can be recorded at once, lasting
approximately 100 seconds each. Only one user can record data from the same
controller at any given time.
R c2cClients: Displays controller-to-controller status information for input devices.
R Profibus Card1, Profibus Card2: Displays status and information on the first and
second Profibus DP networks (where applicable).
R controller.lifeCounter: Displays controller activity by counting from zero to the
maximum 16-bit integer (65,535). If this counter does not change, the tool controller
program is not running.
R controller.savePermit: Displays whether the operator can save objects and arrays
(true or false).
R controller.stats.avgCycleTime: Displays the average cycle time based on the last
20 cycles.
A cycle includes calculation and sleep time. Calculation

time includes time used to read input, perform calculations,
and write output.
R controller.stats.CalcTime: Displays calculation time.

R controller.stats.lastCycleTime: Displays the last cycle time.
R controller.stats.maxCalcTime: Displays the longest amount of time taken to
perform a calculation since the program has been running.
The first calculation normally requires more time than

subsequent cycles.
R controller.stats.maxCycleTime: Displays the longest amount of time taken to

complete a cycle since the program has been running (see note above).
6-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-3 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
R controller.stats.minCycleTime: Displays the shortest amount of time taken to

complete a cycle since the program has been running.
controller.stats.maxCycleTime and .minCycleTime can

be set to zero to determine the maximum and minimum
calculation and cycle times for a given period of time.
R controller.stats.refreshInputTime: Displays the time taken to read input from all

devices on the tool.
R controller.stats.refreshOutputTime: Displays the time taken to write output to
devices on the tool.
6-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-4 of 20
Selecting Items to Monitor
See section titled "Standard Debug Item Descriptions”

above for general descriptions of common debug items.
1. Click the Debug Monitor link (located under Diagnostics) to display the top level
directory Chooser screen for the currently-selected tool controller.
2. Click the plus sign to expand a top level directory (see below).
6-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-5 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
Expanded top level

directory “controller”
3. Locate the items you wish to monitor, then click to select. Click again to deselect if
necessary.
4. Click OK to display the next Debug Monitor screen.
6-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-6 of 20
Q Click Select Monitors to display the Chooser screen again if you wish to add
items.
Q To remove items from the list, click to select, then click Remove.
Debug Monitor values are updated approximately 20

times per second.
6-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-7 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
Creating a Link to Monitored Items

A URL can be generated by WebObject name or WebObject index.
A WebObject index refers to the place in the tool controller where the object occurs. The indices of
WebObjects can change if the tool controller’s configuration changes. Therefore, a URL generated
by index may not display the same WebObjects on a similar, but differently-configured tool
controller.
A URL generated by WebObject name is more accurate, and is therefore recommended by NOV.
1. Select the items you wish to monitor, as described in section titled "Selecting Items
to Monitor" on page 6-4.
2. Click Generate URL (at the Debug Monitor screen shown on page 6-6) to create a
link to all items displayed.
3. Click Names, then click Favorites --> Add to Favorites. Assign a name and
location for the URL in your browser’s Favorites folder.
By default, the link appears in Microsoft® Internet Explorer’s browser’s Favorites
folder as Debug Monitor. NOV recommends that you assign a more specific name
to reflect this particular set of parameters. In general, browsers have a limit of 256
characters for the URL name. If you have numerous items to monitor, the browser
may truncate the URL string, making it impossible to locate the correct link. The
character limit depends on the names themselves and the number of items you
choose.
4. Click the appropriate URL (located in your Favorites folder) to launch the Debug
Monitor using the selected/linked items.
6-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-8 of 20
Graphing Data for Individual Items
Live graphing does not record every controller cycle; it only

updates the graph at the screen refresh rate. Recorded
data includes values for every controller cycle. See section
titled "Recording and Graphing Data" on page 6-9.
1. Select the items you wish to graph (as described in section titled "Selecting Items to
Monitor" on page 6-4), then click OK.
2. Click an individual item’s graph button to display a small graph pop-up window.
Graph button
The graph refreshes the data automatically.
6-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-9 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
Recording and Graphing Data

You can record data for up to 20 items, over a maximum time period of 100 seconds. This feature
is helpful in diagnosing intermittent problems.
Live graphing does not record every controller cycle; it only

updates the graph at the screen refresh rate. Recorded
data includes values for every controller cycle.
1. Click the Record toggle button for up to 20 items.

Click the Record toggle button again to deselect the item for recording.
Items highlighted in red will be recorded. Items highlighted

in black will not be recorded.
Record button
Start Recording button
2. Click Start Recording.
6-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-10 of 20
3. Allow recording to continue until it stops automatically, or click Stop Recording to

display a graph of the recorded data (see below).
Recording stops automatically after approximately 100

seconds, however you can stop recording at any time
(when the tool reaches a certain position, for example) by
pressing the Stop Recording button.
See section titled "The Graph Viewer” below.
!
Returning to the tool controller main Web page clears
unsaved recordings. See section titled "Saving Recorded
Data" on page 6-12.
6-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-11 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
The Graph Viewer
Display options discussed in this section apply to graphs

generated from recorded data. See section titled
"Recording and Graphing Data" on page 6-9 for
information about selecting and recording data.
See section titled "Recording and Graphing Data" on page 6-9.

The main graph window displays graph plots. Each plot floats independently on its own axis, and
each is drawn in a separate color.
The illustration shown above displays all graphs full height. See section titled "Graph Display
Options" on page 6-13 for more information.
6-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-12 of 20
Saving Recorded Data

You can save recorded data in CSV format (comma-separated value, also called comma-
delimited), which can be opened and manipulated by other software, such as Microsoft® Excel.
At the Graph Viewer window, click File --> Save CSV File.
Assign a name and location for the recorded data, then click Save to confirm.
Click File --> Open CSV File, then click to select the appropriate file to display saved data in the
Graph Viewer window.
Graph Labels
Press and hold down the <Ctrl> button on your keyboard, then click anywhere inside the graph to
display an Add Graph Label pop-up option.
Click Add Graph Label to display the Add Graph Label pop-up window.
R Use the space provided next to Graph Label to type custom text for the label.
R Click Insert Value to insert the parameter’s value at that particular point on the
graph.
R Click Insert Time to insert a time stamp at that particular point on the graph.
To edit, remove, or move a graph label, press and hold the <Ctrl> button on your keyboard, and
click the label to display the pop-up menu.
6-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-13 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
Graph Display Options

Click Graph located in the menu bar to display the drop-down menu items.
Show All Graphs on Same Scale

Click Show All Graphs on Same Scale to display all WebObjects on the same scale.
Show All Graphs Stacked

Click Show All Graphs Stacked to display each WebObject separately, but stacked (as shown
here).
6-13
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-14 of 20
Show All Graphs Full Height

Click Show All Graphs Full Height to display each WebObject at its maximum height, filling the
screen vertically (as shown here).
Show All Graphs

Click Show All Graphs to display the graphs for all WebObjects recorded. See section titled "Plot
Information Panel" on page 6-15.
Plot One Object Against Another

Click Plot One Graph Against Another to display the selection pop-up window. Click the down-
arrow buttons to display and select the horizontal and vertical axis objects.
Click Animate to animate the WebObjects’ recordings from the beginning to the end.
Click Close to close the pop-up window.
6-14
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-15 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
Object Grouping
Click Graph Grouping to display the Graph Grouping pop-up window.
Each WebObject displays on the top left side of the Graph Grouping pop-up window.
Click to assign a group to each object, then click to select (check) or deselect (uncheck) group
movement, resizing, and visibility options for each group.
Click OK to close the pop-up window.
Plot Information Panel

The left side of the window contains one plot information panel for each graph plot (shown here).
The panel is labeled with the name of the WebObject plotted and graphed, as well as other
controls that can be used to manipulate the graph’s appearance.
Thumbnail
WebObject
Move, Size, Display (On/Off), and Line Width

Click the on/off button to toggle the display on or off.
The other arrow-up and -down buttons move, size, or change the line width (as labeled) by one
pixel each time it is clicked.
Hold down one meta key <Shift>, <Alt>, or <Ctrl> to move, size, or change the line width by ten
pixels each time the arrow-up or -down key is clicked.
Hold down two meta keys while to move, size, or change the line width by 50 pixels each time the
arrow-up or -down key is clicked.
Hold down all three meta keys to move, size, or change the line width by 100 pixels each time the
arrow-up or -down key is clicked.
6-15
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-16 of 20
Individual Graph Display Options

Click the color “thumbnail” to display the Change Graph Options pop-up window.
R Click Set Color to display the color selection pop-up window and define the
WebObject’s graph color.
R Click Show Value Label to display each point’s actual value.
R Click Show Time Label to display each point’s time stamp.
R Click Isolate Graph to display only that WebObject on the graph (making all other
graphed objects invisible). See section titled "Show All Graphs" on page 6-14.
R Click Fill Screen to magnify that object’s graph to its maximum, filling the screen
vertically.
R Click any of the Point Decoration radio buttons to change the way each data point
is displayed; normal (none), vertical line, plus signs, or dots.
Click OK to close the Change Graph Options pop-up window.
6-16
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-17 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
Mousing Inside the Graph Area

When moving the mouse over the main graph area, a grey line appears, and moves along with the
tip of the mouse pointer. A digital time displays in the top left portion of the Graph Viewer window,
and changes accordingly with mouse movement. Each WebObject’s Plot Information Panel also
displays a value in its lower left corner, which represents its value where the grey line intersects
with the graph plot.

Graph time Mouse position
and grey line
Difference in value between the

top and the bottom of grey rectangle
Width of rectangle in terms of space for individual plot
Value of the in graph time
graph where grey
line intersects
the graph plot
Clicking and dragging inside the main graph area creates a grey rectangle. A second and third
reading displays inside each WebObject’s Plot Information Panel; the second represents the
width of the rectangle in graph time; the third represents the difference in value between the top
and the bottom of the rectangle in terms of space for individual plot.
Press <Ctrl> on your keyboard while clicking and dragging the mouse inside the graph area to
display the pop-up menu shown here.
Click Zoom Into Rectangle to magnify the area, or click Show Data Inside Rectangle to display
the Data Sheet View pop-up window (see below).
6-17
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-18 of 20
This table displays time, data points, and one or more plots in other columns.
Click OK to close the Data Sheet View pop-up window.
6-18
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 6-19 of 20
Debug Monitor 6
Changing and Saving Values

trained, qualified personnel only. Debug Monitor
allows the user to change values for items stored in
the controller. Although some protections are built in,
movement of the tool. This can result in collisions and
serious damage to equipment, or serious/fatal injury
to personnel. Use extreme caution.
1. Click the Edit button (items do not need to be highlighted).
Edit button
2. Type a new value into the space provided, then press <Enter> to save the value, or
press <Esc> to cancel changes.
3. If necessary, type the administrator’s password into the space provided, then click
OK to continue.
An alert message “Response is read only” displays if the user attempts to change
a restricted item.
6-19
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 6-20 of 20
A persistent value remains stored in the tool controller after power to the tool and the controller are
turned off. The tool controller program uses those stored values as the initial item value upon
startup.
4. Click Save Objects to save all persistent values to the CompactFlash.
5. Type the administrator’s password into the space provided, then click OK.
A confirmation message displays.
6. Click anywhere on the screen to close the confirmation message.
Persistent values cannot be saved to certain tools while

they are on.
6-20
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 7-1 of 10
I/O Diagnostics
Overview
The I/O Diagnostic module is intended to compliment the Debug Monitor, and separates I/O points
by type (see section titled "I/O Types" on page 7-3). While it provides similar functions, its
emphasis is directed more on providing a tool to manipulate I/O systems that reside within the tool
controller. It also attempts to present each I/O point as a single unit, whereas the Debug Monitor
presents individual WebObjects that are part of an I/O point.
For information about Profibus addressing, see the

appendix of this manual.
Type the password into the space provided, then Click OK to continue.
Main Page
Click the I/O Diagnostics link (located under Diagnostics) to display the current tool controller’s
default I/O Diagnostics page.
7-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
7 I/O Diagnostics Revision 02
Page 7-2 of 10
This page displays the top level directory of all I/O points on the current tool controller. Click the
markers located to the left of the directory to expand and display its contents.
Continue clicking the markers as necessary to expand each WebObject. Use the tabs located
along the top of the page to filter displayed I/O types (general descriptions below).
7-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 7-3 of 10
I/O Diagnostics 7
I/O Types
Tabs located across the top of the I/O Diagnostics page provide a way to display all I/O types at
once, or only those of a certain type. The tabs are created dynamically, so there may not be a tab
for every possible I/O type. In addition, different tabs may appear on different controllers. Within
each tab, I/O points are sorted alphabetically by WebObject name.
Click the All I/O Points tab to display all I/O types. For information about Profibus addressing, see
the appendix of this manual.
Profibus DP1 or DP2

Click the Profibus Card DP1 or Profibus Card DP2 tab to display Profibus DP1 or DP2
I/Os.
R Transmission: Profibus
R I/O Type: DP1 or DP2
R I/O Identifier: [Profibus node number][I/O type code][Byte number][.{Bit number}]/
{_String length]}
I/O Type DP1 refers to the first Applicom® card on the first Profibus DP network (typically used for
communication between the tool controller and hydraulic or pneumatic actuators that move
mechanical parts of the tool). DP2 refers to the optional second Applicom card on the second
Profibus DP network.
The I/O Identifier refers to a specific byte or bit at a given node. Only the digital inputs and outputs
need to specify the bit number. The range of byte numbers is 0 to 225; the range of bit numbers is
0 to 8.
I/O identifier examples (see section titled "I/O Identifiers" on page 7-7):
R 12DQ6.2: Refers to a digital output (DQ) point writing to bit 2 of byte 6 on Profibus
node 12.
R 8IR16: Refers to a (floating point) real input (IR) value that would be read from bytes
16 through 19 on Modbus node 8.
R 21SI4_30: Refers to a string input (SI) value that would be read from bytes 4
through 33 on Modbus node 21.
7-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 7-4 of 10
NET
Click the NET tab to display all Net I/O types.
R Transmission: Ethernet
R I/O Type: NET
R I/O Identifier: If the identifier begins with the letter N, it is non-streamed (normal); if
it begins with any other character, it is streamed, and will reset automatically to its
previous value.
Displays information regarding commands that originated from a touchscreen or workstation
control panel (console).
Controller-to-Controller (C2C)
Click the Controller-to-Controller tab to display all C2C I/Os.
R I/O Type: C2C
R I/O Identifier: [remote controller name]:[remote controller WebObject name]
The purpose of this type is to receive input from the other controllers, as opposed to sending
commands to them. Therefore, only input classes are assigned to this I/O type.
7-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 7-5 of 10
I/O Diagnostics 7
!
A C2C request contains the remote controller name. When
a remote controller receives a C2C data request, it
compares its own service name to the name contained in
the request. If the service name does not match the
controller named in the request, then the controller will not
respond. Therefore, It is critical that all C2C configurations
match one another.
Modbus
Click the Modbus tab to display all Modbus I/Os.
Modbus is a protocol suite designed for industrial automation. Like Profibus, Modbus has nodes,
however there are no cards. Profibus is byte-oriented, whereas Modbus is word-oriented.
R I/O Type: MOD
R I/O Identifier: [Modbus node string][I/O Type code][Word Number]{.[Bit
Number]}{_[String Length]}
Displays information regarding commands that originated from tools and other Ethernet devices
The I/O Identifier refers to a specific word or bit at a given node. Only the digital inputs and outputs
need to specify the bit number. The range of word numbers is 0 to 125; the range of bit numbers
(when given) is 0 to 15.
I/O identifier examples (see section titled "I/O Identifiers" on page 7-7):
R 12DQ6.2: Refers to a digital output (DQ) point writing to bit 2 of byte 6 on Profibus
node 12.
R 8IR16: Refers to a (floating point) real input (IR) value that would be read from bytes
16 through 19 on Profibus node 8.
R 21SI4_30: Refers to a string input (SI) value that would be read from bytes 4
through 33 on Profibus node 21.
7-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 7-6 of 10
No Type
Displays information regarding I/O points that have not been configured.
Step7
R I/O Type: S7
R I/O Identifier: [Step7 node string][I/O type code][Byte number].[Bit number]
Displays information from programmable logic controllers (PLCs). This Ethernet communication
protocol is used on older systems (tab not shown here).
Cyberbase
Click the Cyberbase tab to display all Cyberbase I/Os.
R I/O Type: CY
R I/O Identifier: [Cyberbase Node String][I/O Type Code][Byte Number]{.[Bit
Number]}{_[String Length]}
Displays communication information between various NOV® products; Ethernet communication

protocol (tab not shown here).
A Cyberbase node represents a specific device on the Ethernet network that has its own IP
address. Cyberbase node names can have alphabetic characters.
7-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 7-7 of 10
I/O Diagnostics 7
I/O Properties
Right-click the I/O, then click Properties to display the I/O properties window.
I/O Identifier
I/O Type
The properties pop-up window contains information about the selected I/O. Each I/O contains an I/
O type (see section titled "I/O Types" on page 7-3) and an I/O identifier. Once the tool controller
starts up, the I/O type and identifiers are fixed, and cannot be changed unless the controller is
reconfigured and restarted.
See section titled "I/O Types" on page 7-3.
I/O Identifiers
I/O Identifiers are unique names for the I/O item. The identifier may begin with a node name (or
number), followed by a two-character class abbreviation. There are 14 types of
I/O device classes (7 input, and 7 output):
R DI: Digital Input (1 bit) items return a true or false result based on a condition
(Boolean values). For example, a proximity sensor detects metal and the digital
input item displays a “True” value.
R DQ: Digital Output (1 bit) items display a zero or 1, off or on, false or true value
representing a command sent to the tool.
R AI: Analog Input (2 byte, integer) items convert word input data and display a more
meaningful unit. For example, a pressure sensor may report values from 455 to
15,000, however 455 represents zero pressure. This item would convert and report
“0” (instead of “455”).
R AQ: Analog Output (2 byte, integer) items convert word output data to display a
more meaningful unit. For example, when an operator sends a command using
inches through a touchscreen, the analog output device converts the inches to a
value that the tool recognizes.
7-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 7-8 of 10
R IR: Real Input items return a “real,” or “float” value (a 32-bit floating point number as
opposed to an integer).
R QR: Real Output items display a “real” value (a 32-bit floating point number), as
opposed to an integer representing a command sent to another device.
R IW: Analog Word Input (2 bytes, integer) items return an integer that may indicate
pressure or a tool position. This may be a 16- or 32-bit integer, depending on the
device or tool.
R QW: Analog Word Output (2 bytes, integer) items send commands to tools. This
may be a 16- or 32-bit integer, depending on the device or tool.
R ID: Analog Double Word Input (4 bytes, integer) items return an integer that may
indicate pressure or a tool position. This may be a 32-bit integer, depending on the
device or tool.
R QD: Analog Double Word Output (4 bytes, integer) items send commands to
tools. This may be a 32-bit integer, depending on the device or tool.
R SI: String Input items return text, such as status messages.
R SO: String Output items send text, such as status messages.
Setting or Forcing Values

Sometimes it’s possible to set the value directly (using the Set Value option described below). This
is often the case with inputs of type NET (see section titled "I/O Types" on page 7-3). Where this is
not possible, you can force the value for any I/O item stored by the tool controller. For example, if
the hydraulic sensor reports a “no power” status (indicating that a tool may have failed), you can
change the hydraulic pressure power’s on/off value to allow tool operation to continue.
Forcing an output value can also be used to identify whether the tool controller program interlock
or the hardware is causing a component failure. For example, if the jaws of the roughneck will not
close, and you are unable to force them to close using the Force Value option described below, a
wiring or hardware problem is likely.
Alternatively, if you suspect a faulty sensor, change the condition (such as tool pressure), then
verify that the value shown on the I/O Properties pop-up window reflects the change. If it displays
the correct value, the sensor is functioning properly.
Use extreme caution when forcing a value. Forcing a

value bypasses safety interlocks, allowing free
movement of the tool. This can result in collisions and
serious damage to equipment, or serious/fatal injury
to personnel. Obtain permission from the rig manager
before using this feature.
1. Locate and right-click an I/O, then click Properties (as described above) to display
the I/O Properties pop-up window (shown below).
7-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 7-9 of 10
I/O Diagnostics 7
Q Force Enabled displays “T” (True) if the current value was forced.
Q Forced Value: Displays the forced value.
Q Value: The current status or value as reported from the I/O device or tool.
2. Click Set Value or Force Value.
3. If necessary, type the administrator password into the space provided, then click OK
to display the Set Value or Force Value pop-up window.
4. Type the desired value into the space provided, then click OK.
5. Click OK again to return to the I/O Diagnostic page.
!
Click Un-Force Value to reset the device to its actual
value. Forced values remain forced until you unforce them
or restart the tool controller. Do not leave values in a forced
state.
7-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 7-10 of 10
Displaying Input/Output Detail

The Inputs & Outputs detail window lists all input and output points of that type (or all types, if the
All I/O Points tab is selected) used by the current controller, in alphabetical order. Electrical
drawings contain I/O identifiers, but normally do not provide the WebObject name that the
controller uses. This screen provides a way for a technician to locate a WebObject name by its I/O
identifier.
Right-click the I/O, then click Show Inputs & Outputs to display the Inputs & Outputs detail
window.
Click OK to return to the I/O Diagnostics page.
7-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 8-1 of 4
Scheduler Diagnostics
Overview
Controllers run through a cycle once every twenty milliseconds (or 50 times per second). A cycle
includes all calculations, communications, inputs and outputs. The controller keeps track of its
communication schedule by organizing its obligations in its communications calendar.
The purpose of the Scheduler Diagnostic module is to provide information about the controllers’
communications calendars. If, for example a device is requesting information from a controller, but
the controller does not appear to be processing the requests often enough, the Scheduler
Diagnostic module provides a way to view the controller’s communication calendar, and also
provides the option to modify requests.
Selecting Tool Controllers

Click the Scheduler Diagnostics link (located under Diagnostics) to display the Select
Controllers pop-up window.
By default, all tools are selected (checked) except V-DAQ.
Scheduler Diagnostic will attempt to contact all selected

controllers. Attempting to contact controllers that are offline
can take several minutes.
Click to select or deselect (uncheck) controllers, then click OK.

The Scheduler Diagnostic module first determines the controller name from the Controller-to-
Controller system (Chapter 9, titled "Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status”), then gathers
configuration data. After a few moments, the main Scheduler Diagnostics page (shown below)
appears.
8-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
8 Scheduler Diagnostics Revision 02
Page 8-2 of 4
Main Page
The main Scheduler Diagnostic page contains an information panel for each controller selected
(see section titled "Selecting Tool Controllers” above). Each panel contains a list of devices with
which the controller communicates.
Tool controller
name and
IP address
Device name
Expected
and actual
communication
frequency
Change
frequency
Scroll bar
The Expected and Actual communication frequency displays for each device. A pink background
appears in cases where the two frequencies differ by more than five percent.
Use the scroll bar to move up or down through the panels.
8-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 8-3 of 4
Scheduler Diagnostics 8
Changing Communication Frequency
Do not operate machinery when changing

communication frequency. Doing so causes the tool
controller to restart. Failure to observe and follow
proper procedures could result in serious or fatal
injury to personnel, significant property loss, or
significant equipment damage.
Click the appropriate controller’s Change button. If necessary, type the administrator’s password
into the space provided, then click OK to continue and display the Change pop-up window.
Type the desired change into the space provided, then click Make the Change.
Click Yes at the confirmation window to store the change and restart the tool controller.
8-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
8 Scheduler Diagnostics Revision 02
Page 8-4 of 4
Show Distribution Map

Click the appropriate controller’s Show Distribution Map to display its communications calendar
in table format.
Each cell contains a device name that the controller communicates with during each controller
cycle. Cells are color-coded by device (all instances of a specific Modbus device may be red, for
example). If no device is scheduled in a cell, it is labeled “available.”
The map can be saved in Microsoft® Excel-compatible .csv format. Click Save to File to assign a
name and location for the data.
Click OK to close the map.
Show C2C Inconsistencies

Click Show C2C Inconsistencies to display a text box with information about all instances of
inconsistent C2C communications.
If no inconsistencies exist, the button is disabled.
8-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 9-1 of 8
Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status
Overview
The C2C module provides information about the communication subsystems on the tool
controllers. It reports the status of each C2C node that the currently-selected tool controller is
communicating with, and displays the WebObjects that each C2C node is associated with.
The C2C system communicates over the Ethernet network.
Main Page
Click the Controller-to-Controller Status link (located under Diagnostics) to display the
currently-selected tool’s Controller-to-Controller Status page.
The controller graphic boxes display green to indicate normal communication, or red to indicate a
communication error. The controller name and status number display in the top left corner of the
controller graphic.
9-1
www.nov.com
D811001123-GEN-001/04
D811001117-MAN-001
9 Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status Revision 02
Page 9-2 of 8
Status Details
Right-click a controller box to display more details.
In addition to the name of the controller and a status message, the detail pop-up window also lists
all WebObjects on that controller whose values depend on input from those controllers. It also
displays the value of each WebObjects. The values are live, and change as the values from the
remote controller change.
The other controller is functioning

0 OK
normally.
Client could not connect to its

5648 The other controller may not be running.
server.
The other controller was connected and

Client believes that its server has
5664 running normally, but it has stopped
stopped working.
running.
9-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 9-3 of 8
Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status 9

technicians.
At the Controller-to-Controller Status page, press and hold <Shift+Ctrl+Alt>, then click a
controller box to display the Screen Communication Logs window.
Click the buttons along the top of the window to display different communication information (see
general descriptions in sections below).
Press Close to return to the previous page.
9-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 9-4 of 8
Tool Controllers
Click Tool Controllers to display the Tool Controllers screen.
Click anywhere inside the Controller box.
network. The Tool Controller screen displays basic information about each tool controller, such as
the method of communication being used between the controller and the software, and the amount
of time the software has been communicating with the tool.
Click any communication box to display message information.
9-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 9-5 of 8
Click any message to display more detail.
9-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 9-6 of 8
Ownership
Click Ownership to display tool Ownership screen.
This window contains information about the tool ownership system, such as a record of the
Tool ownership is a built-in safety feature, designed to prevent more than one operator from
simultaneously controlling a tool.
Click any of the Ownership States boxes to display more detail.
9-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 9-7 of 8
HTTP Requests
Click HTTP Requests to display the HTTP Request window.
This window contains the last several messages passed between the touchscreen software and
the tool controllers.
9-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 9-8 of 8
Write Monitor
Click Write Monitor to display the Write Monitor screen.
This window contains only requests that were used to write commands or data to the tool
controllers.
Exceptions
Click Exceptions to display the Exceptions screen.
This displays error messages, if any, between the applet and the controller.
9-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 10-1 of 10
Cyberbase Status
Overview
The Cyberbase Status module provides information about the communication subsystems on the
tool controllers. It reports the status of each cyberbase node that the currently-selected tool
controller is communicating with, and displays all WebObjects that each node is associated with.
Cyberbase node information is availabe only for rigs

equipped with a cyberbase control system.
Main Page
Click the Cyberbase Status link (located under Diagnostics) to display the current tool
controller’s default Cyberbase Status page.
The node graphics display green to indicate normal communication, or red to indicate a
communication error.
The node name and status displays in the top left corner of the node graphic.
10-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
10 Cyberbase Status Revision 02
Page 10-2 of 10
Status Details
Click any node to display its Node Status pop-up window.
The Node Status window lists all WebObjects on the controller that the communications node is
associated with. It also displays the value of each WebObject. The values are live, and change as
the values from the remote controller change.
Click Next to display a continuation of the list; click Previous to return to the first window.
Process Image
Click anywhere inside the Node Status window to display the Process Image pop-up window.
complete map of the current state of the inputs or outputs from a given communications node.
These are divided into smaller sections. A single WebObject might write to or read from only a
single bit in the image, or it may write to, or read, a long string of bits.
10-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 10-3 of 10
Cyberbase Status 10
The Process Image pop-up window displays either all of the output or all of the input process
image for that communications subsystem mode.
Click Switch to (Output/Input) Image to toggle between the output and input images.
Click anywhere outside of the Process Image window to close it and return to the main
Cyberbase Status page.
Use the blue left- or right-arrow buttons to scroll through the process images.
10-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 10-4 of 10

technicians.
At the Cyberbase Status page, press and hold <Shift +Ctrl+Alt>, then click a controller box to
display the Screen Communication Logs window.
10-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 10-5 of 10
Cyberbase Status 10
Tool Controllers
10-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 10-6 of 10
10-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 10-7 of 10
Cyberbase Status 10
Ownership
10-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 10-8 of 10
HTTP Requests
10-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 10-9 of 10
Cyberbase Status 10
Write Monitor
controllers.
Exceptions
10-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 10-10 of 10
10-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 11-1 of 10
Modbus Status
Overview
The Modbus Status module provides information about the communication subsystems on the
tool controllers. It reports the status of each modbus node that the currently-selected tool controller
is communicating with, and displays all WebObjects that each node is associated with.
Main Page
Press the Modbus Status link (located under Diagnostics) to display the Modbus Status page.
11-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
11 Modbus Status Revision 02
Page 11-2 of 10
Status Details
Process Image
11-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 11-3 of 10
Modbus Status 11
Click anywhere outside of the Process Image window to close it and return to the main Modbus
Status page.
11-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 11-4 of 10

technicians.
At the Modbus Status page, press and hold <Shift+Ctrl+Alt>, then click a controller box to
display the Screen Communication Logs window.
11-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 11-5 of 10
Modbus Status 11
Tool Controllers
11-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 11-6 of 10
11-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 11-7 of 10
Modbus Status 11
Ownership
11-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 11-8 of 10
HTTP Requests
11-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 11-9 of 10
Modbus Status 11
Write Monitor
controllers.
Exceptions
11-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 11-10 of 10
11-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 12-1 of 10
Profibus Network Status
Overview
The Profibus Network Status module provides status information about the nodes
communicating on the Profibus network. It reports the status of each Profibus node that the
currently-selected tool controller is communicating with, and displays all WebObjects that each
node is associated with.
For information about Profibus addressing, see the appendix of this manual.
Main Page
Click the Profibus Network Status link (located under Diagnostics) to display the Probifbus
Network Status page.
R Green indicates the node is communicating normally through the Profibus network.
R Red indicates the node is not communicating through the network.
R Yellow indicates the node is reporting diagnostic information; the controller has not
lost communication with the node, but the node may have a problem.
The absolute encoder buttons normally display yellow at

startup, then turn green after approximately one minute.
Yellow is normal for emergency-stop (e-stop) conditions.
12-1
www.nov.com
D811001123-GEN-001/04
D811001117-MAN-001
12 Profibus Network Status Revision 02
Page 12-2 of 10
Status Details
Node number
Status code
Profibus Status Codes
Code Message
0 Node is functioning normally
33 Node is not communicating with the network
36 Node is not configured
45 Dialog software is not memory-resident
47 Invalid board number
93 Driver is not accessible
255 IO_RefreshInput was not executed beforehand
12-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 12-3 of 10
Profibus Network Status 12
Process Image
Click anywhere outside of the Process Image window to close it and return to the main Profibus
Network Status page.
12-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 12-4 of 10

technicians.
At the Profibus Network Status page, press and hold <Shift+Ctrl+Alt>, then click a controller
box to display the Screen Communication Logs window.
12-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 12-5 of 10
Tool Controllers
12-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 12-6 of 10
12-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 12-7 of 10
Ownership
12-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 12-8 of 10
HTTP Requests
12-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 12-9 of 10
Write Monitor
controllers.
Exceptions
12-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 12-10 of 10
12-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 13-1 of 10
Step 7 Status
Overview
The Step 7 Status module provides information about the communication subsystems on the tool
controllers. It reports the status of each step 7 node that the currently-selected tool controller is
communicating with, and displays all WebObjects that each node is associated with.
This page displays information from programmable logic controllers (PLCs).
Step 7 node information is available only for rigs with PLCs

that are communication using Step 7 protocol as part of
the control system.
Main Page
Click the Step 7 Status link (located under Diagnostics) to display the Step 7 Status page.
13-1
www.nov.com
D811001123-GEN-001/04
D811001117-MAN-001
13 Step 7 Status Revision 02
Page 13-2 of 10
Status Details
Process Image
13-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 13-3 of 10
Step 7 Status 13
Click Switch to (Output or Input) Image to toggle between the output and input images.
Click anywhere outside of the Process Image window to close it and return to the main Step 7
Status page.
13-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 13-4 of 10

technicians.
At the Step 7 Status page, press and hold <Shift+Ctrl+Alt>, then click a controller box to display
the Screen Communication Logs window.
13-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 13-5 of 10
Step 7 Status 13
Tool Controllers
13-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 13-6 of 10
13-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 13-7 of 10
Step 7 Status 13
Ownership
13-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 13-8 of 10
HTTP Requests
13-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 13-9 of 10
Step 7 Status 13
Write Monitor
controllers.
Exceptions
13-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 13-10 of 10
13-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 14-1 of 6
State Diagrams
Overview
State diagrams document step-by-step programming logic behind tool functions, states, or
movements. The diagrams found here are the documents used to create the tool controller
program, and can be used to diagnose problems.
Not all tools have diagrams. If the link does not appear on
the service page, see Chapter 18, titled "Service Pages
Configuration,” section titled "Show or Hide the State
Diagram Viewer Link" on page 18-2.”
Main Page
Click the State Diagrams link (located under Diagnostics) to display the State Diagram Viewer
page.
The first screen displays the upper-left corner of the diagram (diagrams normally print on 11" x 17"
paper, and are too large to display on a standard computer screen).
1. Press and hold the left mouse button, then move to view other sections of the
diagram.
14-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
14 State Diagrams Revision 02
Page 14-2 of 6
2. Click Navigator to view a list of state diagrams available for the current tool.
3. Click to select a diagram.

State Diagram Language Protocol
State Diagram Viewer uses the Unified Modeling Language (UML) standard for documenting
program logic. Statements and various if, else if, and else commands are used to construct logical
algorithms required to control a specific tool. A standard statement interrogates the state of a
switch (a stated variable), then executes the appropriate command line (statement), depending on
the state of the switch.
See section titled "Unified Modeling Language Table” below.
14-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 14-3 of 6
State Diagrams 14
Unified Modeling Language Table
Symbol Name Description
Initial State The diagram starting point.
Represents completion of an activity. Most

Final State diagrams don’t have completions because they
are cyclic.
Represents the state of an object. A state is the

condition of an object, or an interaction, during
which it satisfies some condition, performs an
action, or waits for an event. The object is
named in the upper-eft corner of the diagram.
The top of the symbol displays the name of the

state. The actions performed during the state
State are listed inside the symbol. Three possible
actions for each state are:
entry/ performed when the object

enters the defined state
do/ continually performed while the
object is in the defined state
exit/ performed once when the
object leaves the defined state
Represents a substate (contained within a

Substate
state).
14-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 14-4 of 6
Symbol Name Description
Statements associated with transition paths

describe events and conditions required to
move from the current or previous state, and
include actions that may take place upon exit
from the state.
Events and conditions appear first, and are

separated by Boolean AND OR statements.
Events and conditions
/actions or events, Actions follow conditions, and are preceded by
State Transition
statement a forward slash (/). Actions are separated by
Path
commas.
Statement syntax:
someCondition = true AND
someOtherCondition = false
OR someDifferentCondition =
true
/someActionOrEvent =
TAKES_PLACE,
someOtherActionOrEvent = STOP
action a=true
This transition uses the same notation and
State 1 syntax as a regular transition path. The symbol
action c=true
Factored State shows two mutually exclusive paths, originating
State 3 Transition from different states (State 1 and State 2), then
State 2 merging through a common junction point to
reach “transition” (State 3).
action b=false
See http://www.omg.org/technology/documents/
formal/uml.htm for the complete UML specification. State
diagrams are in sections 2.12 and 3.74.
Diagnosing Problems Using State Diagrams

1. Establish communication with the tool operator via telephone or by using some
other means to step through the problem.
2. Select a tool, then click the State Diagrams link to display the State Diagram
Viewer page.
3. Click Navigator, then click to select a diagram for the component or process you
wish to monitor (see below).
14-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 14-5 of 6
State Diagrams 14
4. A green box identifies the current state of the tool.

As the operator controls the tool, follow the process on the State Diagram.
Green transition statements indicate that the device met condition requirements.
Red transition statements indicate that the device did not meet condition
requirements.
5. When the problem occurs, locate the red transition statement.
14-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 14-6 of 6
14-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 15-1 of 8
Axis Controller
Overview
Axis controller software is used to control a tool’s axis of motion (such as the upper arm of a pipe
racking system). It accepts and translates raw data into controlled motion of some part of the tool.
The Axis Controller module communicates the operation of the axis controller software using
standard UML (Unified Modeling Language) diagrams. UML can provide several different types of
diagrams to present the same software feature (for example, state diagrams, timing diagrams, and
flow charts).
The Axis Controller module is available only for tools that

use axis controller software.
Selecting an Axis Controller

Click the Axis Controller link (located under Diagnostics) to display the Axis Controller page.
If the link does not appear on the main service page, the
tool does not use axis controller software.
Click to select an axis controller link from the list and display the Axis Controller Overview screen
(shown below).
15-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
15 Axis Controller Revision 02
Page 15-2 of 8
Axis Controller Overview Screen

Field Descriptions
Using your mouse, hover over any field on the Axis Controller Overview screen to display a field
description to the right of the grey window.
Override Mode
The motion profiler and the PID (proportional, integral, derivative) are not used. A velocity
command is sent directly to the mover. Acceleration and deceleration limits are ignored.
Normal Mode
R Open Loop: The velocity output from the motion profiler is sent directly to the
mover. The PID is not used. The motion profiler is in Normal mode. Acceleration
and deceleration limits are observed.
R Closed Loop: This is the default mode. All components of the axis controller are
used for closed-loop position control. The motion profiler is in Normal mode. This
mode is changed by code that resides outside of the axis controller. A change in
mode only takes effect when the axis controller is on. This value cannot be changed
from the Web interface. Acceleration and deceleration limits are observed.
R Multi-Axis: A position stream is fed directly to the PID. The motion profiler is in Rig
mode. Acceleration and deceleration limits are observed.
State
The default value is Off. This controls the function of the axis controller. When the mode is set from
outside the axis controller, the axis controller does not operate differently until the state changes.
The state is changed from inside the axis controller itself. Its values normally follow the mode
values, except the state can also have the values Off, Quick Stop, or Override. This value cannot
be changed from the Web interface.
15-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 15-3 of 8
Axis Controller 15
On
The default value is F (false). The axis controller value is either on (T) or off (F). This value is set by
code that resides outside of the axis controller itself. The state does not typically change unless
the axis controller is on. This value cannot be changed from the Web interface.
Throttle
The throttle is a request to move the axis. The default value is 0.00. The value range is
+/-100.00. The axis controller provides limits to the throttle, but it is used more often by the motion
profiler. When the axis controller is turned off, the throttle value is limited to 0.00. This value cannot
be changed from the Web interface.
Position Input
The position input is used in multi-axis control mode by the motion profiler. Another motion profiler
can feed a position stream to position input. This value cannot be changed from the Web interface.
Feedback Position
The feedback position provides the current position of the axis to the motion identifier and the PID.
It is used in calculations that determine how to move the axis in order to match the requested
position. This value cannot be changed from the Web interface.
Maximum Negative Velocity

This number provides the PID with a maximum negative velocity limit for the axis. The axis
controller ensures that a negative number is provided. This value can be changed from the Web
interface. See section titled "Editing a Field Value” below.
Maximum Positive Velocity

This number provides the PID with a maximum positive velocity limit for the axis. The axis
controller ensures that a positive number is provided. This value can be changed from the Web
interface. See section titled "Editing a Field Value” below.
Quick Stop
This value is either T (true) or F (false). When the value is T (true), the axis controller stops the
axis immediately. This value cannot be changed from the Web interface.
15-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 15-4 of 8
Editing a Field Value

If a field background turns gold when you pass your mouse over it (as shown here), you can
change the value.
Click the field to display the Edit Value pop-up window,
Enter a new value into the space provided, then click Set Value to confirm and save the value to
the controller.
R Click Restore to restore the default value
R Click Cancel to abort changes
15-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 15-5 of 8
Axis Controller 15
Axis Controller Diagrams

At the Axis Controller Overview screen, click the button labeled Axis Controller execute ()
diagram to display a standard UML diagram.
This diagram mirrors the programming code exactly, without displaying actual code. It contains a
column for each of the different software modules that make up the axis controller (Axis
Controller, Motion Profiler, PID, and Mover), depicting the main execution loop of the axis
controller and the calls that it makes to its components during each control cycle*.
*one cycle occurs every 20 milliseconds

State Diagrams
If a box in the diagram turns gold when you pass your mouse over it (as shown below), more
information is available about that step. Click the Manage State box to display its State Diagram
(see below). Other boxes display execution diagrams (see section titled "Execution Diagrams" on
page 15-6).
Click the box to display another diagram that “drills down” into that step of the program.
15-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 15-6 of 8
The State Diagram is a standard UML state diagram, but presents live values. The current state is
represented by a green box. Arrows flowing in or out of the green state box represent state
transitions.
Text displayed along each arrow’s path is divided by a forward slash (/). The text that precedes the
slash mark is a Boolean statement which indicates the conditions under which the machine would
transition from one state to another. Individual parts of the Boolean statement are red (false),
green (true), or black (unknown).
The text that follows the slash mark is a list of consequences that result from making that
transition.
Execution Diagrams
If a box in the diagram turns gold when you pass your mouse over it (as shown below), more
information is available about that step.
Click the box to display another diagram that “drills down” into that step of the program (see
below).
15-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 15-7 of 8
Axis Controller 15
15-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 15-8 of 8
15-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 16-1 of 2
Download Alarms
The Download Alarms module provides a way for the operator to download a text file containing a
list of current system alarms.
Click the Download Alarms link (located under Diagnostics) to display the Windows® Explorer
File Download pop-up window.
Click Save, then define a name and destination for the file being downloaded.
The default text file name is AlarmEventServlet. NOV

recommends assigning a unique name to the file, with a
.csv (comma-separated value) extension. The file can then
be opened with Microsoft® Excel, or another spreadsheet
program (example .csv file shown here).
16-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
16 Download Alarms Revision 02
Page 16-2 of 2
16-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 17-1 of 6
Operator Screen Configuration
Overview
The Operator Screen Configuration module provides a way for the user to modify the currently-
selected tool’s menu that displays on the operator workstation touchscreen (HMI). An
administrative password is required the first time the user attempts to access a restricted function.
A password is not required again unless the browser is closed and restarted.
Main Page
The operator screens contain blue buttons used to navigate between tools and tool screens. Click
the Operator Screen Configuration link (located under Configuration) to display the
Administrative Controls login screen.
Type the administrative password into the space provided, then click Log In to display the
currently-selected tool controller’s Operator Navigation Configuration page.
Cathead
Tool Menu
Default
Screen
A green outline indicates the tool controller’s default screen button.
17-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
17 Operator Screen Configuration Revision 02
Page 17-2 of 6
Current Tool Menu

Menus for each tool differ, depending on the tool selected. However, every tool menu contains the
following three standard buttons:
R Utility: Displays the standard utility menu, such as Choose Units, Choose
Language, and Clean Screen buttons.
R Common Diagnostics: Displays the standard diagnostic menu.
R Alarms: Displays alarm information about tools connected to the control network...
The three standard buttons are functional from the

operator touchscreens and the MTC cabinet computers.
Other tool menu buttons are specified by the software programmer, depending on the tool.
My Tools Menu
One tool controller is capable of hosting more than one tool. For example, the auxiliary tool
controller (as shown here) may host the cathead, the HPU, the power slips, and the rotary table; a
top drive controller may host both the top drive and the casing running tool.
Click the My Tools button* to display all tools hosted on the currently-selected tool controller.
Click to select a tool and display its menu (see section titled "Current Tool Menu” above).
*The My Tools button may be labeled differently,

depending on your rig configuration.
17-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 17-3 of 6
Operator Screen Configuration 17
Main Navigation Bar

The main navigation menu displays along the bottom of most operator screens. It is defined by the
software programmer, and may vary from rig to rig. However, every operator menu bar contains
the following three buttons:
R Back: Displays the previous screen (functional from the touchscreens).
R <Currently-Selected Tool>: Displays the currently-selected tool’s menu (Driller
Chair is the currently-selected tool shown below).
R Alarms: Button displays blue under normal conditions; blinks red when there is at
least one active and unacknowledged alarm; solid red when there is at least one
active but already acknowledged alarm (functional from the touchscreens).
R My Tools: Displays a menu for all available tools. This button’s label may vary
depending on your rig configuration (Driller Tools, or AD Tools, for example).
Active tool display Standard navigation menu buttons
17-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 17-4 of 6
Changing the Current Tool Menu

At the main Operator Navigation Configuration screen (see illustration on page 17-1), click the
screen or a tool menu button to display one of the pop-up menus shown here.
Basic
Main (Vertical Buttons)
Submenu (Horizontal Buttons)
Tool button pop-up menus vary depending on configuration.
In general, you can add up to six vertical (main menu), and

five horizontal (submenu) buttons to the tool menu.
However, you cannot change (such as add submenu
buttons, edit labels, or delete) certain standard menu
items, or (such as Utilities, Common Diagnostics, and
Alarms).
17-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 17-5 of 6
Operator Screen Configuration 17
Adding a Button
Using one of the pop-up menus shown above:
R Click Add Button to add a new button to the main (vertical) tool menu
R Click Add Submenu to add a submenu (horizontal) button to one of the main
(vertical) buttons.
Adding a secondary button to one of the main vertical

buttons disables the main vertical button’s ability to direct
the user to a specific screen. The vertical button instead
becomes a mechanism for displaying the submenu
(secondary horizontal buttons).
New (vertical)
Main Menu Button
New (horizontal)
Submenu Button
The default name for new buttons added (both main and submenu) is “title.”
See section titled "Changing the Button Title and Link” below.
17-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 17-6 of 6
Changing the Button Title and Link

Click the button to display its pop-up menu.
Click to select Edit Button and display the Edit Button pop-up window.
R Type a button title into the space provided.

R Click the arrow-down button to display a drop-down list of screen description files.
Click to select a file to link it to the button.
Click OK to save changes and close the Edit Button pop-up window.
Deleting a Button
Click to select Delete Button.
Moving a Button
Click to select Move Up, Move Down, Move Left, or Move Right to change the button’s position in
the menu.
Setting the Default Tool Screen

Click to select Set As Default Tool Screen to make the selected button the default tool screen for
the operator. The default tool screen is the first screen displayed to the operator when the tool is
selected. A green outline indicates the tool controller’s default screen button.
See the illustration shown on page 17-1.
Restoring Original Configuration

Click to select Restore Original Configuration to revert to the original tool menu
Saving Configuration
Click to select Save Configuration to save changes to the tool controller.
17-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 18-1 of 4
Service Pages Configuration
Overview
The Service Pages Configuration module provides a way for the user to modify the following
options on the tool controller’s main service page:
R Show or hide the Path Editor link
R Show or hide the State Diagram viewer link
R Add or delete custom links
Main Page
Click the Service Pages Configuration link (located under Configuration) to display the
Administrative Controls login screen.
currently-selected tool controller’s Maintenance Configuration page.
18-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
18 Service Pages Configuration Revision 02
Page 18-2 of 4
The example screen shown above contains custom links

for Power Limit Commissioning and Power Limit. These
are not standard links. See section titled "Add or Delete
Custom Links" on page 18-3.
Show or Hide the Path Editor Link

The Path Editor module allows the operator to edit paths for path-based equipment, such as pipe
racking systems.
See Chapter 25, titled "Path Editor” for more information about this module.
Click to select (or deselect) the box beside Show Path Editor to show (or hide) the Path Editor
link (located under Configuration) on the tool controller’s main service page.
Show or Hide the State Diagram Viewer Link

State Diagrams provide a UML (Universal Modeling Language) state-logic view of the internal tool
code itself, and can be used to diagnose problems.
See Chapter 14, titled "State Diagrams” for more information about this module.
Click to select (or deselect) the box beside Show State Diagram Viewer to show (or hide) the
State Diagrams link (located under Diagnostics) on the tool controller’s main service page.
18-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 18-3 of 4
Service Pages Configuration 18
Add or Delete Custom Links

The Service Pages Configuration page provides a place for the operator or service personnel to
create or delete custom links on the main service page.
Add a Custom Link

1. Type a display name into the space provided in the Display Name column.
Type display name (step 1) Select HTML file (step 3) Add link (step 4)
2. Click the arrow-down button located beneath Link to File to display the drop-down
list of available HTML files on the currently-selected tool controller.
3. Click to select and link an HTML file.

4. Click to select Add This LInk (located in the Add/Delete column), then click Save
Changes.
The new link displays at the bottom of the Configuration column on the main
service page.
Delete a Custom Link
Click to select Delete This Link (located in the Add/Delete column), then click Save Changes.
The link no longer appears in the tool controller’s Configuration column on the main service page.
18-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
18 Service Pages Configuration Revision 02
Page 18-4 of 4
18-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-1 of 28
Ownership Configuration
This module is intended for use by NOV service

personnel only. Unauthorized use could result in
property loss, or significant equipment damage and
rig down time.
Overview
The Ownership Configuration module provides a way for the user to modify the ownership.xml
file.
The primary purpose of the ownership.xml file is to define ownership rules, such as which
operator screens control which tool controller. The ownership lock-out system runs on the operator
tool screens, rather than on the tool controller, so the controller itself doesn’t determine who can
write to it. In other words, the operator screens determine whether it is possible to write values to
one controller or another.
The ownership.xml file should contain the name (or ID) of each tool controller connected to the
network. This name does not appear in the operator screens, but it must match the assigned
screen tool name. The tool controller ID should be named logically, such as “Fore Racker” (spaces
are allowed), as opposed to abbreviations such as “PRS1.”
A script reads the tool controller name from the admin_config.xml file and compares it to the list
of tool controllers contained in the ownership.xml file. When a tool controller ID matches a screen
tool name, the corresponding IP address (from the ownership.xml file) is assigned to that tool
controller.
Main Page
Click the Ownership Configuration link (located under Configuration) to display the
Administrative Controls login page.
currently-selected tool controller’s Ownership Configuration page (shown below).
19-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
19 Ownership Configuration Revision 02
Page 19-2 of 28
The default Ownership Configuration page displays a skeleton ownership.xml file.

A Load Ownership File and Save Changes button are located at the bottom of the page.
Load Ownership File

1. At the main Ownership Configuration page, click Load Ownership File to display
the Load pop-up window.
2. Click the down-arrow button and click to select the location of the ownership.xml
file you wish to load.
3. Locate the file, then click to select.
4. Click OK to close the Load pop-up window.
19-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-3 of 28
Ownership Configuration 19
Save Changes
Save Changes allows the user to save an edited ownership.xml file to any of the following
locations:
R The currently-selected (host) tool controller
R All tool controllers
R A specific tool controller
R Local hard disk
At the main Ownership Configuration page, click Save Changes.
Select a location, then click OK.

Before saving, the system conducts a number of tests to verify the integrity of the ownership.xml
file. Possible issues, if detected, are displayed in a separate notification window, however they do
not prevent the user from saving the file.
Tool Controllers
The list of tool controllers corresponds with NOV tool controllers connected to the rig network.
Right-click tool controllers to display the pop-up menu shown here.
19-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-4 of 28
Add a Tool Controller

At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click SBCs, then click Add SBC to display the pop-
up window shown here.
You can either select a tool controller from the drop-down list of suggested controllers and
standard IP addresses (as shown here),
or you can type the name of the tool controller into the space provided, then select an IP address
from the IP Address drop-down menu.
Click OK to save changes and close the pop-up window.

The new tool controller appears below the SBCs on the main Ownership Configuration page.
19-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-5 of 28
Edit a Tool Controller

At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click the tool controller (located under SBCs), then
click Edit SBC to display the Edit SBC window.
Make the necessary changes, then click OK to close the window.
Remove a Tool Controller

At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click the tool controller (located under SBCs), then
click Remove SBC.
Click OK to remove the tool controller and close the confirmation window.
Set the Base IP Address

With few exceptions, the IP address of every device connected to the rig network should be on the
same IP subnet. Setting the base IP address changes the IP address of every tool controller
contained in the ownership.xml file, and also the Network element and HMIs (see sections titled
Networkand HMIs (Touchscreens) below).
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click SBCs, then click Set Base IP Address to
display the pop-up window shown here.
Click the down-arrow buttons, then click to select the base IP address numbers.
19-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-6 of 28
Change Item Display Order

At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click SBCs, then click Change Order to display the
pop-up window shown here.
The tool controllers are listed in alphabetical order by default.

R To Move: Click to select a tool controller, then click Move Up or Move Down to
change the display order.
R To Delete: Click to select a tool controller, then click Remove.
Network
The tool controller uses the Network element during startup to set up its IP address (see section
titled "Overview" on page 19-1).
In addition to setting up the IP address, it locates the netmask and gateway information from the
Network element in the ownership.xml file. The gateway is usually a routing device whose
address is normally the base IP subnet address with a “.1” added to the end (for example,
192.168.31.1). A standard net mask is “255.255.255.0.”
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Network to display the pop-up menu shown
here.
19-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-7 of 28
Edit Network Settings

At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Network, then click Edit Network Settings
Click the drop-down arrows and define the Netmask and Gateway numbers.
Click OK to save the addresses and close the pop-up window.

See section titled "Set the Base IP Address" on page 19-5.
HMIs (Touchscreens)
An entry located in the ownership.xml file lists all touchscreens or other screen devices, their IP
addresses, and their ownership group. Therefore, only devices that have a recognized IP address
can be part of the driller or assistant driller ownership group.
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click HMIs to display the pop-up menu shown here.
19-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-8 of 28
Add a Touchscreen
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click HMIs, then click Add HMI to display the pop-up
window shown here.
You can either select a touchscreen from the drop-down list of suggested HMIs and standard IP
addresses (as shown here),
or you can select a group and IP address from the Group and IP Address drop-down menus.
The new tool touchscreen appears below the HMIs on the main Ownership Configuration page.
19-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-9 of 28
Edit a Touchscreen
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click the HMI, then click Edit HMI to display the pop-
up window shown here.
Remove a Touchscreen
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click the HMI, then click Remove HMI.
Click OK to confirm and close the pop-up window.

See section titled "Set the Base IP Address" on page 19-5.

See section titled "Change Item Display Order" on page 19-6.
Tools
While a tool controller corresponds to a physical computer (that can control more than one tool), a
tool corresponds to a specific piece of equipment that is used during rig operations.
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Tools to display the pop-up menu shown here.
19-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-10 of 28
Add a Tool
1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Tools, then click Add Tool to
2. Type the name of the tool into the space provided. This name appears on the
operator tool screens.
3. Click the SBC Host down-arrow, then click to select a host.
The SBC Host is the specific tool controller that controls the tool being added. The
SBC Host drop-down menu is populated by the tool controllers lister under SBCs
on the main Ownership Configuration page.
See section titled "Add a Tool Controller" on page 19-4.
4. Click the Ownership Prefix down-arrow, then click to select a prefix.

NOV recommends that you select the /operator/ prefix.The Ownership Prefix must
match the tool controller’s WebObject names.
5. Type the remaining portion of the Ownership Prefix into the space provided (see
description below).
19-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-11 of 28
This space normally contains the tool name, however if the tool controller only
controls one tool, it can be left blank. Otherwise, type the same information as that
contained in the Name field, except remove all spaces. For example, if the name of
the tool is Rotary Table, then type RotaryTable (no spaces) into the Ownership
Prefix space provided.
6. Click the Ownership Type arrow-down button, then click to select either exclusive,
none, or any.
Q Exclusive: Select exclusive to allow only groups that include this tool to
assume ownership.
Q Any: Select any to allow any group to assume ownership and write to the tool
controller
Q None: Select none to allow anyone to assume ownership and write to the tool
controller.
7. Click OK to save changes and close the Add Tool pop-up window.
The new tool appears under Tools on the main Ownership Configuration page,
which can be edited or removed (see sections below).
Edit a Tool
Right-click the tool listed below Tools, then click Edit Tool to display the pop-up window shown
here.
Make changes as necessary, then click OK to close the pop-up window.
19-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-12 of 28
Remove a Tool
Right-click the tool listed below Tools, then click Remove Tool to display a confirmation pop-up
window.
Click OK to confirm and close the pop-up window.

Groups
Tool ownership system is built around relationships between a set of tools and a set of “ownership
groups,” as opposed to a single “owner.”
For example, the driller’s workstation may have three touchscreens used to assume ownership of
one or more tools, all belonging to the driller’s ownership group. Typically the driller, assistant
driller, and a remote workstation (such as one mounted on an MTC cabinet) have separate
ownership groups.
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Groups to display the pop-up menu shown
here.
19-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-13 of 28
Add a Group
1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Groups, then click to select Add
Group to display the pop-up window shown here.
2. Type the name of the ownership group into the space provided.
3. Click to select Group can view service screens to allow this group to exit the
operator screens and view the service pages described in this manual. If selected,
this option appears as a Utilities submenu item.
The service pages require a mouse and keyboard. The

operator workstations are not normally equipped with a
mouse and keyboard, however the multi-tool controller
(MTC) cabinets are. Typically the Remote group has the
ability to view service pages.
4. Click Add to display the Add Allowed Tool window.
19-13
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-14 of 28
5. Click the Allowed Tools down-arrow button to display a drop-down list of defined
tools.
This drop-down list also displays the tool controller name in the first bracket, and
whether it is defined as “exclusive” or not (“none”) in the second bracket.
Adding an allowed tool to a group is required only if the tool

is defined as “exclusive.” See step 6 in section titled Add a
Toolon page 19-11.
6. Click to select a tool from the list.

Your selection appears in the Allowed Tools list.
7. Select a WebObject from the Enabler Input field (optional).
The Enabler Input field specifies the name of a WebObject whose value must be T
(True) in order for this group to assume ownership of the tool. This allows hard-wired
lockout switches or emergency shut down switches to interlock the ability to assume
ownership, and also to cause the loss of ownership should the switch position
change.
8. Type a short message into the space provided next to Disabled Message
(optional).
This message displays on the operator screen when the Enabler Input is stopping
the operator from assuming ownership. This message should consist of one or two
words, as it may display on the tool ownership button, where space is limited.
9. Click OK to save changes and close the window.
19-14
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-15 of 28
Edit a Group
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click the group, then click Edit Group to display the
Edit Group window.
Edit the fields as necessary, then click OK to close the window.
Remove a Group
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click a group, then click Remove Group.
Click OK to close the confirmation window.
Edit a Group’s Tool

At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click a group tool, then click Edit Tool to display the
window shown here.
19-15
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-16 of 28
Remove a Tool from a Group

Right-click the group tool, then click Remove Tool.
Click OK to close the confirmation window

Exclusions
Exclusions are designed to prevent any one ownership group from owning two or more specific
tools at the same time. For example, the driller’s workstation typically has one joystick that is
capable of controlling both the pipe racking system and the drawworks. Conflicting signals from the
joystick would result in confusion should the driller assume ownership of both tools at the same
time. The Exclusions element allows the user to make ownership of certain tools mutually-
exclusion.
Add an Exclusion
1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Exclusions to display the pop-
up menu shown below.
2. Click Add Exclusion to display the Add Exclusion window.
3. Click Add, then select a tool.
4. Click Add again to select another tool.

The two selected tools cannot be owned by the same ownership group at the same
time (that is, they are mutually-exclusive).
5. Add any other tools as needed, then click OK to save changes and close the Add
Exclusions window.
6. Click Add again, then select another tool.
Added exclusions display beneath Exclusions on the Ownership Configuration
page.
19-16
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-17 of 28
Edit an Exclusion
At the Ownership Configuration page, expand the Exclusions element to display all existing
exclusions.
Right-click an exclusion, then click Edit Exclusion to display its pop-up window.
Click to select a tool from the list, then click Remove to remove the tool, or click Add to add a tool
to the exclusion.
Remove an Exclusion
At the Ownership Configuration page, expand the Exclusions element to display all existing
exclusions.
Right-click the exclusion, then click Remove Exclusion.
Click OK to close the confirmation window.
19-17
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-18 of 28
Navigation
The Navigation element allows the user to define how the operator’s tool navigation menus
function on the operator screens. Although the Operator Screen Configuration module provides
a way for the user to define individual tool menus (see Chapter 17), it does not allow the user to
change the overall operator menu (outside of individual tool menus). The Navigation element
provides a way to define how the tool menus are displayed, and allows the user to add multi-tool
process screens.
At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Navigation to display the pop-up menu shown
here.
Add Preconfigured Main Menu Buttons

This menu option provides a way for the user to add a sub-group of preconfigured tool buttons to
the Navigation element. The navigation menus on the operator screens generally contain two
buttons by default: My Tools, and Other Tools (depending on specific rig configurations). The My
Tools menu contains a list of tools available for ownership to that particular workstation. The Other
Tools menu contains a list of other tools on the rig. The user can change the name of these tool
menu buttons, and specify which tools appear in their menus.
1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Navigation, then click Add
Preconfigured Main Menu Buttons.
The new item, Preconfigured Main Menu Button, displays beneath Navigation on
the Ownership Configuration page.
2. Right-click Preconfigured Main Menu Button to display the pop-up menu shown
here.
19-18
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-19 of 28
3. Click Add Main Menu Button to display the Add Main Menu Button pop-up
window.
4. Type the button name (or label) into the space provided next to Menu Button Name.
Due to limited space on the operator’s main menu

navigation bar, a maximum of two additional buttons is
recommended.
5. Click Add, then select the tools you want displayed in the new button’s menu.
6. Click OK to close the window.
The new menu button displays beneath Preconfigured Main Menu Button on the
Ownership Configuration page.
19-19
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-20 of 28
Editing a Button’s Menu
See the procedure described in section titled "Add

Preconfigured Main Menu Buttons" on page 19-18.
1. Right-click the added main menu button (described in step 6 above) to display its
menu.
2. Click Edit Button display the window shown in step 3 on page 19-19 above.
Q To Change the Menu Button’s Name: Type a new name into the space
provided.
Q To Add a Tool to the Menu: Click Add, then select the tools you want displayed
in the new button’s menu.
Q To Delete a Tool from the Button’s Menu: Click to select a tool, then click
Remove.
Q Change
Q To Change Menu Display Order: Select tools, then click Move Up or Move
Down to change the display order of the tool in the button’s menu.
For consistency and ease-of-use, NOV strongly

recommends that the tool menu be arranged
alphabetically.

19-20
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-21 of 28
Remove All Preconfigured Main Menu Buttons

1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Preconfigured Main Menu
Button to display its menu.
2. Click Remove Preconfigured Main Menu Buttons, then click OK to confirm.
Add a Process Screen

A process screen is a screen that displays data from, or allows the operator to control or monitor,
more than one tool. A process screen can appear in a menu of tool choices.
This element allows the user to create and define process screens that need to be included in the
operators’ navigation menus.
1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Process Screens (located
beneath Navigation).
2. Click Add Process Screen.
3. Type a screen name into the space provided.

This name appears on the operator’s tool menu.
4. Type the full path to the process screen’s XML file located on the tool controller into
the space provided next to URL.
19-21
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-22 of 28
5. Click Scan for Screens to allow the system to search the XML file for tool names
found in that file (see below).
6. Click to select an XML file.

This populates the URL field located above it.
7. Click Scan for Tools to allow the system to search the tool controller’s
ownership.xml file and determine which tools are involved in the process screen.
This populates the drop-down list adjacent to it, and also dims/disables unavailable
tools.
8. Click the down-arrow to display the tool drop-down menu, then click to select a tool.
9. Click Add to include the tool in the process screen.
10. Click the down-arrow to display the tool drop-down menu again, then click to select
another tool.
11. After all tools are added, click to select any of the tools listed in the Tools Involved
in Process Screen, then click Remove, Move Up, and Move Down buttons to
remove tools or change the display order.
19-22
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-23 of 28
Select the Navigation Bar’s Home Screen

This element provides a way for the user to define which screen displays when the user pressed
the Home button on the operator workstation’s touchscreen. Only one process screen can be
defined as the Home screen.
1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Process Screens (located
beneath Navigation).
2. Click Select Home Screen.
3. Click to select a process screen.
See section titled "Add a Process Screen" on page 19-21.
4. Click OK to confirm and close the window.

19-23
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-24 of 28
Add a Tool Button

This element provides a way for the user to define menu specifications for a tool. This might be
used in the absence of a nav_config.xml file.
Alternatively, the Operator Screens Configuration module can derive the nav_config.xml file
from this specification. (See Chapter 17.) In the absence of preconfigured main menu buttons, the
system uses the tools defined here to populate the operator’s My Tools or Other Tools menu. If a
nav_config.xml file exists, however, the system uses the specifications in that file, and this
specification is ignored.
1. At the Ownership Configuration page, right-click Tool Buttons (located beneath
Navigation).
2. Click Add Tool Button to display the Add Tool window.
3. Click the down-arrow to display a list of available tools.
4. Click to select a tool.

5. Type the tool’s Default Page URL into the space provided.
This is the tool’s default screen XML file that displays on the operator’s screen.
6. Click a radio button to define whether the tool selected is A Varco Tool or V-DAQ.
7. Click OK to close the Add Tool window.
19-24
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-25 of 28
Edit a Tool Button

1. At the Ownership Configuration page, expand Tool Buttons (located beneath
Navigation).
2. Right-click one of the tools listed.
3. Click Edit <Tool Button Name> to display the Edit Tool window.
4. Click the down-arrow to display a list of available tools, then click to select a different
tool if necessary.
5. Type the tool’s Default Page URL into the space provided if necessary.
This is the tool’s default screen XML file that displays on the operator’s screen.
6. Click a radio button to define whether the tool selected is A Varco Tool or V-DAQ.
7. Click OK to close the Edit Tool window.
19-25
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-26 of 28
Add a Link to a Tool Button

This element allows the user to add a menu item to the tool menu on the operator workstation
screen. The link consists of a button name and the full path name of the XML file.
Navigation).
2. Right-click one of the tools listed, then click Add Link to display the Add Link
window.
3. Type the name of the tool menu button into the space provided next to Label.
4. Type the Document URL into the space provided, or click Scan for Screens to
generate a list of all XML files on the tool controller.
5. If you chose to scan for screens, click the down-arrow button, then click to select an
XML screen file.
The Document URL field populates automatically.
6. Click OK to save the link and close the Add Link window.
The new tool menu link displays beneath the tool on the Ownership Configuration
page.
You can add another link to this link by right-clicking the

parent link, then following the procedures in this section.
The parent link, however becomes a submenu item, and
the system ignores information contained within the parent
link.
19-26
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 19-27 of 28
Edit a Tool Button Link

Navigation), then expand the tool containing the link.
2. Right-click the link, then click Edit Link to display the Edit Link window.
3. Make changes to the link information as necessary.

4. Click OK to close the Edit Link window.
Remove a Link from a Tool Button
Navigation), then expand the tool containing the link.
2. Right-click the link, then click Remove <Link Name> to display the Remove <Link
Name> confirmation window.
3. Click OK to close the confirmation window.
19-27
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 19-28 of 28
Remove a Tool Button

Navigation).
2. Right-click one of the tools listed, then click Remove <Tool Name> to display the
Remove Tool confirmation window.
3. Click OK to close the confirmation window.

19-28
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 20-1 of 4
Simulation Control

trained, qualified personnel only. Simulation Control
allows you to change the way the tool controller
handles real world input and output. Use extreme
caution when changing the mode of operation.
Although some protections are built in, some changes
may bypass safety interlocks, allowing free movement
of the tool, which can result in collisions, serious
damage to equipment, or serious or fatal injury to
personnel.
Overview
When a tool controller is in simulation mode, it appears that it is operating with actual tools when it
is not.
The Simulation Control module provides a way for the user to control the built-in simulation system
by performing the following actions:
R Enable and disable simulation mode
R Specify whether the controller is a dedicated simulator
R Save simulation data to a file
R Load simulation data file onto a controller
R Specify whether to simulate WebObjects only
Main Page
Click the Simulation Control link (located under Configuration) to display the Password login
pop-up window.
Type the administrative password into the space provided, then click OK to display the currently-
selected tool controller’s Setup Simulation page (see below).
20-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
20 Simulation Control Revision 02
Page 20-2 of 4
Enable and Turn On Simulation Mode
Simulation mode must be enabled before it can be turned

on.
1. Click Set Enabled to restart the tool controller and enable simulation mode.
Allow one to two minutes for the tool controller to restart.

2. The current simulation data file displays beneath the On/Off buttons. To use a
different file, see section titled "Load an Existing a Simulation File" on page 20-3.
3. After the tool controller restarts, click Turn Simulation Mode - On to begin
simulation mode.
20-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 20-3 of 4
Simulation Control 20
Disable or Pause Simulation Mode

R Click Set Disabled to disable simulation mode. In order to return to simulation
mode, the tool controller must restart.
R Alternatively, click Turn Simulation - Off to pause simulation mode. This leaves
simulation mode enabled and available.
Define a Tool Controller as a Dedicated Simulator
Unless a tool controller is defined as a dedicated simulator, it remains in simulation mode only until
it restarts or simulation mode is shut off.
If a tool controller is defined as a dedicated simulator, it starts up in simulation mode.
To define a tool controller as a dedicated simulator:
R Enable and turn on simulation mode.
R Click Set Dedicated.
Set WebObjects Only
To control the feedback that a component (such as the Axis Controller) receives while in simulation
mode using the Amphion™ service pages interface (see Chapter 6, titled "Debug Monitor”), click
Set Web Objects Only - True.
Click Set Web Objects Only - False to allow the simulator to receive feedback from another
source.
Load an Existing a Simulation File

Simulation files are normally used by service personnel during a tool’s initial setup. Normally
current WebObject values are downloaded, then changed (disabling a limiter, for example). The
file is uploaded to the tool controller, which is then placed in simulation mode, providing a way to
set up conditions for testing.
Click to select a file from the Simulation Files area.
Click Load Simulation Data File. The tool controller uses this as the current data file, and its
values are used by the simulation engine. However, the tool controller uses the default simulation
file when it restarts.
20-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
20 Simulation Control Revision 02
Page 20-4 of 4
To define the default simulation file, click to select a file, then click Set as Default Simulation Data
File.
Create a Simulation File

Click Save Current Settings to New File to create a list of the tool controller’s simulation objects
and their current values. This is then saved to a *.csv file in the /varco/data/simulation directory.
This file becomes the Current Simulation Data File.
Download a Simulation File

Click to select a file from the Simulation Data Files area, then click Download to Local Machine.
Define the download location on your computer’s hard drive, then click OK.
Upload a Simulation File

Click Upload to Controller, then define the location of the file you wish to upload to the tool
controller.
Click OK.
20-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 21-1 of 4
Array Manipulator
Overview
This applet allows the operator to view and change the values in WebObject arrays stored in
memory on the controller. This module compliments the Debug Monitor, which only allows the
operator to view and edit values of single WebObjects. The Array Manipulator allows the operator
to view and edit values in whole arrays.

trained, qualified personnel only. Array Manipulator
allows you to change values for items stored in the
controller. Use extreme caution when changing these
values. Although some protections are built in, some
movement of the tool, which can result in collisions,
serious damage to equipment, or serious or fatal
injury to personnel.
Main Page
Click the Array Manipulator link (located under Configuration) to display the administration login
pop-up window.
Type the password into the space provided, then click OK to display the currently-selected tool
controller’s Array Manipulator page (see below).
21-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
21 Array Manipulator Revision 02
Page 21-2 of 4
Select an array
Select a layer
The array manipulator displays raw data in tabular (array) form.

Use the vertical and horizontal scroll buttons to scroll up and down, or left and right.
Click the Select an Array down-arrow button to display available arrays, then click to select an
array.
If an array has more than two dimensions, click the Layer arrow-down button, then click to select a
dimension from the drop-down menu.
To edit an array value:
1. Select an array and layer (where applicable).
2. Click to select an array value.
21-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 21-3 of 4
Array Manipulator 21
3. Type a new array value into the space provided, then press <Enter> to enable the
Save Array button and display the administrator login window.
4. Type the password into the space provided, then click OK.
5. Click Save Array.
21-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
21 Array Manipulator Revision 02
Page 21-4 of 4
21-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 22-1 of 6
Trigger Editor
Overview
Use Trigger Editor to create, edit, and delete alarm and event triggers.
The tool controller program monitors alarms and events

once per second.
Reference Checking
When the Trigger Editor starts up, the system reads the list of alarm and event triggers, and
compares them to the list of WebObject names to ensure that they are valid. If a trigger refers to a
WebObject that does not exist, a pop-up window displays, giving the operator the option of deleting
the trigger.
Alarm Priority
Define the Alarm Priority at the Edit Trigger window (shown later in this chapter).
A Critical Alarm triggers an audible horn. Acknowledging the alarm without correcting the
condition temporarily disables the horn. However, if the alarm condition is not corrected, it will
become unacknowledged again after a few minutes, sounding the horn again. The alarm condition
must be corrected in order to permanently silence the horn.
A Normal Alarm can be acknowledged, and remain acknowledged (and active) until the condition
is corrected.
22-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
22 Trigger Editor Revision 02
Page 22-2 of 6
Main Page
Click the Trigger Editor link (located under Configuration) to display the administration login pop-
up window.
Type the password into the space provided, then click OK to display the currently-selected tool
controller’s Trigger Editor page.
Click the Contents link to display the main service page.
22-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 22-3 of 6
Trigger Editor 22
Creating an Event Trigger

1. Right-click the Triggers root node to display the Add Trigger menu item.
2. Click Add Trigger to display the Edit Trigger window (shown below).
3. Click Change to display the Choose Web Object pop-up window.

Click the markers located to the left of the directory to expand and display the
contents.
22-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 22-4 of 6
4. Click to select a WebObject, then click OK to display the appropriate Edit Trigger
window (both are shown below).
The system determines whether the selected WebObject’s trigger is based on a
Boolean value (true or false), or a numerical value (greater than and/or less than).
Q True: Triggers an alarm or event when the condition exists.
Q False: Triggers an alarm or event when the condition does not exist.
Q Greater Than: Triggers an alarm or event when the item exceeds the value.
Q Less Than: Triggers an alarm or event when the item falls below the value.
Boolean Value Triggers
1. At the Edit Trigger window, click to select an alarm priority (see section titled "Alarm
Priority" on page 22-1).
2. Click the down-arrow and select a Boolean value (True or False) from the drop-
down menu.
3. Type an alarm message into the space provided.
Alarm descriptions are limited to 120 characters.
4. Click OK to close the Edit Trigger window.
22-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 22-5 of 6
Trigger Editor 22
Numeric Value Triggers

1. At the Edit Trigger window, click to select an alarm priority (see section titled "Alarm
Priority" on page 22-1).
2. Type a Greater Than and/or Less Than value into the space(s) provided.
Q Leave one field blank to deactivate that test.
Q Enter a value into both spaces to trigger the alarm if either value is true.
3. Type an alarm message into the space provided.
Alarm descriptions are limited to 120 characters.
4. Click OK to close the Edit Trigger window.
Editing a Trigger
1. Click the Trigger Editor link to display the Trigger Editor screen (see section titled
"Main Page" on page 22-2).
2. Click the markers located to the left of the directory to expand and display the
contents, then right-click an object to display the Edit or Delete Trigger menu.
3. Click Edit Trigger to display the appropriate Edit Trigger window.

4. Make desired changes to the trigger.
See sections titled "Boolean Value Triggers” and "Numeric Value Triggers” on page
22-4.
5. Click OK, then type the administrative password into the space provided.
6. Click OK again.
22-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 22-6 of 6
Deleting a Trigger
1. Click the Trigger Editor link to display the Trigger Editor screen (see section titled
"Main Page" on page 22-2).
2. Click the markers located to the left of the directory to expand and display the
contents, then right-click an object to display the Edit or Delete Trigger menu.
3. Click Delete Trigger to display a confirmation window.

4. Click Yes.
5. Click OK, then type the administrative password into the space provided.
6. Click OK again.
22-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 23-1 of 2
Consistency Checker
Overview
The Consistency Checker module provides a way for the user to determine the software versions
for each tool controller connected to the rig network. This is normally used by NOV personnel that
set up the tool controllers to ensure that the following are consistent:
R Base controller software
R Operating system scripts (“base layout”) version
R WWW version
R ownership.xml files
R ip_list.xml files
R Process screens
R Tool controller time settings
Main Page
Click the Consistency Checker link (located under Configuration) to display the current tool
controller’s Consistency Checker window.
The currently-selected tool’s controller is used as a reference and compared with other controllers.
The reference controller’s background displays green.
Items that contain the same information as the reference controller display with a white
background.
Items that cannot be found or contain different information display with a pink background.
Click any cell displaying the text “No Match” in the columns labeled Ownership or IP List inside
the table to display the ownership and IP list Differences table (shown below).
23-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
23 Consistency Checker Revision 02
Page 23-2 of 2
Files found on the reference tool controller display on the left side of the window, while files from
the other tool controller display on the right.
Lines that appear in the file on the reference tool controller, but not on the other controller display
with a blue highlight. Lines that appear in the files on the other tool controller, but not on the
reference tool controller display with a yellow highlight. Lines that match are not highlighted.
Click OK to close the Differences window and return to the main Consistency Checker window.
Click any cell displaying the text “No Match” in the column labeled Process Screens to display the
process screens Differences table.
This window displays a list of process screens found on both tool controllers, and those that are
found on one controller, but not the other.
Click OK to close the Differences window and return to the main Consistency Checker window.
Click Refresh to refresh the Consistency Checker window.
23-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 24-1 of 2
Set Date and Time
Overview
The Set Date and Time module provides a way for the user to set the date and time on the tool
controller.
Main Page
Click the Set Date and Time link (located under Configuration) to display the current tool
controller’s Set Date and Time window.
Click Copy Local Time to Controller.
Click Yes to confirm the synchronization of the tool controller’s date and time with the rig network’s
date and time.
Setting the date and time restarts the tool controller.

Definite risk of equipment damage or danger to
personnel exists. Failure to observe and follow proper
procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to
personnel, significant property loss, or significant
equipment damage and rig down-time.
24-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
24 Set Date and Time Revision 02
Page 24-2 of 2
24-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-1 of 18
Path Editor
This chapter provides information about the Path Editor

module of the Amphion™ service pages interface using
www version 1.6.3.
Overview
The Path Editor module allows the operator to edit paths for path-based tools. Pipe racking
systems are normally the only path-based tool.
The Path Editor is a simple, three-dimensional drawing program. The paths that it allows the user
to edit exist as arrays of numbers that are held in the tool controller’s memory, and as files on the
tool controller’s flash card. Each path is composed of a number of different arrays.
When Path Editor starts up, it reads the path information from the tool controller, and displays the
first path as an x-y plane. It cannot be used to create or delete paths; it can only be used to edit
existing paths stored on the selected tool controller.
A path is a collection of points and connection between points. It does not necessarily have to be a
single, continuous line from point to point. It can be several disconnected lines (paths) of motion
displayed on different parts of the screen.
25-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
25 Path Editor Revision 02
Page 25-2 of 18
Main Page

trained, qualified personnel only. Path Editor allows
you to change values for items stored in the controller.
Incorrect setup can result in loss of tool control that
can only be restored by a National Oilwell Varco
(NOV®) service engineer. Although some protections
are built in, some changes may bypass safety
interlocks, allowing free movement of the tool, which
can result in collisions, serious damage to equipment,
or serious or fatal injury to personnel.
Click the Path Editor link (located under Configuration) to display the current tool controller’s
default Path Editor page.
Current racker
jaw position
(“teach position”) x-y plane
View controls
Use your mouse to hover over the outline in the top left corner of the page to display the view
controls. Click the arrow up, down, left, or right, to rotate the display. Click the plus or minus
symbols to zoom in or out.
The orange circle in the main display area indicates the current racker jaw position (also used as
the “teach position”).
A light green axis indicator displays at the zero-zero point of the x-y plane.
25-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-3 of 18
Path Editor 25
Selecting Points
Dots represent each point on the path. Click any point to highlight the path and display a pop-up
window containing the selected point’s various values.
selected point
Each point has an x, y, and z coordinate, as well as a traverse, fillet, and an attribute value (see
general descriptions below). The selected point displays as a red dot.
You can also click and drag to select multiple points at one time. Right-click anywhere on the
screen, then click to select Change to Mouse Drag Moves.
Click and drag to select a group of points (see below).
25-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-4 of 18
The selected points display as red dots. When multiple points are selected, they can be
manipulated as a group. The range of the selected points’ values (minimum and maximum) display
in the pop-up window.
Traverse
The racker must be able to move to each point on the path without running into pipe or other
equipment. Each point on every path has a traverse value, which specifies the position of the
racker on its track when it approaches that point. The track that the racker runs on is assumed to
always be parallel to either the x- or y-axis (depending on the type of racker). For any given racker,
either the x-coordinate of the racker column or the y-coordinate is fixed. The traverse value for
each point specifies the other, non-fixed coordinate of the racker column for that point. The
traverse value for a point displays as an optional line that extends from the point toward the
racker’s position on the track (see section titled "Set Traverse Type" on page 25-12 below).
For most points, the traverse value is the same as either the x- or y-coordinate of the point,
because we expect that the racker will move its arm directly through the fingerboard slot, and will
not approach it from an angle. Where the traverse value is the same as the x- or y-coordinate of
the point, the traverse line on the screen is blue. Where this is not true, the traverse line on the
screen is red. This provides an indication to the tool programmer that there might be something
unusual about a specific point’s traverse value.”
Fillet
The fillet value represents a measure of the distance from the selected point that the racker may
“miss” that point. For example, if the point is at a corner, the racker will not go all the way to that
corner point, stop, change direction, then move to the next point on the path. Instead, it moves on
a smooth, curved path that grazes the point, missing it by the distance specified by the fillet. A light
blue circle displays around the point, representing the fillet. The fillet circles are translucent.
Multiple fillet circles (layered on top of one another) appear darker.
Attribute
The attribute value is not represented on the screen, and is related to coding within the motion
system. For example, it may indicate that a point is a pipe in the fingerboard, or that it is a foxhole
point. The code developer is responsible for determining the attribute’s meaning, which can
change from one application to another. Therefore, it cannot be conclusively defined in this
document.
25-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-5 of 18
Path Editor 25
Changing Point Values

Click the Change Values button to display the Manipulate Points pop-up window.
You can also right-click anywhere on the screen (after

selecting a point), then click to select Manipulate Points
from the pop-up menu (see illustration in section titled
"Setting Path Parameters" on page 25-6).
A graphical representation of the current point displays on the left side of the window.
Use the drop-down menu to click and select either Change By (number), or Change To (actual
value).
Enter new values into the appropriate fields, then click Preview. A graphical representation of the
proposed changes displays on the left side of the window. The original and proposed values
display on the right side of the window.
25-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-6 of 18
Setting Path Parameters

Right-click anywhere on the screen to display the pop-up menu. Click to select Set Path
Parameters to display the pop-up window shown here.
currently-
selected
path
This window contains a list of all available paths for the currently-selected tool.
Click the radio button to select any path. The currently-selected path’s selected radio button is
checked; the visible box is checked for all paths currently displayed on the screen.
Click to the visible box to show or hide a particular path. Click Show All or Hide All to show or
hide all paths. You can also click Hide Other Paths (see menu above) to display only the currently-
selected path.
The default color for each path is black. Click the color box to display the color selection pop-up
window (see below).
25-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-7 of 18
Path Editor 25
Click to select a color, then click OK to save. Alternatively, click Reset to assign the default color to
the path.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Set Path Parameters pop-up window.
Adding, Deleting, and Editing Points

After selecting a point, right-click anywhere on the screen to display the pop-up menu.
Adding Points
Click to select Add Points to display the pop-up window shown here.
Enter the number of points to add into the space provided.

Define the first point by entering the x, y, z, and traverse values into the spaces provided, then
define the offset values (if applicable).
To add a point at the tool’s current position, click Set from Teach Point.The current value of the
tool’s coordinates automatically populate the First Point fields.
Define the Fillet and Attribute values where applicable.
Click to deselect or select Link Points With Connection to link the new points to one another.
Define a value for the Path Attribute (where applicable).
25-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-8 of 18
You can also add a point using the Learn Point menu item.
See section titled "Learning a Point" on page 25-10.
Deleting Points
Select the point or points you wish to delete, then right-click anywhere on the screen to display the
pop-up menu.
Click to select Delete Point, then click Yes at the confirmation window.
This action deletes the selected point and all related connections.
Editing Points
After selecting a point, right-click anywhere on the screen to display the pop-up menu.
Click to select Edit Point to display the Edit Point pop-up window.
Enter the x, y, z, and traverse values into the spaces provided.

Define the Fillet and Attribute values where applicable.
25-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-9 of 18
Path Editor 25
Adding Connections
After selecting a point, right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Add Connection.
A line appears on the screen between the selected point an your mouse position. Position the
mouse over another point, then drag the line to another point to create a connection between the
two points.
Selecting a View
Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click View to display the sub-menu.
Click to select any of the view plane (X-Y, X-Z, or Y-Z), or click to select an image change (Flip
Left to Right, Flip Top to Bottom, or Center Image).
Flipping does not change the point coordinates; it only

changes the view.
25-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-10 of 18
Show or Hide Teach Point

If the teach point is not displayed on the main Path Editor page, right-click anywhere on the screen,
then select (Show or Hide) Teach Point.
Learning a Point
The Learn Point menu item uses the Teach Point to to add a point to the currently-selected path.
are directly related to the current teach position (or teach point).
The orange circle in the main display area indicates the current racker jaw position (also used as
the “teach position”).
Physically move the tool into the correct position.

Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Learn Point.
If this menu option is not displayed as a menu option, click

Show Teach Point first.
The new point is added to the current path of the teach point.
25-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-11 of 18
Path Editor 25
Traverse
Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Traverse to display the sub-menu.
Show Traverse Length

Click Show Traverse Length to display the Show Traverse Length pop-up window.
The racker must be able to move to each point on the path without running into pipe or other
equipment. Each point on every path has a traverse value that specifies the position of the racker
on its track when it reaches that point. Click Show Full Traverse to display full lines between the
path point and the position of the racker in its track for that point.
25-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-12 of 18
Click Show Traverse Tail to display an abbreviated version of the full traverse lines.
Set Traverse Type

Click Set Traverse Type to display the Set Traverse Type pop-up window.
The traverse value of each point is essentially the x- or y-coordinate of the racker in its track. This
marks the spot where the racker must be in its track in order to reach its arm out to grab the pipe at
the path point. For any given racker, either the x- or y-coordinate is fixed. That is, the racker will
always move (traverse) on a line that is either parallel to the x-axis or a line that is parallel to the y-
axis. If the racker is moving parallel to the x-axis, then the traverse value of the point is the y-
coordinate of the racker when it comes to that point. If the racker is moving parallel to the y-axis,
then the traverse value of the point is the x-coordinate of the racker. There are several different
kinds of rackers, and there is no way for the Path Editor to determine which type of racker is in use.
Set Traverse Type provides a way for the user to specify this.
Click to select the appropriate racker type (see below), then click OK.
R Racker Type 1: Use for PRS 3, 8, or Bridge Racker and Guide Arm. The traverse
value should match the point’s y-value. If it does not, the tail displays red (see
section titled "Show Traverse Length" on page 25-11).
25-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-13 of 18
Path Editor 25
R Racker Type 2: Use for PRS 4, 5, or 6. The traverse value should match the point’s
x-value. If it does not, the tail displays red (see section titled "Show Traverse Length"
on page 25-11).
See the description of traverse in section titled "Traverse"

on page 25-4.
Show or Hide Indices

Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Show Indices to display index information for
each point.
Click Hide Indices to hide index information.
25-13
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-14 of 18
Save
Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Save to display the pop-up menu.
Click to select a location to save the edited path file.
Saving to memory allows the user to test the path prior to making it a permanent change (by
saving it to persistent storage). This way, if the path is incorrect, the user can simply restart the tool
controller to restore its previous path.
Saving to persistent storage saves the current path information to the tool controller.
Saving fingerboard geometry saves only the fingerboard geometry to persistent storage. See
"Fingerboard Geometry” below.
25-14
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-15 of 18
Path Editor 25
Fingerboard Geometry
Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Fingerboard Geometry to display the sub-
menu.
Guess Fingerboard Geometry

The Path Editor can normally guess the fingerboard geometry from the path information. After it
makes a guess, the user should be able to manipulate the fingerboard geometry to ensure that it
accurately reflects the fingerboard arrangement on the rig.
The fingerboard geometry has one or more sections. Each section contains one or more slots (or
fingers). Each slot contains one or more pipes. All points containing pipe should be assigned an
attribute of 5.
Using the co-linearity of subsequent points, the Path Editor should be able to guess where the
slots are. Path names should give a clue as to where the sections are located. For example, there
should only be one path per section. However, since guessing is not an exact science, the Path
Editor’s fingerboard editor can make up for incorrect guesses.
Click Guess Fingerboard Geometry to display the Path Editor’s fingerboard geometry guess (see
below).
25-15
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-16 of 18
Edit Fingerboard Geometry

Right-click and select Edit Fingerboard Geometry to display the Edit Fingerboard Geometry
pop-up window.
Slot Numbering Pipe Numbering
R Reverse Slot Numbering: Click to reverse the slot numbering.

R Reverse Pipe Numbering: Click to reverse the pipe numbering.
R Flip Slot Rectangles: Click to flip the slot rectangles from top to bottom, or vice-
versa.
25-16
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 25-17 of 18
Path Editor 25
Click to select a pipe (represented by a circle) and edit its ID number, its x-y coordinates, or its
diameter.
Click a slot (represented by a rectangle) to select and edit its ID number, its x-y coordinates, or its
width and height.
25-17
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 25-18 of 18
Double-click a slot (represented by a rectangle) to select and an entire section’s ID number.
Click Apply, then click OK to close the Edit Fingerboard Geometry pop-up window.
Show or Hide Fingerboard Geometry

Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Fingerboard Geometry --> (Show or Hide)
Fingerboard Geometry to show or hide the fingerboard geometry.
Open Fingerboard Geometry

Right-click to display the pop-up menu, then click Fingerboard Geometry --> Open Fingerboard
Geometry to display the Question pop-up window.
Click Fingerboard to open the fingerboard geometry currently stored in persistent storage.
Click Local Hard Drive to display the location selection pop-up window. Locate the file on your
local hard drive, then click Open.
25-18
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 26-1 of 2
Set IP Address on Network Device
Overview
This module provides a way for service personnel to assign an IP address to a device connected
to the rig network. When a device is first installed, it may not be visible on the network because the
IP address is set to its factory default.
Main Page
1. Click the Set IP Address link (located under Configuration) to display the
Administrative Controls login pop-up window.
2. Type the administrative password into the space provided, then click Log In to
display the currently-selected tool controller’s Network Device Address
Configuration page.
3. If you already know the IP address you want to assign to the currently-selected tool,
type it into the space provided, then click Continue, and skip to step 6.
If the device is missing from the IP Network list (see section titled "IP Network
Menu" on page 4-1), click the Click Here link to display a list of devices currently
missing from the network.
26-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
26 Set IP Address on Network Device Revision 02
Page 26-2 of 2
4. Click to select a device.

5. Type the IP address into the space provided, then click Continue.
6. If desired, click the Click here to start again to assign IP addresses to other
invisible devices on the network.
!
To ensure correct IP address assignments, disconnect all
other unassigned devices on the network (leaving only the
intended device on the network).
26-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 27-1 of 12
Controller Links
Overview
The purpose of this module is to provide Java Virtual Machine (JVM) and controller information,
and allow the operator to view and manage related logs, restart the JVM or tool controller, halt the
tool controller, flash the Applicom card, display operator screens, or view online documentation.
!
Several functions within the Controller module require an
administrator password. Only trained, qualified personnel
should use those functions.
Type the administrative password, then click Login to continue.
27-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
27 Controller Links Revision 02
Page 27-2 of 12
Java® Virtual Manager (JVM) Status

This applet (also referred to as the “dashboard”) displays the current state of the JVM and the tool
controller. The JVM is a program that runs on the tool controller. Java software consists of code
that is designed to run in a “virtual” machine. The JVM on the tool controller actually runs two
separate Java programs simultaneously. One is a tool controller program, and the other is a Web
server. The controller program interfaces with equipment outside of the tool controller. The Web
server provides HTML Web pages and runs servlets. The Web server and the controller
communicate with one another, but they are essentially independent programs. It is possible for
one or both to operate without the other.
A green box indicates that the JVM is operating normally; red indicates a communication fault. The
status box also displays the currently-selected tool controller name and life counter.
It is possible for the JVM (top portion of the box) to display

green, while the controller (bottom portion of the box)
displays red. This indicates that the JVM is running
normally, while the tool controller is not.
The entire status box may also display red momentarily

during a restart.
27-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 27-3 of 12
Controller Links 27
Log Manager/Viewer
Various subsections of the controller generate log entries when significant events occur (such as
errors).
Click the Log Manager/Viewer link to display a list of log files stored on the current tool controller.
The main Log Manager/Viewer page displays the file size, date and time modified, and links to
either view or delete (reset) the log file.
Click the link located beneath View Log to display the log file.
Click the link located beneath Reset to delete the log file.
Most log files, with the exception of the j9.log file, have a fixed length (normally 100 KB). When the
log file exceeds this length, it is renamed (a “.1” is appended to the file name), and a new log file is
created. If the second log file exceeds the maximum size, it replaces the first log file, and another
is created.
Most log files (with the exception of the j9.log file), are maintained between controller restarts, and
continue accumulating messages while the controller is running.
Each entry in the log file follows a basic pattern. Entries begin with a keyword (debug, info, warn,
error, or fatal), followed by the date and time (hours:minutes:seconds, milliseconds), and the
name of the code entity that posted the entry (displayed in square brackets). This basic information
is followed by the message itself.
An example of an io.log file and a general description of other common types of log files is given
below.
27-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 27-4 of 12
R The j9.log and j9.previous.log files are different from the other log files. They
capture outputs from the JVM itself, and record error messages resulting from
serious controller program or Web server failures. A new file is created every time
the JVM starts up, and the previous j9.log file overwrites the file named
j9.previous.log. This file can be a useful troubleshooting tool when the tool
controller is not running.
R The io.log file contains messages from the subsystem that manages
communications between the tool controller and input/output devices. This file can
be a useful troubleshooting tool when an input or output point object could not be
created, or not reading or writing, since it captures messages that do not apply to
other I/O logs.
R The ora.log file contains messages from the tool controller program itself. This file
can also be a useful troubleshooting tool when the controller is not running.
R The c2c.log file contains information related to inputs and outputs between the
current tool controller and other tool controllers.
R The step7.log file contains information related to inputs and outputs that use the
Siemens® Step7 protocol.
R The alarm.log file contains errors messages from the alarm manager subsystem.
This file does not contain actual alarms.
R The varball.log file contains the name of the last varball installed, the controller
version, the www version, the base layout used to create the varball, and a list of
files installed.
R The version.log file contains the date and time of every www version installed, as
well as the name of the file that was decompressed. It also records the date and
time the varballs were created on the tool controller.
27-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 27-5 of 12
Controller Links 27
Restart the JVM

Use this link to restart the controller’s Java program running inside the virtual machine. When you
restart the JVM, it restarts the software, without restarting the tool controller itself. This is often
preferable, as it takes less time and is less disruptive to operations.
Click the Restart JVM link to begin this process.
A message displays, informing the user that the JVM is restarting. This takes several minutes.
During this time, you will be unable to access the controller using the browser.
Flashing the Applicom® Card

This procedure is intended for use on tool controllers that have an Applicom I/O card installed.
Only tool controllers that communicate using Profibus protocol with tool hardware have or need an
Applicom I/O board. The Applicom board provides an entry point for the tool controller to the
Profibus network. This network is separate from the Ethernet network used by other I/O protocols
(such as Modbus, C2C, and Cyberbase). Flashing the Applicom card loads the necessary network
information into the flash memory on the Applicom hardware.
!
If you’ve replaced the Profibus module, you must initialize,
then flash the CompactFlash card.This procedure should
only be performed by trained, qualified personnel. Potential
damage to equipment, rig down-time, or injury to
personnel exists.
1. Prepare the tool controller for communication with the Profibus network, if
applicable.
New Applicom cards for Beckhoff tool controllers do not

come from the factory already flashed. You must burn an
image to the card prior to installation. Contact an NOV
service representative for information regarding initializing
Beckhoff version Applicom cards.
2. Click the Flash Applicom Card link to display the Administrative Controls Login
screen.
3. Type the administrative password into the space provided, then click Log in to
display the current tool’s Flash Applicom Card page.
27-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 27-6 of 12
4. Click Proceed.
The tool controller program pauses. After approximately ten seconds, the flashing
process begins.
5. When flashing is complete, scroll to the bottom of the screen and ensure that the
message: “Initialization succeeded” displays, indicating a successful flash (see
below).
If an error message displays, see instructions that follow

this procedure.
27-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 27-7 of 12
Controller Links 27
6. Click the Back button to return to the Flash Applicom Card page, then click
Cancel.
The tool controller program and Profibus Applicom card automatically restart after
flashing is complete.
7. Click Contents to return to the main service page.
8. Verify that the Profibus Communication Status lights on the Profibus Applicom cards
are blinking green. For help locating this light, see Chapter 2, section titled "Profibus
(Process Field Bus)" on page 2-5.
An unsuccessful flash displays an error message (shown below).
27-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 27-8 of 12
Unsuccessful
flash
Troubleshooting
R If an error message displays, the number of Profibus Applicom cards in the unit may
differ from the number of cards in the unit it is replacing.
If the number of cards matches, cycle power (turn the tool controller off, wait five
seconds, then turn it on again), then attempt to flash the card again. If the problem
persists, replace the tool controller.
R If an error message displays, or the green light on the card does not flash, cycle
power to the tool controller (turn the unit off, wait five seconds, then turn it on again).
Then see section titled "Verifying that the Tool Controller is Working" on page 27-9.
27-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 27-9 of 12
Controller Links 27
Verifying that the Tool Controller is Working

1. Verify that the Profibus communication status light on each Profibus Applicom card
is blinking. For help locating this light, see illustrations in Chapter 2, section titled
"Tool Controller Hardware" on page 2-3.
2. Plug in the Profibus connectors.
3. Verify that there is still a green blinking light on each Applicom Card.
4. Click Profibus Network Status (located under Diagnostics) on the main service page
to view Profibus network status.
5. Verify that the node numbers shown match the tool network configuration, and that
all nodes are green. For more information, see Chapter 12, titled "Profibus Network
Status.
6. Notify the operator that the tool controller was replaced and is powered on.
27-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 27-10 of 12
Restarting the Tool Controller

This link provides a way for service personnel to restart the tool controller hardware.
!
This procedure should only be performed by trained,
qualified personnel. Potential damage to equipment, rig
down-time, or injury to personnel exists.
Click the Restart Controller Computer to restart the tool controller.

The message beginning with the text, “Reboot was successful” displays when the tool controller
hardware has successfully shut down. After a few minutes, the controller restarts and becomes
available online.
Halting the Tool Controller

This link provides a way for service personnel to shut down the tool controller hardware.
!
This procedure should only be performed by trained,
qualified personnel. Potential damage to equipment, rig
down-time, or injury to personnel exists.
Click the Halt Controller Computer to restart the tool controller.

The message “System halt was successful” displays when the tool controller hardware has
successfully shut down.
27-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 27-11 of 12
Controller Links 27
Operator Screens
Click Operator Screens to display the standard HTML operator tool screens.
A typical top drive screen is shown here.
See your Amphion operator’s guide for rig-specific tool

screens.
Documentation
Click Documentation to display available online documentation (if available). To view online
documentation, the manuals package must be installed.
27-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 27-12 of 12
27-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-1 of 24
Advanced Operations

trained, qualified personnel only. Use extreme caution
when changing too configuration settings. Incorrect
setup can result in loss of tool control that can only be
restored by a National Oilwell Varco (NOV®) service
engineer.
Replacing a Tool Controller

1. Turn the tool controller off at the power switch inside the MTC cabinet.
switch.
2. Beckhoff: Disconnect the power plug from the tool controller.
Advantech: Turn off power switch, then disconnect the power plug from the tool
controller.
3. Disconnect the ground wire.
4. Remove the Ethernet and Profibus connectors (where applicable).
5. Remove the tool controller from the DIN rail or rack.
6. Remove the tool controller from the cabinet.
7. Remove the CompactFlash™ card from the old tool controller.
8. Insert the card into the new tool controller.
See section titled "Removing and Installing a CompactFlash™" on page 28-3 for
more information.
9. Mount the new tool controller on the DIN rail or rack.
10. Plug in the Ethernet cable(s).
Do not attach Profibus connectors yet.
28-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
28 Advanced Operations Revision 02
Page 28-2 of 24
11. Prepare the tool controller for communication with the Profibus network (if
applicable).

12. Attach the ground wire and power leads.

13. Turn the tool controller on, then wait approximately one minute for it to start up.
14. Using the MTC cabinet’s keyboard, or a laptop computer, connect to the tool
controller through a Web browser.
For more information about connecting to the network using a browser, see Chapter
3, section titled "Connecting to the Tool Controller" on page 3-1.
The IP address has not changed; the CompactFlash Card

is the same.
15. If there is not a Profibus connection, skip to step 21. If there is a Profibus
connection, follow the remaining steps of this procedure.
16. Verify that the Profibus communication status light is blinking. For help locating this
light, see Chapter 2, section titled "Tool Controller Hardware" on page 2-3.
17. Plug in the Profibus connectors.
18. Verify that the Profibus status indicator is blinking green.
19. Click the Profibus Network Status link (located under Diagnostics) on the main
service page to view Profibus network status.
20. Verify that the node numbers shown match the tool network configuration, and that
all nodes are green. For more information, see Chapter 12, titled "Profibus Network
Status.”
21. Notify the operator that the tool controller has been replaced and turned on.
28-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-3 of 24
Advanced Operations 28
Removing and Installing a CompactFlash™

The CompactFlash stores tool controller information. You may need to replace this card if:
R You receive a new tool controller to replace an existing unit, and the new unit was
shipped without a CompactFlash card. You must remove the card from the old tool
controller and install it on the new one.
R The tool controller shipped without a CompactFlash card.
R The card itself has failed. If the tool controller was working, then stops working,
replace the tool controller. If the new tool controller still does not work, the
CompactFlash card may need to be replaced.
!
Replacing an existing CompactFlash card removes all
persistent (permanent) values stored in the tool controller.
Use only cards supplied by NOV.
1. Park all tools in a safe position and turn them off.

2. Turn the tool controller power off.
3. Locate the CompactFlash slot and gently remove the card.
Take note of its orientation; you must reinsert the card the
same way.
4. Prepare the tool controller for communication with the Profibus network (if
applicable).

5. Insert the replacement card into the slot until it snaps into place.
6. If applicable, replace the CompactFlash cover, then tighten the screws.
7. Turn the tool controller power on.
8. Verify that the green power indicator light located on the front of the tool controller is
illuminated.
28-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-4 of 24
9. Connect to the tool controller from a Web browser.

For more information about connecting to the network using a browser, see Chapter
3, section titled "Connecting to the Tool Controller" on page 3-1.
28-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-5 of 24
Tool Controller IP Addresses
See NOV document number D801000721-GEN-001, titled

“Amphion Standard DCDA Network IP Addresses.”
The IP addresses for every tool controller are stored in the ownership.xml file. Each IP address is
associated with a controller name. The controller name for a particular tool controller is stored in
the admin_config.xml file as the screen_tool_name element.
When the tool controller starts up, a script reads the screen_tool_name element in the
admin_config.xml file, then compares it with the list of SBC elements in the ownership.xml file.
If the script finds a match between the screen_tool_name and the id attribute of an SBC element,
then the corresponding ip attribute of that element is assigned to be the IP address of the tool
controller.
Examples of the admin_config.xml and the ownership.xml files are shown below.
admin_config.xml:
<admin_config>
<controller>
<class_name>com.nov….
<screen_tool_name>Racker</screen_tool_name>
…
</controller>
</admin_config>
ownership.xml:
<config>
<sbc id=’Assistant Chair’ ip=’192.168.31.41’/>
<sbc id=’Auxiliary’ ip=’192.168.31.27’/>
<sbc id=’Drawworks’ ip=’192.168.31.34’/>
<sbc id=’Racker’ ip=’192.168.31.20’/>
…
</config>
In the example above, the racker’s IP address is 192.168.31.20.

Every tool controller has a standard IP address of 192.168.0.3, so that if it is isolated on an
Ethernet network, this address can be used to make a connection, regardless of another assigned
IP address.
It is possible to change the IP address of a tool controller by editing the ownership.xml file and
restarting the tool controller, but this is not recommended. One way to do this is to use a software
tool specially designed to edit the ownership.xml file. See Chapter 19, titled "Ownership
Configuration.
28-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-6 of 24
An IP address change does not take effect until after the tool controller is restarted. After restart
the tool controller cannot be accessed using the old IP address.
Improper setup may cause the following problems:
R Tool controller program disabled, tool inoperable
R Controller-to-controller communications become disabled
R Tool controller to Web browser connection disabled
R Tool controller to touchscreen (HMI) connection disabled
28-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-7 of 24
About the admin_config.xml File

The admin_config.xml file (located in the /varco directory on the tool controller) contains
configuration settings.
Almost all configurable tool controller properties are stored as default values in the controller itself,
and these properties rarely need to be changed.
To change the admin_config.xml file, either use a text editor specifically designed to edit XML
files, or use a plain text editor (such as the Linux® Vi Editor, or the Windows® Notepad
accessory). See section titled "Vi Editor" on page 28-23.
!
NOV recommends that you do not use Microsoft Word, as
it adds large numbers of unnecessary elements to the file.
A basic example of an admin_config.xml file is shown below, depicting three principle elements
that are most commonly found in the file. Of these, the class_name and the screen_tool_name,
are required to make a tool controller behave properly.
<admin_config>
<controller>
<class_name>com.nov.bridgeRacker.module.BridgeRacker</class_name>
<admin_password>admin</admin_password>
</controller>
</admin_config>
There are also a number of optional elements (that usually do not appear in the
admin_config.xml file that can affect a number of properties on the tool controller (described
below).
28-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-8 of 24
The Controller Element

The properties shown here appear inside the controller XML element, which is contained within
the admin_config.xml file.
Element Data Type Description
Identifies the Java class name of the tool

controller module to run as the controller
program. The default value is
Java Class
class_name com.varco.ora.ToolController, which
Name
specifies a controller that does essentially
nothing. A tool programmer must define the
name of the controller class to run the tool.
Specifies the administrative password which

admin_password Text String must be used for most operations on the main
service page. The default value is admin.
Specifies the screen name of this tool

controller. The default value is Golden Image.
This name will be used as the name of the tool
controller that appears on the main service
page. Also, the name is checked against a list
screen_tool_name Text String of names and IP addresses located in the
ownership.xml file. The name that matches
the screen_tool_name is used to look up and
assign the IP address of the tool controller. See
Chapter 26, titled "Set IP Address on Network
Device.”
Specifies the storage path for persistent data

ctrl_storage_path Linux Path on the controller. The default value is ./data/
persistent/.
Specifies the tool controller’s cycle time in

milliseconds. This is how long it takes the
controller to make one complete update of all
cycle_time_ms Integer WebObject values, I/O reads and writes, and
internal variable updates. The default value is
20. Setting this value to less than 1 will result in
a value of 20.
If the cycle_time_ms element is not specified,

then the controller searches for the
sleep_time_ms element. If cycle_time_ms is
specified, then sleep_time_ms is ignored. The
sleep_time_ms element defines the amount of
sleep_time_ms Integer time the controller will sleep after finishing each
cycle. The default value is 10. The controller
ensures that the cycle time is always 10 more
than the sleep time (if the sleep time is
specified), and the sleep time is 10 less than
the cycle time (if the cycle time is specified).
28-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-9 of 24
Specifies the network I/O reset time (defined in

seconds). The default value is 1. This is the
amount of time the controller waits before it
determines that digital, real, and word inputs of
net_io_reset_time Integer
type NET (which reset themselves) are no
longer receiving input, and should be reset to
their default values. The reset time of any I/O
point will not be greater than this value.
Specifies the “width” of the communications

calendar. This is how many clients can be sent
comms_per_cycle Integer
updates each controller cycle. The default
value is 4.
True Or Enables (true) or disables (false) alarms and

ae_enabled
False events. The default value is true.
Holds the path and name of the alarm and

events log file. The default is ./data/alarm-
ae_log_name Linux Path
event/alarm-event.xml. This feature is
currently disabled.
Specifies the maximum number of alarm and

event records that will be kept in memory at
ae_max_records Integer
any given time. Older alarm and event records
will be discarded. The default value is 200.
Specifies the name of the configuration file that

will be used by the alarm and events engine to
ae_monitor_conf Linux Path specify alarm and event triggers. The default
value is ./data/alarm-event/
monitor.properties.
The “canary” is a software subroutine that

monitors the controller’s life counter to look for
long controller cycle times. This specifies the
internal_canary_sleep_ms Integer
amount of time that the canary will sleep
between checks. The default value is zero,
which disables the canary.
The presence of this element in the

admin_config.xml file is interpreted as “true,”
rev_B_compatibility Any meaning that this controller is compatible with
earlier generation (Rev B) controllers. The
default value is false.
28-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-10 of 24
The presence of this element in the

admin_config.xml file is interpreted as “true,”
meaning that all inputs of type NET are
prevented from using streaming
communications. The default value is false,
which means that inputs of type NET are
interpreted as streaming, and reset themselves
disableStreamedIO Any
if they have not received data for a certain time-
out period (see net_io_reset_time above).
Individual NET I/O points do not reset
themselves if their .ioIdentifier WebObject is a
value that starts with “n.” No NET I/O points
reset themselves if the disableStreamedIO
element appears in the admin_config.xml file.
Specifies the configuration for data logging on

Xml
datalog the controller. A description of this element is
Element
outside the scope of this chapter.
The Webserver Element

The properties shown here may appear inside the webserver XML element, which is contained
within the admin_config.xml file. This element is on the same level as the controller element
(described above).
For example:
<admin_config>
<controller>
</controller>
<webserver>
<http_context>//*</http_context>
<static_content_base_dir>file:/varco/www</static_content_base_dir>
</webserver>
</admin_config>
These elements are rarely used.
This is the HTTP context that the Web server

http_context Text String
will use. The default value is “//*.”
This is the base directory that the Web server

static_content_base_dir Text String will use to server up static HTML content. The
default value is file:/varco/www.
This is the default port number that the Web

http_port Integer server will assume for incoming HTTP
requests. The default value is 80.
28-10
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-11 of 24
The Web server assigns a “thread” to handle

each incoming request. The number of threads
used roughly corresponds to the number of
min_threads Integer
requests the Web server can handle at once.
The default value for the minimum number of
threads is 2.
This is the maximum number of threads the

Web server assigns to incoming requests.
max_threads Integer
Each thread uses system resources. The
default maximum is 50.
This element defines the amount of time in

milliseconds that the Web server waits until it
max_idle_time_ms Integer determines an incoming HTTP connection idle.
The default value is 5000, which is five
seconds.
This element contains a list of sub-elements.

Each sub-element has two attributes. The
path_spec attribute is a Linux path name that
XML specifies the path name of the servlet. The
servlet_list
element servlet_class attribute specifies the full Java
class name of the servlet. This provides a way
to list the servlets that the Web server uses, but
it is unnecessary and is not supported.
The Logging Element

The properties shown here appear inside the logging_properties element, which is contained
within the admin_config.xml file.
This element is on the same level as the controller element (described earlier in this chapter).
For example:
<admin_config>
<controller>
</controller>
<logging_properties >
<property name=’log.rootCategory’ value=’ERROR’ />
</logging_properties >
</admin_config>
The controller logging system uses the open source Apache® Log4J package. An element’s
function in the admin_config.xml file is to set the values of these properties.
The Log4J package is built upon the idea of logger hierarchy. It contains a root log, called the
rootCategory and several sub-logs. The following logs are stored on the tool controllers:
R ora.log stores messages from the base controller package
28-11
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-12 of 24
R io.log stores messages from the I/O system generally

R c2c.log stores messages from the controller-to-controller I/O system
R step7 stores messages from the Siemens Step7 I/O system
R alarm stores messages from the alarm system
Additional log files can be found in the /varco/log directory, but they are not controlled by the
logging system.
There are five logging levels. The source code for the controller program contains messages that
are printed into the logs (or not, depending on a hard-coded level for each possible message). In
other words, if the logging level of the message is less than the level of the log level setting, then
the message is written to the log; if the logging level of the message is more than the level of the
log level setting, then the message is not written to the log.
The levels are:
R FATAL: This designates very severe error events that will presumably lead the
controller to abort.
R ERROR: This designates error events that may or may not allow the controller to
continue running. This is the default logging level for all logs. At this level, all FATAL
messages are written to the logs.
R WARN: This designates potentially harmful situations. All ERROR and FATAL
messages are written to the logs.
R INFO: This designates informational messages that highlight the progress of the
controller on a coarse-grained level. All WARN, ERROR, and FATAL messages are
written to the logs.
R DEBUG: This designates fine-grained informational events that are useful in
debugging the controller. All messages are written to the logs.
Property Possible Description

Values
This sets the logging level of

the root log. The other logs
“FATAL,” (ora, io, c2c, etc.) inherit this
“ERROR”, property unless their own level
log.rootCategory “WARN,” is set. The default logging level
“INFO,” or is ERROR. Setting this
“DEBUG” property is unnecessary, since
each sub-log has its own level
property.
“FATAL,
ora,”
“ERROR,
ora,” This sets the logging level of
log.category.com.varco.ora “WARN, the ora.log. The default value
ora,” “INFO, is ERROR, ora.
ora,” or
“DEBUG,
ora”
28-12
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-13 of 24
Property Possible Description

Values
“FATAL, io,”
“ERROR,
io,” “WARN, This sets the logging level of
log.category.com.varco.ora.io io,” “INFO, the io.log. The default value is
io,” or ERROR, io.
“DEBUG,
io”
“FATAL,
c2c,”
“ERROR,
c2c,” This sets the logging level of
log.category.com.varco.ora.io.real.c2c “WARN, the c2c.log. The default value
c2c,” “INFO, is ERROR, c2c.
c2c,” or
“DEBUG,
c2c”
“FATAL,
step7,”
“ERROR,
step7,”
“WARN,
log.category.com.varco.ora.io.real.step7 the step7.log. The default
step7,”
value is ERROR, step7.
“INFO,
step7,” or
“DEBUG,
step7”
“FATAL,
alarm,”
“ERROR,
alarm,”
“WARN,
log.category.com.varco.ora.alarm the alarm.log. The default
alarm,”
value is ERROR, alarm.
“INFO,
alarm,” or
“DEBUG,
alarm”
In addition, each log has its own set of properties which can be set. The properties for a single log
(ora.log) are used as an example below.
28-13
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-14 of 24
Property Value Description
The appender is a strategy for

handling log output. The names of
The name of
appenders must be taken from the
the class to
available appenders in the Log4J
log followed
package. The default is
log.appender.ora by “.log.”
com.varco.ora.log.RollingFileAppe
and the
nder, which is an instruction to create
name of an
a file with the log output and to back
appender.
up the file when it reaches a certain
size.
This is the name of the log file to

log.appender.ora.File ./log/ora.log
write to.
This is the maximum size of the log.

Messages are written to this log file
until it reaches a size of 100 KB, after
log.appender.ora.MaxFileSize 100KB
which the old log is written to a
backup file and a new, empty log file
is created.
This is the number of backup files to

be created after the maximum size of
the log is reached. In this case, only
one backup log will be created. If the
log.appender.ora.MaxBackupIndex 1
log file overflows again, then the
backup file is deleted, the log file is
renamed ora.log.1, and a new log
file is used.
This is an instruction for the logging

The name of engine on how to write messages to
the class to the log file. The name of the layout
log followed must be one of the available layouts
log.appender.ora.layout by “.log.” in the Log4J package. The default is
and the com.varco.ora.log.PatternLayout,
name of a which means that the pattern will be
layout. provided for each message in
another property.
The pattern The default pattern is %-5p %d [%t]

to use in %c - %m%n. More information on
log.appender.ora.layout.Conversio
laying out the layout pattern is available online
nPattern
messages in in documentation for the Log4J
the log file. package.
28-14
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-15 of 24
Interfacing With Linux®

The tool controller runs a host operating system (Linux), a Web server, and applications developed
by NOV®.

trained maintenance personnel.
Connecting to the tool controller using Linux

commands is not normally required. Do not use the
information in this section unless instructed to do so
by an NOV maintenance technician. If direct access to
Linux is required, you should have received a *.zip file
containing the PuTTY software needed to perform the
procedures in this section. You can also download this
software from:
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/
Connect to the tool controller using the =ssh (secure shell) command. If you cannot connect using
an Ethernet connection, connect using a serial cable (see Chapter 2, section titled "Using a Serial
Connection" on page 3-8).
The ssh command is similar to the telnet access program but it also encrypts network traffic. If
connecting to the tool controller over the network, you will have to use the ssh command (Linux) or
PuTTY.exe (Windows®) command for interactive sessions, and the scp (Linux) or pscp.exe
(Windows®) command for file transfers. The tool controller does not support telnet or ftp protocol
due to inherent security risks.
Tool Controller User Accounts

R varco
To connect to the tool controller using ssh or PuTTY, you must use the varco
account.
The varco user rights are limited to the home directory (/home/varco), the jar file
directory (/varco/program/tool), and the class file directory (/varco/com/...).
R root
If connected to the tool controller using a serial cable (see Chapter 2, section titled
"Using a Serial Connection" on page 3-8), you can log in using the root account.
Once logged into the tool controller using varco, you can use the Linux su (substitute user)
command to change your login to root. Ideally, however, you should minimize use of the root
28-15
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-16 of 24
account (see warning message below). The root user is the traditional “super/user” in Unix/Linux
systems.
Root users have unlimited access, including

permission to delete all files. Use extreme caution
when logged in as root.
Installing PuTTY
PuTTY is a free ssh client software application for the Windows® operating system. It includes
such programs as ssh sessions, and pcsp (secure file transfer).
1. Create a PuTTY directory on your computer’s hard drive (c:\putty, for example).
2. Extract the *.zip file into the PuTTY directory.
Starting an Interactive Session

Start a PuTTY ssh session using a command prompt window, or by double-clicking the putty.exe
file. The following examples demonstrate connecting to an tool controller IP address of 128.1.8.5
using both methods.
To launch PuTTy using a command line:
1. Click Start --> Run, then type cmd and press <Enter>.
The Command Prompt window displays
2. Type putty -ssh [email protected] into the space provided, then click
OK.
3. Type varco into the password space provided, then click OK.
To launch PuTTY from Windows Explorer:
1. Locate and double-click the putty.exe file to display the PuTTY Setup window
(shown below).
28-16
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-17 of 24
2. Type the tool controller IP address into the space provided (labeled Host Name).
See section titled "Determining an IP Address" on page 3-8.
3. Click to select the SSH radio button.

The text in the Port field automatically changes to 22.
4. Type a name into the space provided (labeled Saved Sessions) then click Save.
!
Do not close the PuTTY Setup window.
28-17
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-18 of 24
Connecting to the Tool Controller

1. Launch PuTTY using one of the methods described above.
2. Click Open to display the PuTTY login prompt.
3. Type varco at the login as prompt.

4. Type admin at the password prompt.
Listing Tool Controller Directories
The root directory of the Linux operating system is the “/” directory.
Type ls and press <Enter> to list the contents of the / (root) and /varco directories.
For safety reasons, the tool controller file system is partitioned so that all directories in the Linux
operating system except the /varco directory are read-only. All files that are necessary to run the
tool controller, as well as all logging and user-accessible configuration files, are in the /varco
directory. The /varco directory is in its own read-write partition.
28-18
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-19 of 24
Installing Tool Controller Software
This section contains instructions for installing software

using Linux commands. Installing software through the
Software Management page may be considerably easier
for most users. See Chapter 5, titled "Software
Management Links.”
Restarting the JVM (restartj9)

After uploading the tool controller software, restart the Java Virtual Machine. The varco profile
contains the following command for doing so:
restartj9
The script shown below illustrates its use. The ps command displays the existence or non-
existence of the restartj9 process.
28-19
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-20 of 24
Rebooting the Tool Controller

To reboot the tool controller without using the power switch (referred to as a “warm boot”), you
must be logged into the tool controller as the root user.
Use the su command to become root, and two versions of the shutdown command. The first
version reboots the tool controller (-r option); the second halts the tool controller (-h option).
Linux Command Summary

The following basic Linux commands can be used to communicate with the tool controller. In the
Unix tradition, each command offers a myriad of options. The figures below illustrate their basic
use.
Type any command followed by --help to display an

explanation of the command. For example, typing ls --
help displays an explanation of the list command, its
syntax, and options.
R ls provides short list of directory contents

R ls -l provides long listing of directory contents
R cd changes directories
R pwd displays present working directory
R ps reports process status
R cp copies files and directories
R mv moves (renames) files
R top displays top CPU processes
R netstat shows network statistics
28-20
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-21 of 24
cd, ls, ls -l, pwd, cp, mw Commands
ps Command
28-21
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-22 of 24
top Command
This command displays all processes running, and the amount of CPU resources used.
netstat Command
This command displays all Ethernet connections to the tool controller.
28-22
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page 28-23 of 24
Vi Editor
Vi Editor is a full-screen, command-based text editor for creating and editing files on systems like
the tool controller. For a complete list of commands and more detailed information, go to: http://
www.nacs.uci.edu/help/manuals/uci.unix.guide/the_vi_editor.html.
1. Type vi <file name>, then press <Enter> to either open an existing file, or
create a new one (if the file name entered does not exist).
Cursor
End of file
Vi Editor opens in command mode with the cursor in the upper-left corner of the
screen. A tilde (~), indicates the end of a file. The file name (in quotes) displays in
the bottom-left corner of the screen.
2. Position the cursor anywhere in the file, then type to change the text:
Q Type i to begin insert mode.
You must be in insert mode before you can enter text. In insert mode you can
backspace within the current line. i adds text before the cursor while in insert
mode.
Q Press <Esc> to exit insert mode and return to command mode.
In command mode you can issue complex commands preceded by a colon (:),
such as those that affect sections of text.
Q Type <n>x (where n is a number) to delete <n> characters from the current
position.
Q Type <n>X (where n is a number) to delete <n> characters before the cursor.
Q Type <n>dw: (where n is a number) to delete <n> words from the current
cursor position.
Q Type <n>dd (where n is a number) to delete <n> lines beginning with the line
upon which the cursor is positioned.
Q Type D to delete the remainder of the current line including the current cursor
position
3. After typing a line of text, press <Enter>.
4. Type :w, then <Enter> to save the file.
28-23
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page 28-24 of 24
5. Type :wq to save the current file and quit.

Alternatively, type :q to quit, or :q! to exit without saving.
To return to the previous line, press <Esc> to return to command mode.
28-24
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page A-1 of 10
Appendix
Profibus Addressing
See Chapter 6, titled "Debug Monitor,” Chapter 7, titled "I/O

Diagnostics,” and Chapter 12, titled "Profibus Network
Status” for related information
All I/O points are defined by two text strings:

R I/O type: A three-letter mnemonic that identifies the Profibus network to which the
point is connected.
R I/O Identifier: A unique string used inside the tool controller program and on
electrical drawings to identify the node and offset.
I/O Types
R DP1 identifies the I/O accessed through the first Profibus network (first Applicom®
card). DP1 normally communicates with devices on the tool.
R DP2 identifies I/O accessed through the second Profibus network (second Applicom
Card).
I/O Identifiers
Typical format for an I/O identifier:
<Node number><class><byte offset>.<bit offset>
Class (DI for “Digital Input”)

Byte offset.bit offset
7DI0.2
Node number
A-1
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
A Appendix Revision 02
Page A-2 of 10
Node Numbers
Node numbers are named first in the I/O identifier text string, and range from 1 to 125.
R Nodes 1 assigned to diagnostic tools.
R Node 2 is assigned to the tool controller.
R Node 3 is the default address of a VFD, and is not used.
Valid Classes Table
Class Description # of bits

DI Digital Input 1
AI Analog Input 16
IW Input Word 16
ID Input Double Word 32
IR Input Real Number 32
DQ Digital Output 1
AQ Analog Output 16
QW Output Word 16
QD Output Double Word 32
QR Output Real Number 32
SI String Input varies
SO String Output varies
Byte and Bit Assignments

Each Profibus node is assigned its own input and output address space, which is stored in
memory. The address always begins with byte 0, bit 0. If setting up either an ET200M module or a
PA coupler, the address space fills sequentially with each module added to the node.
For example, a Bartec input brick has 16 digital input points, and is located on node #6. It requires
2 bytes of input space, and no output space. The first identifier would be 6DI0.0. Others would
follow in sequence:
6DI0.1
6DI0.2
6DI0.3
6DI0.4
6DI0.5
6DI0.6
6DI0.7
6DI1.0
6DI1.1
6DI1.2
6DI1.3
6DI1.4
6DI1.5
6DI1.6
6DI1.7
A-2
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page A-3 of 10
Appendix A
A Hengstler absolute encoder located on node #12 provides position, velocity, and acceleration
feedback:
Position 32-bit integer 12ID0
Velocity 16-bit integer 12AI4
Acceleration 16-bit integer 12AI6
An ET200M module is located on node #5 and has:

R one module with 16 digital outputs
R one four-channel analog input module
R one module with eight digital inputs and eight digital outputs
The module addresses would begin: 5DQO.0, 5DQ0.1 ... 5DQ1.0, 5DQ1.1 ... 5DQ1.7
The second module’s four-channel analog input is the first input space on the ET200M. For this
reason its addresses also start at byte 0: 5AI0, 5AI2, 5AI4, 5AI6
The third module’s points add to both the input and output space:
Input addresses: 5DI8.0, 5DI8.1, 5DI8.2 ... 5DI8.7
Output addresses: 5DQ2.0, 5DQ2.1 ... 5DQ2.7
A-3
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page A-4 of 10
Setting Up and Using AmphiCom™

Additional I/O Addressing Table
Address Node Class Byte Bit Discussion

Digital
5DQ0.0 5 0 0 First output on module
Output
7DI0.2 7 Digital Input 0 2 Third input on module
Analog start at byte Second analog input on
6AI2 6
Input offset 2 module
Double
10ID0 10 byte offset 0
Word Input

trained, qualified personnel only. Use extreme caution
when changing too configuration settings. Incorrect
setup can result in loss of tool control that can only be
restored by a National Oilwell Varco (NOV®) service
engineer.
AmphiCom™ is a program designed for the Windows® operating system that acts as a gateway
between the tool controller and other programs, such as Wonderware®, Microsoft Excel®,
databases, and other software. AmphiCom can be used to read information from and write to the
tool controller.
AmphiCom uses the Windows Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) communication protocol to transfer
data between itself and other Windows programs.
Both AmphiCom and the other program must be installed

on the same computer.
A-4
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page A-5 of 10
Appendix A
Configuration File
!
At this time, the XML configuration file must be created
manually using the built-in Windows accessory named
Notepad. NOV recommends that you use the File --> Save
As menu command, name the file config.xml, and save it
in the same directory that the Amphicom.exe file is
located. Ensure that the file type is XML.
AmphiCom requires a configuration file. It is designed to use its own XML configuration file, but
can use an older VExpress.dat file.
VExpress is a program that was designed in earlier Amphion systems that filled the same role as
AmphiCom. The VExpress.dat file can be used by AmphiCom, however AmphiCom uses a
different protocol to communicate with the tool controller. AmphiCom must be used with revision 3
or later tool controllers.
An example of an AmphiCom configuration file is shown here.
<root >
<SERVICE name=”AmphiCom”/>
<SBC name=”Racker” ip=”192.168.31.21”
update_rate=”200” persist=”false”/>
<SBC name=”Fingerboard” ip=”192.168.31.22”
update_rate=”200” persist=”true”/>
<Delay Update=”10”/>
</root>
SERVICE Element
In Windows DDE, the client application (such as Wonderware or Excel) needs to know the name of
the application that is supplying the dynamic data. AmphiCom is the application that supplies the
data, and the name that it will have in DDE is specified by the SERVICE element in the XML
document. In the example above, the name “AmphiCom” is used. The client applications know
AmphiCom by this name.
There should be only one SERVICE element in the XML configuration file. This element is
optional. If it is not included, then the name “AmphiCom” is used.
SBC Element
There can be any number of SBC elements in the XML configuration file, however at least one
element is required. Each SBC element should identify an Amphion tool controller from which
AmphiCom needs to pull dynamic data.
The name attribute (or topic name) in the SBC element specifies a topic for DDE. Two tool
controllers are listed in the configuration file example above (Racker and Fingerboard), so two
topics are available to DDE for the application named “AmphiCom.” The name attribute is required.
The ip attribute of the SBC element is required. It specifies the IP address of the tool controller.
These can be found on the “Network” button on the main service page for any tool controller. A list
A-5
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page A-6 of 10
of the addresses is normally supplied as part of the documentation for any rig project. Also see
section titled "Locating Tool Controller IP Addresses" on page 2-9.
The update_rate attribute of the SBC element specifies the time in milliseconds (1/1000 seconds)
that the tool controller should wait between updates when sending data to AmphiCom. This
attribute is optional. If you do not specify the update rate, the system uses its default update rate of
200.
The tool controller usually cannot send updates faster than

once every 20 milliseconds, however this rate places an
excessive burden on the tool controller, and the extra
updates are not typically useful to the client program. A
good rule of thumb is to set the update rate to no less than
100.
The persistent attribute of the SBC element specifies whether communications will “persist” even
after AmphiCom is closed. This is included for compatibility with older systems. This attribute is
optional. If you do not specify the persistent attribute, the default is “false” (meaning that
communications will not continue after AmphiCom is closed).
The Delay element is used to specify the amount of time (in milliseconds) that AmphiCom waits
between sending data updates to client applications using Windows DDE. This element is
optional. Internally, AmphiCom ensures that this value is no less than zero, and no greater than
1000 (once per second). In the configuration file example above, the delay time is set to 10
milliseconds (or 100 times per second). If it is not included, then the default value of 50
milliseconds is used.
Quick Start
1. Create the AmphiCom config.exe file using the information provided above in the
section titled "Configuration File" on page A-5.
2. Locate the file named Amphicom.exe on the hard drive of your computer, and
make note of its location.
4. Type cmd into the space provided, then click OK.
5. At the command prompt, type
cd <directory name where the
Amphicom.exe file is located>.
For example: cd program files
6. Press <Enter>.
7. Type Amphicom.exe config.xml
8. Press <Enter> to display the AmphiCom startup window.
A-6
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page A-7 of 10
Appendix A
Q Click Exit to close Amphicom.

Q Click Debug On to begin displaying debug message information.
Q Click Debug Off to stop displaying debug message information.
Q Click Clear to remove debug information from the window.
Q Click Copy to place the contents of the window into the clipboard, which can be
then pasted into another Windows application, such as a text editor or an e-mail
program.
A-7
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page A-8 of 10
Using AmphiCom with Microsoft Excel

Dynamic Data Display
You can use Microsoft Excel as a client application to display data that updates dynamically from
the tool controller. AmphiCom must be running and properly configured before Excel is launched.
See section titled "Configuration File" on page A-5, and section titled "Quick Start" on page A-6.
Data fields on the tool controller that are available for display are called WebObjects. In order to
view dynamic data in an Excel spreadsheet, WebObjects must be specified by name. WebObject
names are commonly quite long, punctuated by dots (“.”). Modules such as the debug monitor
displays lists of WebObject names and values (for more information, see Chapter 6, titled "Debug
Monitor”).
The Excel cell displaying dynamic data should contain a formula like the example shown here.
Topic name
(tool controller name)
=AmphiCom|Racker!controller_stats_avgCycleTime
Server application WebObject
All Excel formulas must begin with an equal sign (=).

R Server Application: The first part of the formula must be the name of the
application that is serving the data (see section titled "SERVICE Element" on page
A-5). The server application name is followed by the pipe character (“|”).
R Topic Name: The second part of the formula must be the topic name (the name of a
tool controller). This should match the “SBC” name located in the configuration file
(see section titled "SBC Element" on page A-5). The topic name is followed by an
exclamation point (“!”).
R WebObject Name: The third part of the formula must be the WebObject name of
the data field on the tool controller. However, because the dot characters in
WebObject names (“.”) are misunderstood by DDE, an underline must be
substituted for each one. Spaces are also illegal characters in DDE, so any space in
the WebObject name must be removed and replaced with a back slash character
(“\”).
A-8
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Revision 02
Page A-9 of 10
Appendix A
Writing Data to the Tool Controller

You can write data to a tool controller using Microsoft Excel and Amphicom by writing a Visual
Basic® script in Excel.
1. In Excel, click Tools --> Macro, then click to select Visual Basic Editor from the
submenu.
2. In Visual Basic Editor, click Insert --> Module.
A new code module window appears. Initially the main text area of the window is
blank.
3. Create a new module using the information provided immediately following this
procedure. See section titled "Visual Basic Modules" on page A-10.
4. Close Visual Basic Editor.
5. In Excel, click Tools --> Macro, then click to select Macros from the submenu to
display the Macro pop-up window (shown below).
6. Click to select the script you created, then click Run.

In the illustration shown above, the new module is named ValueWriter.
The specified value is written to the tool controller.
A-9
www.nov.com
D811001117-MAN-001
Page A-10 of 10
Visual Basic Modules

An example script for a module that sets a value on a tool controller is shown here.
Topic name
(tool controller name)
Server application Excel cell number
Sub ValueWriter()
Dim channelNumber As Long
channelNumber = DDEInitiate(“AmphiCom”, “racker”)
Set rangeToPoke = Worksheets(“Sheet1”).Range(“D15”)
DDEPoke channelNumber, “controller.stats.maxCycleTime”, rangeToPoke
DDETerminate (channelNumber)
End Sub
WebObject
R DDE Initiate Function: On line 3, specify the service name that AmphiCom is using
(see section titled "SERVICE Element" on page A-5), followed by the tool controller
name (see section titled "SBC Element" on page A-5). This function returns a
channel number that will be used to identify the communications channel to
subsequent methods.
R Excel Cell Range: Line 4 specifies the cell whose contents will be written to the tool
controller. You cannot simply code a value into the Visual Basic script. You must use
a cell number.
R DDEPoke Function: Line 5 specifies the channel number, the name of the
WebObject to write to (this name uses the standard naming convention for
WebObjects; do not replace dot characters with underlines, or spaces with back
slashes), and the Excel cell that supplies the data.
A-10
www.nov.com
Amphion™
Standard Technical Reference Manual

Amphion Standard
D811000238-MAN-001
Technical Reference Manual
hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited purposes only National Oilwell Varco
and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in RIG SOLUTIONS
part, or use of this design or distribution of this information to
others is not permitted without the express written consent of
11000 Corporate Centre Drive
D811000238-MAN-001 04
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Revision History
04 01.06.2011 Fourth Issue S. Davila S. Sobreira G. Weaver
03 22.07.2010 Third issue D. Carpenter D. Carpenter D. Carpenter
02 10.07.2009 Second Issue L. Braaten P. Williams J. Faga
01 22.10.2007 Issued for implementation L. Braaten K. Schmidt J.Faga
Change Description
01 First issue
02 Updated to reflect current information per engineering department
Corrected document number on title page.

03 Updated template.
Removed Service Center information from Appendix.
Updated Third Party Information.

04 Added section on Foreign Objects.
Added section on Replacing Air Filter.

This program contains proprietary as well as free software. You can redistribute and/or modify the free portion of the software under the terms of the GNU General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. To view and/or obtain a copy of
the free software used in this product, please visit ftp://ftp.amphion.nov.com/gpl/.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall convey to you the right to utilize National Oilwell Varco trademarks, trade names, services marks or other
National Oilwell Varco proprietary materials.
In addition, you shall not have the right to publish the name of National Oilwell Varco without the prior permission of National Oilwell Varco in writing.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page i of iv
Table of Contents

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Safe Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Chapter 2: Amphion™ Overview

Driller’s Cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operator Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Touchscreens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Discrete Switches and Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Equipment and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Remote I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Multi-Tool (MTC) Controller Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Other Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Drill Floor Shutdown (E-Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Tool Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Process Field BUS (Profibus) DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
RigSense and WITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Electronic Drilling System™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
System Overview Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
System Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Chapter 3: Computers and Software

Touchscreen Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Backup Disk Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Recommended Equipment and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
i
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page ii of iv
Table of Contents
Creating a Disk Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Restoring a Disk Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Assigning IP Addresses to Wago Remote I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
RigSense™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Serial WITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Hardware and Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
VChannel Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Typical S-DAQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Tool Controller Web-Based Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Installing Third-Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Chapter 4: Operator Workstations

Flex™ Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Front-Entry Chair (FEC™) Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Wrap-Around™ Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Touchscreens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Control Panels and Joysticks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Left Control Panel & Joystick Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Right Control Panel & Joystick Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Chapter 5: Multi-Tool Controller Cabinet

Control Overview Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Network Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Process Field BUS (Profibus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Multi-tool Controller Cabinet Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Chapter 6: Tool Controllers

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Tool Controller Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Advantech™ Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Beckhoff™ Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
CompactFlash® Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ethernet (ENET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Profibus (Process Field Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
COM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Mouse/Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
ii
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page iii of iv
Table of Contents
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Profibus Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Tool Controllers and NOV Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Tool Controller Web-Based Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Chapter 7: Startup and Shutdown

Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Control Enclosure Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Basic Diagnostic Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Workstation Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Joysticks and Discrete Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Touchscreens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Alarm Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Cable Inspection and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Workstation Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Fiber Optic Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Fiber Optic Cable Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Ethernet Cable Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Profibus Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Video (Coaxial) Cable Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Moxa® Network Switch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Properties Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Hyperterminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Disk Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Network and Workstation Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Visual Inspection of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Cleaning a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing or Cleaning Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
HMI and Foreign Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Recommended Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Appendix A: Appendix
Opening a Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Command Descriptions and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Using a URL Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Using the Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
iii
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page iv of iv
Table of Contents
Using the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Using the Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Ping Command Switch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
IP Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Tracert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Nslookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
iv
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Conventions
Every reasonable effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained
herein. National Oilwell Varco® (NOV) will not be held liable for errors in this material, or for
consequences arising from misuse of this material.
Advisories
Graphic symbols and bracketed text indicate advisories for a specific topic. This information
provides the reader with additional details and may advise the reader to take a specific action to
protect personnel from potential injury or lethal conditions. These advisories may also inform the
reader of actions necessary to prevent equipment damage.
Note

provided about the current topic.
Caution
!
equipment, or injury to personnel exists. Follow
instructions explicitly. Extreme care should be taken when
performing operations or procedures preceded by this
caution symbol.
Warning

follow safe work procedures could result in serious or
fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment
damage, or extended rig down time.
1-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 1-2 of 6
Conventions
Advisories
Hot Surfaces
The hot surface symbol indicates the presence of a

hot surface or component. Touching this surface
could result in bodily injury. To reduce the risk of
injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool
before touching.
Electrostatic Discharge
The Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) symbol indicates the

potential for static electrical discharge is present. ESD can
damage or destroy sensitive electronic components. ESD
can also set off explosions or fires in flammable environ-
ments. Always discharge static electricity prior to working
on sensitive components or in flammable environments.
Illustrations
snapshots for use in identifying parts, or establishing nomenclature, and may or may not be drawn
to scale.
1-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 1-3 of 6
Safety Requirements
The NOV equipment is installed and operated in a controlled drilling rig environment involving
outlined in the equipment manuals are the recommended methods of performing operations and
maintenance.
!

NOV equipment is designed for specific functions and applications, and should be used only for its
intended purpose.
Safe Lifting
When lifting and handling NOV equipment, use approved lifting procedures and safe methods.
Always follow all federal, state and local rules, codes, and
rig-specific safety guidelines when lifting and handling
NOV equipment. Operators and maintenance personnel
should be properly trained in safe lifting procedures and
the inspection of material handling equipment and lifting
components. Safe lifting recommendations provided in this
manual do not take precedence over local safety rules and
regulations, OSHA regulations, or instructions issued by
the manufacturers of rig hoisting equipment and other tools
on the rig.
Lifting equipment improperly creates a hazardous

working environment. To avoid lifting hazards, only lift
equipment with material handling equipment rated for
the expected load and only from the designated lift
points. Failure to follow safe lifting guidelines may
result in serious or fatal injury to personnel,
significant equipment damage, and extended rig down
time.
1-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 1-4 of 6
Safety Requirements
Personnel Training
equipment, or those in the vicinity of the equipment, should be trained in rig safety, tool operation,
!
Contact the NOV training department for more information about equipment operation and
maintenance training.
Recommended Tools
The equipment manufacturer recommends that only those tools specified be used when stated.
Ensure that personnel and equipment safety are not jeopardized when following service
procedures and that personnel are not using tools that were not specifically recommended by the
manufacturer.

The equipment discussed in this manual may require or contain one or more utilities such as
!
 Isolate energy sources before beginning work.

 Avoid performing maintenance or repairs while the equipment is in operation.
 Wear proper protective equipment during equipment installation, maintenance, or
repair.
1-4
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 1-5 of 6
Safety Requirements
 Verify that all components (such as cables, hoses, etc.) are tagged and labeled
during assembly and disassembly of equipment to ensure correct installment.
 Replace failed or damaged components with original equipment manufacturer
certified parts. Failure to do so could result in equipment damage or injury to
personnel.
Routine Maintenance
Equipment must be maintained on a routine basis. See section titled "Network and Workstation
Equipment" on page 8-17, section titled "Cleaning a Touchscreen" on page 8-18 and the product-
specific service manuals for maintenance recommendations.
!
Service Centers
For a directory of NOV Service Centers, see NOV document number D811001337-DAS-001, titled
“Service Center Directory.” This document is located in the User Manual.
www.nov.com/contact_us/24hr_EmergencyList.asp
1-5
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 1-6 of 6
1-6
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Optional components described in this manual may not be

present on your particular rig.
Driller’s Cabin
The operator workstations are located in a specially designed, climate-controlled cabin. The cabin
is positioned on the drill floor to provide maximum viewing of rig operations.
From within the cabin, the operators can control integrated equipment on the drill floor and pipe
deck, removing operators from conventional drilling process hazards.
The footprint of each cabin may vary to support rig requirements, however basic cabin features
generally include:
 Heavy duty steel with a protection bumper in front
 A protection grid for the upper windows
 Pneumatic wipers with a high pressure wash system
 A heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) unit
 Non-slip floors
 Recessed cable routes with removable floor panels
In addition to the operator workstations, driller’s cabins may contain:
 Blowout Prevention (BOP) control panels
 Control and interface junction boxes (J-Boxes)
 Alarm horns
 Telephone
 PA speakers
 Thermostat and humidistat
 HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) control panels
 Smoke detectors
 Gas detectors
 CCTV monitors
See an example illustration of a driller’s cabin below.
2-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 2-2 of 12
PA speaker
Fire and gas
Talkback Gas detector panel HVAC status
station PA speaker
panel 2
Telephone
HVAC status
panel 1
Gas detector
Wiper
controls Assistant driller
workstation footprint
Driller workstation BOP control

footprint panel
Items not shown (for clarity) Features
2 smoke detectors in ceiling Non-slip flooring

1 driller workstation Two access/escape routes
1 assistant driller workstation Emergency lighting system
Hinged protection grid above upper windows
Pneumatic windshield wipers
High pressure window washing system
Recessed cable routes in the floor
Removable non-slip floor panels
Noise and vibration reduction
Climate controlled through the HVAC system
*Not all features are present in all cabins; see rig-specific engineering documents.
2-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 2-3 of 12
Operator Workstations
The operator workstation is the user's interface to the drilling network and tools. Workstations
consist of integrated control panels and an ergonomic chair designed to reduce the effects of
stress and strain associated with long periods of sitting.
See Chapter 4, titled "Operator Workstations” for additional information about workstations.
Touchscreens
Each operator workstation provides two to four touchscreens, often referred to as an HMI (Human
Machine Interface). Touchscreens display the software used to manage operator requests.
Touchscreens display Amphion tool control, drilling operations, alarms, and status information
pertinent to the current activity being performed. This allows the operator to concentrate on the job
at hand without the distraction of extraneous data.
Discrete Switches and Joysticks

Switch controls are dedicated to frequently-used operations (such as opening and closing the
power slips). Joysticks are used for tools that require controlled movement (such as the
drawworks).
See the rig-specific Amphion user’s manual and Chapter 4, titled "Operator Workstations” for
additional information.
Equipment and Features

The Amphion system provides operators with control of drilling tools and processes from a
workstation. Located inside the driller’s cabin, the workstation offers controls and status
information applicable to the operation being performed.
The driller’s cabin, local electrical room (LER), hull LER, and accommodations area are
considered safe areas for installing Amphion components that carry no hazardous area
classifications (workstation, multi-tool controller cabinet, etc.).
Main features of the Amphion package can include (but are not limited to) the following:
 One or more operator workstations, equipped with touchscreens for control
functions
 One or more multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinets
 Integrated operator interface application for tools, systems, or monitoring processes,
such as:
 Assignments (motor)
 Automated Drawworks System (ADS)
 Automated Roughneck (AR)
 Bridge Racker
 Casing Running Tool
 Compensator
 Conveyor
 Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)
 Driller Auxiliaries
 Drilling Process
2-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 2-4 of 12
 Fingerboard
 Foxhole
 Horizontal-to-Vertical (HTV) Machine
 Hydraulic Cathead (HC26-EV)
 Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU)
 Maintenance Mode
 Mousehole
 Mud Bucket
 Mud Pumps
 Ownership Overview
 Pipe Racking System (PRS)
 Power Management System
 Power Slips
 Riser Tensioner
 Rotary Support Table (RST)
 Spider Gimble
 Stand Building
 Stand Jump
 Top Drive System (TDS)
 Tripping Process
 Varco Compact Racker (VCR)
 Well Control
 Workstation Diagnostics
 Zone Management System (ZMS)
 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) system, Silicone Controlled Rectifier (SCR), and
Power Enclosures
 RigSense™ application, client, and server
 Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) Module
 System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™) Module
See the rig-specific NOV Amphion user’s manual for

information about the operator interface.
2-4
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 2-5 of 12
Network System
The network ties tool controllers and status information together to allow both control and
monitoring capability from any operator workstation. Selected information can also be monitored
from desktop computers in other locations, such as the tool pusher’s office.
Optional components described in this section may not be

present on the rig.
Sensors
Rigs are equipped with various sensors used to gather information from the equipment, and about
the drilling process. For more information, see the sensor manuals provided with the equipment.
Remote I/Os
Remote I/Os receive input and/or output digital signals, analog signals, and other types of
communication from, or for, other devices such as tool controllers.
Sensors, controls, and other devices are hard-wired into the remote I/O. From there, a single cable
can carry all communication from the remote I/O to a second device, which processes the
communication. This reduces the number of cables used on the rig.
For example, drilling equipment controls are hard-wired to a remote I/O module in each
workstation. The remote I/O communicates, then forwards the signal to the appropriate tool
controller. The tool controller generally processes the request, then returns a status signal to the
operator workstation’s screen.
Emergency stop switches are hard-wired in compliance with the relevant standard.
2-5
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 2-6 of 12
Multi-Tool (MTC) Controller Cabinets

The MTC cabinet houses the workstation and network control components, and is normally
located in the drill floor local electrical room (LER).
An example of an MTC cabinet is shown here.
Power supplies 1 & 2
PROFIBUS connections
and 7 Tool controllers
Flash card
Network switches
OLMs and remote I/Os
Inside Back Panel
Circuit breakers 1 - 10 UPS terminations
Circuit breakers 11 - 20
Power supplies 3 & 4 Asynchronus modem
Tool terminations
Power distribution terminations Inside Right Panel
2 rig and 1 UPS A/B

Touchscreen Ethernet fast connect
power switches
Keyboard
Fiber patch panel
Power distribution terminations

Inside Left Door Inside Right Door
Electromagnetic interference filters
Rig and
Inside Left Panel UPS terminations
This enclosure contains:

 Network switches
 Power supplies for the tool controllers and network components
 Power distribution circuit breakers
 Asynchronous modem
 Tool controllers
2-6
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 2-7 of 12
Other Cabinets
The cabinets that house the VFDs (variable frequency drive) and generators may be supplied and
powered by third party vendors. For information regarding their equipment, see the original
equipment manufacturer’s documentation.
Drill Floor Shutdown (E-Stop)

The drill floor shutdown (DFSD) emergency stop (E-Stop) box is hard wired to the operator
workstation, and connected to all tools.
Tool Controllers
A tool controller is a customized computer used to automate machinery in commercial and
industrial environments. They are programmable and contain processors, memory, communication
ports, and other components similar to those found in most computers. Each tool controller is
programmed with the logic required to automate and monitor a specific piece of rig equipment.
The term “tool controller” refers to the entire tool control unit, which consists of the chassis, cover,
tool controller board, tool control program, communication cards, and other hardware-related
components used to control the tool.
The tool controller service pages interface displays controller information that can be used for
diagnostic purposes. Web pages associated with each tool are stored within their own dedicated
tool controllers. Technicians can communicate with a tool controllership the diagnostic workstation
(DWS), by connecting a computer to the drilling control network (DCN) and typing the tool
controller’s unique IP address into a web browser’s address field, or by selecting the appropriate
tool from the main tool controller web page.
Tool controllers are located in the multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinets. Security for tool access is
based on keys to prevent unauthorized computers connected to the drilling control network from
controlling a tool.
See Chapter 6, titled "Tool Controllers” for more information.
2-7
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 2-8 of 12
Communication Protocol
The Amphion network architecture uses copper and fiber optic media to carry information.
Although Ethernet is the prevalent form of communication used by the drilling control network, a
variety of communication protocols are used, as described in this section.
Ethernet
Physical network/data link layer protocols are 100-MB Ethernet for most PC and tool controller
nodes.
Touchscreen to tool controller connections use OPC, DCOM or NetDDE over TCP/IP.
TCP/IP is normally used in instances where the Ethernet communication is routed through a
network switch.
Category 5 (CAT-5) copper cable is normally used for devices located within close proximity to one
another (housed in the same or adjoining cabinets). 62.5/125-micron, multi-mode glass fiber optic
cable is normally used for longer distances.
Process Field BUS (Profibus) DP

The Amphion network typically uses Profibus DP communication. Profibus communication
protocol is an international standard for communication between tool controllers, remote
I/Os, drives, valves, operator interfaces, and computers. Profibus supports communication speeds
up to 12M baud over twisted-pair copper or fiber optic cable.
Application layer interface/communication protocol for Profibus DP is between tool controllers and
associated remote I/Os. Remote I/Os gather data for tool controllers, and can be customized to
address a wide variety of local and remote I/O requirements. Tool sensors and controls are hard-
wired into the remote I/O. From there, a single Profibus cable carries all communication from the
remote I/O to the tool controller or other device that processes the information.
For example, sensors on the top drive are hard-wired to a remote I/O module mounted near the
tool. The remote I/O communicates with the top drive tool controller over a Profibus DP link.
Emergency stop switches are hard-wired in compliance

with the relevant standard.
RS232
The RigSense™ application server supports serial WITS connections from the system's built-in
COM ports. Up to two Wellsite Information Transfer Specification (WITS) feeds are supported. The
data is sent to the mud logger, the Measurement While Drilling (MWD) system, and others as
needed.
2-8
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 2-9 of 12
Additional Components
RigSense and WITS
time- or depth-based format.
See Chapter 3, titled "Computers and Software” for more information about RigSense.

S-DAQ gathers data from rig sensors and equipment. Drilling parameters are displayed in real
time, in both analog and digital formats. Each channel can be configured with alarm functions. S-
DAQ can apply algorithms to the data, then forward the information to applications such as
RigSense™. S-DAQ and RigSense communicate using Ethernet. See NOV document number
D250000-0401-OPM-0001, titled “S-DAQ Simple Data Acquisition System.”
Also see the MD Totco® RigSense manual for more information.
System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™)

V-DAQ performs the same functions as S-DAQ and has the same capabilities, but provides a much
greater depth of information and detail. While S-DAQ is intended to be used with RigSense™
rental equipment, V-DAQ is intended to be a permanent part of a rig installation.
See MD Totco document number 42TM62-20, titled “V-DAQ System V Data Acquisition User’s
Manual” for more information. Also see the MD Totco® RigSense manual.
Electronic Drilling System™

The Electronic Drilling System (EDS) is built into the automated drawworks system (ADS) and
Amphion touchscreen control systems.
EDS is designed to provide a constant drilling state at the bit, which cannot be achieved using
manual or other types of drawworks braking systems. The constant bit state is achieved through
closed-loop control of selected primary drilling parameters (such as weight on bit or delta
pressure), and the ability to regulate the disc brake for continuous feed of the drill line.
Continuously running secondary control parameters (rate of penetration and torque) provide
additional control necessary for a steady state during unexpected events, such as a drilling break
or stick-slip situation.
The driller can select which modes are active through the touchscreens, and adjust individual
parameter setpoints.
See the See rig-specific NOV Amphion user’s manual for more information about the user
interface.
Also see product-specific Electronic Drilling System and Automated Drawworks System
documentation.
2-9
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 2-10 of 12
System Overview Example
Driller cabin Drill floor LER

safe area safe area
Modem
Multi-tool control cabinet connection
2 Modem
3
1 Tool Controllers (TC)

MTC PMS**
WS* TDS Aux I/O V-DAQ VCR ADS & MPs
TC TC TC TC TC TC TC TC
1 2 3
HMI Network
switches
M&I VFD
Drill enclosure
floor
Network Network shut 1 2
Remote I/O down
switch 1 switch 2
VFD 1/ADS-B
VFD 2/TD/ADS-A
V-DAQ
VFD3/TD/ADS-A
remote
I/O
Drill floor
Accommodations Hull LER safe area MCC
safe area
MP MCC 1 MCC 2
Radio room room cabinet cabinet 1
Network
Netscreen firewall switch
1 1 1
Tool pusher office Network switches

RigSense server
M&I enclosure
V-DAQ Network switches

remote I/O
4 3 2 1
VFD 6/MP 2A VFD 9/MP 3B
VFD 5/MP1B VFD 5/MP 3A
Ethernet switch VFD 4/MP 1A Emerg. Gen.
Legend
Gen. 2 Gen. 4
Company man office Ethernet
RigSense client Gen. 1 Gen. 3
Fiber optic VFD 7/MP 2B PMS**
Modem PMS** HMI
Hard wired
Router
Signal
*Workstation **Power management system
2-10
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 2-11 of 12
Control Overview Example

The multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinet houses the workstation and network control components.
The cabinet is located in the drill floor local electrical room (LER).
MTC cabinet
Async Modem
Network Power Sys & MP Gateway 6
switch 3 Racker (VCR) 7
Auxiliary 2
Power slips
Spare
Cathead
Spare
V-DAQ 4 1
Network Drawworks 5
switch 2
5
2
6
4 9
7
MTC I/O
Network Driller's Workstation 9

switch 1 MTC Touchscreen 5
Top Drive System 1
V-DAQ Drill floor

remote I/O shutdown
Electronic
weight
indicator
HMI 2
Remote I/O HMI 3
HMI 1
Network
switch 2
M&I control cabinets Network

switch 1
network switches
2-11
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 2-12 of 12
System Documentation
 MTC cabinet (electrical and mechanical) engineering drawings
 Workstation drawings
 System topology engineering drawings
 Interconnect engineering drawings
 Amphion Functional Design Specification (FDS)
 User’s and technical reference manuals
 National Oilwell Varco equipment-specific manuals
2-12
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Computers and Software 3
Optional components described in this manual may not be

present on your particular rig.
Touchscreen Computers
This section contains general information about the touchscreens. See the original equipment
manufacturer’s documentation that came with the touchscreens for detailed hardware and
troubleshooting information.
The Amphion workstation is equipped with self-contained touchscreen computers. All are
industrially-hardened machines that use 85- 265-volt AC power.
A diagnostic workstation (DWS) computer with a keyboard is mounted on the door of an MTC
cabinet. It can be used to connect to the Amphion service pages interface to diagnose problems or
monitor processes from a location other than the operator workstations, eliminating interference
with drilling operations. See NOV document titled “Amphion Tool Controller Service Pages User’s
Manual” for more information.
See the rig-specific National Oilwell Varco (NOV) Amphion User’s Manual for detailed user
interface information.
Software
Touchscreen computers host the following software, pre-installed by NOV:
 Windows® XP Embedded operating system with Service Pack 2 or later

 Microsoft® Internet Explorer (Web browser used for the Amphion™ tool controller
interface) version 6.0 or later
 Sun J2SE Java Runtime Environment version 1.4 or later
 Video driver
 Ethernet driver
 Touchscreen driver
3-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
3 Computers and Software Revision 04
Page 3-2 of 16
Hardware
An industrial tool controller card is installed in the computer’s chassis, and incorporates many of
the major components required by the computer (such as memory, processing chips, video
controllers, and Ethernet ports).
 Processor: 1 GHz onboard VIA C3 processor
 Memory:
 512 MB RAM installed
 2 DIMM slots available
 Maximum 1 GB RAM
 Communication and Connection Ports:
 RS-45 10/100-Base TX Ethernet (auto-sensing)
 101-key PS/2 (DIN and XT/AT mini-DIN) compatible keyboard connector
 Serial mouse connector (DB9 or PS/2)
 RS232-compliant serial COM port with male DB9 connector
 Centronics/EPP-compliant parallel port with female DB25 connector
BIOS Settings
Set the BIOS as shown here.
Set the PNP Resources to be controlled by: Automatic
Set the Assign IRQ for VGA adapter to: Disabled
Set the Assign IRQ for USB controller (if applicable; older
Enabled
rigs may not include USB ports) to:
Advanced BIOS:
First Boot Device HDD-0
Backup Disk Imaging

Create a disk image for backup and disaster recovery purposes to prevent loss of data (should a
fatal system failure occur). Disk image files contain exact, byte-by-byte copies of the hard drive,
partition, or logical disk. Drive image files can then be restored to their original disks to completely
and rapidly restore your system after heavy data loss caused by an operating system crash, virus
attack or hardware failure.
Recommended Equipment and Software

 A desktop or laptop computer to perform the disk imaging procedure, equipped with
a device to read and write to a CompactFlash® card, such as a USB device, or a
PCMCIA card reader.
 The “dd” utility for Windows, available online at:
http://uranus.it.swin.edu.au/~jn/linux/rawwrite/dd.htm.
3-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 3-3 of 16
Creating a Disk Image
This procedure should be performed by qualified

personnel only. Ensure that proper lock and tag-out
procedures are followed when working on energized
equipment.
1. Shut down the computer.

2. Plug in an external keyboard and then turn the computer back on.
3. Press <Alt+F4> buttons simultaneously (on the connected keyboard) to close
Internet Explorer.
4. Press <Alt+F4> buttons again to shut down the Windows operating system.
5. Press OK to confirm.
6. When the message “It is now safe to shut down your
computer” appears, press the touchscreen’s power button to shut it down.
7. Repeat this procedure for each touchscreen.
8. Turn off the Power Isolator switches mounted on the front of the network and
workstation control enclosures.
Power Isolator switches remove power from the tool

controllers, Ethernet switches, and touchscreens.
9. Open the front cover of the Azonix touchscreen (see Azonix documentation for more
detailed instructions):
 Loosen the two thumbscrews located on the right side of the touchscreen.
 Remove the cover.
10. Press the Eject button located next to the CompactFlash card.
11. Pull the exposed end of the CompactFlash card to remove it from the touchscreen
computer.
Do not insert the CompactFlash card yet.
12. With the computer’s card reader empty, open a command prompt window (Start -->
Run), then navigate to the directory where the dd utility is located.
To determine which storage devices are available, type: dd --list, then press
<Return>. Make note of the displayed list.
3-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 3-4 of 16
13. Insert the CompactFlash card into the computer’s card reader.
It may take a moment for the computer to recognize the new hardware.
14. From a command prompt window, type: dd --list, then press <Return> to
ensure that the new CompactFlash card is now listed (the CompactFlash card will
be the item not previously listed after following step 12).
15. Type the command shown below to copy the contents of the CompactFlash to the
image file. For example, if the name of the image file is “HMI_CF.img,” type:
dd if=\\?\Device\Harddisk1\Partition0 of=HMI_CF.img
The “if” parameter specifies the device that you are reading from, and the “of”
parameter specifies the image file to which you are writing.
Do not write data to Harddisk0, as you may overwrite

the hard drive of your computer.
The “dd” utility process takes a few minutes to complete. After a successful copy, the
number of records in and records out displays.
16. Use the Safely Remove Hardware procedure from the Windows operating system
to safely remove the CompactFlash card from the computer.
17. Insert the CompactFlash card to the touchscreen computer, then power up.
Restoring a Disk Image

1. Follow step 3 through step 14 above (section titled "Creating a Disk Image" on page
3-3).
2. Type the command shown below to copy the contents of the disk image to the
CompactFlash card (assuming the name of the image file is “HMI_CF.img”):
dd if=HMI_CF.img of=\\?\Device\Harddisk1\Partition0
The “if” parameter specifies the device that you are reading from, and the “of”
parameter specifies the image file that you are writing to.
Do not write data to Harddisk0, as you may overwrite

the hard drive of your computer.
The “dd” utility process takes a few minutes to complete. After a successful copy, the
number of records in and records out displays.
3. Use the Safely Remove Hardware procedure from the Windows operating system
to safely remove the CompactFlash card from the computer.
4. Insert the CompactFlash card to the touchscreen computer, then power up.
3-4
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 3-5 of 16
Assigning IP Addresses to Wago Remote I/Os

1. Obtain the MAC address from the Wago® Fieldbus coupler.
The address is located on the sticker attached to the bus

coupler near the RJ-45 socket, or can also be found
printed on the top of the coupler’s right panel.
2. Install the coupler, but do not energize.

3. Connect a laptop computer that has Wago BoopP Server software installed to a
spare network port.
4. Set the computer’s IP address to 192.168.31.xxx (where xxx is an IP address not
currently used on the network).
Consult the rig’s IP assignment list located on the rig-specific Amphion network
topology engineering drawing to identify used IP addresses.
5. Launch BoopP Server on the laptop.
6. Click Edit Bootptab.
A Notepad file appears. A sample data line for setting up a switch displays at the
end of the file.
7. If you have not already done so, copy and paste this line into a new line at the end of
the file.
You can enter data for more than one head module at the
same time, however each module requires its own line.
8. As you enter the data, ensure that you do not change anything other than the
required data. Punctuation is crucial to properly loading the data. Syntax errors or
changes could result in failure to retain the data.
9. Change the name (example displays “hamburg”) to something that appropriately
describes the I/O you are setting up (for example, WAGOMTC1IO).
10. In the field labeled ha=, type the MAC address of the I/O unit you are setting up.
This address is unique to that head module.
11. In the field labeled ip=, type the appropriate IP address you wish to assign.
12. If you are setting up more than one module, add as many data lines as necessary,
repeating step 9 - 11, using appropriate data for each module.
13. Click File --> Save, then click File --> Exit to save and close the Notepad file.
14. Disconnect the network cable from each head module you were setting up.
15. In BootP Server, click Start, then reconnect the network cables to the head
modules.
3-5
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 3-6 of 16
After a few moments a message appears, indicating that the software has located
the head module, and has set the address.
16. Click Stop.
17. Using either the laptop or the DWS computer, launch Microsoft® Internet Explorer.
18. Type the IP address of the remote I/O module into the browser’s address bar, then
press <Enter>.
The following screen appears.
19. Click the Port link on the left side of the screen.
20. When the login prompt, type admin into the space provided for the user name
21. Type wago into the space provided for the password.
3-6
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 3-7 of 16
22. Click to deselect the BootP check box, then click Submit to refresh the screen.
3-7
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 3-8 of 16
RigSense™
Overview
See section titled "VChannel Configuration Example" on

page 3-9 for a rig-specific channel list. See RigSense
documentation for more detailed information.
time- or depth-based format. Service companies that require realtime drilling data, such as hole
depth and bit position, can connect to RigSense with a serial cable and receive a well site
information transfer specification (WITS) stream containing the required data (see section titled
"Serial WITS” below).
Both the company man and the tool pusher can use RigSense to monitor drilling operations. By
setting local alarms on the RigSense PC client, the system can generate alerts when drilling
parameters exceed or fall below acceptable limits. RigSense data is also displayed on a
touchscreen mounted in the driller’s workstation.

S-DAQ gathers data from rig sensors and equipment. Drilling parameters are displayed in real
time, in both analog and digital formats. Each channel can be configured with alarm functions. S-
DAQ can apply algorithms to the data, then forward the information to applications such as
RigSense™. S-DAQ and RigSense communicate using Ethernet.
See section titled "Typical S-DAQ Parameters" on page 3-14.
See NOV document number D250000-0401-OPM-0001, titled “S-DAQ Simple Data Acquisition
System.” Also see the MD Totco® RigSense manual for more information.
System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™)

V-DAQ performs the same functions as S-DAQ and has the same capabilities, but provides a much
greater depth of information and detail. While S-DAQ is intended to be used with RigSense rental
equipment, V-DAQ is intended to be a permanent part of a rig installation.
The V-DAQ module is a tool controller in the multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinet located in the drill
floor local electric room (LER).
See section titled "VChannel Configuration Example" on page 3-9.
See MD Totco document number 42TM62-20, titled “V-DAQ System V Data Acquisition User’s
Manual” for more information. Also See the MD Totco® RigSense manual.
3-8
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 3-9 of 16
Serial WITS
Hardware and Network Interface

The RigSense system consists of an application server and one or more desktop client computers.
The application server is a stand-alone desktop PC, also referred to as the APPSVR computer
(APPSVR is the name assigned during RigSense software installation). RigSense client
computers provide information-only access to the drilling data available on the APPSVR computer.
The RigSense client computer connects to the RigSense server through a small Ethernet switch.
The Ethernet switch connects to the Amphion main network control enclosure via fiber optic cable.
See RigSense documentation provided with the system for more detailed information.
VChannel Configuration Example

The V-DAQ Ch column contains the channel numbers from the V-DAQ. A zero represents an
internal channel within RigSense.
V-DAQ Lower Upper

Channel Name Units Ch Archive Scale Scale DM Type (ascii)
Acc Drl Stks Strokes 82 Yes 0.00 999999.00 ACC_DRILL_STRKS
Acc Fll Stks Strokes 80 Yes 0.00 999999.00 ACC_FILL_STRKS
Accum Trip In BBls 218 Yes 0.00 100.00 ACCUM_TRIP_IN
Accum Trip Out BBls 219 Yes 0.00 100.00 ACCUM_TRIP_OUT
Alarm Horn 1=Alarm 300 Yes 0.00 1.00 HORN_CONTROL
Aver ROP Ft/Hr 152 Yes 0.00 600.00 AVERAGE_ROP
Avg ROP #1 Ft/Hr 313 Yes 0.00 600.00 TIMER_ROP
Avg ROP #2 Ft/Hr 316 Yes 0.00 600.00 TIMER_ROP2
Avg ROP #3 Ft/Hr 319 Yes 0.00 600.00 TIMER_ROP3
BHA Length Feet 120 Yes 0.00 4000.00 BHA_LENGTH
Bit Bounce Feet 99 No 0.00 10.00 BIT_BOUNCE
Bit Position Ft 117 Yes 0.00 40000.00 BIT_POSITION
Bit Status Off/On 115 Yes 0.00 1.00 BIT_STATUS
Bit Time Hours 138 Yes 0.00 1000.00 BIT_TIME
Bit TVD Ft 0 Yes 0.00 40000.00 BIT_TVD
Bit Weight KLbs 123 Yes 0.00 1000.00 BIT_WEIGHT
Block Height Feet 50 Yes 0.00 150.00 BLOCK_HEIGHT
Cement Press1 PSI 0 Yes 0.00 15000.00 CEMENT_PRESSURE
Cement Press2 PSI 0 Yes 0.00 15000.00 BLK_VEL_DN_ALARM
Choke Posn1 % Open 29 No 0.00 100.00 CHOKE_POSN
Choke Posn2 % Open 64 No 0.00 100.00 CHOKE_POSN2
Choke Press1 PSI 0 Yes 0.00 15000.00 BLK_SPARE_3
3-9
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 3-10 of 16
V-DAQ Lower Upper

Choke Press2 PSI 0 Yes 0.00 15000.00 BLK_SPARE_4
Cut and Slip TonMiles 321 Yes 0.00 500.00 TON_MILE
Cut and Slip Ref Time 0 No 0.00 100.00 TON_MILE_REF
Daily Accum Wear TonMiles 0 No 0.00 500.00 DAILY_TON_MILE
DAILY_TON_MILE_RE
Daily Line Wear Ref Time 0 No 0.00 100.00
F
Derrick Cert Ref Time 0 No 0.00 100.00 TON_MILE_REF2
Derrick Certified TonMiles 323 Yes 0.00 500.00 TON_MILE2
Diff Press PSI 68 Yes -500.00 500.00 DIFF_PRESS
ROTARY_TORQUE_Q
Display Rot Torque State 212 No 0.00 10.00
FLAG
Display WOB State 211 No 0.00 10.00 BIT_WEIGHT_QFLAG
Dogleg Severity Deg/100ft 0 No 0.00 100.00 DOGLEG_SEVERITY
DRILL_FLOOR_LEVE
Drill Fl Lev Feet 136 No 0.00 40000.00
L
Drl Bit Size Inches 216 Yes 0.00 100.00 DRL_BIT_SIZE
EDMS Counts Counts 149 No -99999.00 999999.00 EDMS_COUNTS
Elev Offset Feet 107 No 0.00 150.00 ELEV_OFFSET
Elevator Lev Feet 103 No 0.00 150.00 ELEVATOR_LEV
Encoder Type Type 0 No 0.00 100.00 ENCODER_TYPE
Fill Strokes Strokes 79 Yes 0.00 999999.00 FILL_STROKES
Flow Deviation Percent 220 Yes -20.00 20.00 FLOW_DEVIATION
Flow In GPM 182 Yes 0.00 2400.00 FLOW_IN
PERCENT_TO_RATE_
Flow Out Cal CalFact 185 No 0.00 100.00
CAL
Flow Out GPM GPM 186 No 0.00 2400.00 FLOW_OUT_GPM
Gain Loss BBls 84 Yes -10.00 10.00 GAIN_LOSS
Hole Depth Ft 121 Yes 0.00 40000.00 HOLE_DEPTH
Hook Load KLbs 1 Yes 0.00 1000.00 HOOK_LOAD
Kelly Dwn Len Feet 100 No 0.00 150.00 KELLY_DWN_LEN
Kelly Hooked No/Yes 108 No 0.00 1.00 KELLY_HOOKED
Kelly Offset Feet 106 No 0.00 150.00 KELLY_OFFSET
Kelly Press PSI 158 No 0.00 500.00 KELLY_HOOKED3
Kelly Rig No/Yes 145 No 0.00 1.00 KELLY_HOOKED2
Last 24Hr Wear TonMiles 0 No 0.00 500.00 TON_MILE_24HR
Line Replaced TonMiles 325 Yes 0.00 500.00 TON_MILE3
Line Replaced Ref Time 0 No 0.00 100.00 TON_MILE_REF3
Lines Strung Lines 133 Yes 0.00 18.00 LINES_STRUNG
Lst Elem Len Feet 105 Yes 0.00 150.00 LST_ELEM_LEN
Lst Jnt Time Minutes 111 Yes 0.00 999999.00 LST_JNT_TIME
3-10
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 3-11 of 16
V-DAQ Lower Upper

Mud Dens In PPG 27 Yes 8.30 25.00 MUD_WEIGHT_IN
Mud Dens Out PPG 28 Yes 8.30 25.00 MUD_WEIGHT_OUT
Mud Pit 1 BBls 10 Yes 0.00 100.00 PIT_VOLUME
Mud Pit 2 BBls 11 Yes 0.00 100.00 PIT_VOLUME2
Mud Temp In Deg F 25 Yes 0.00 212.00 MUD_TEMP_IN
Mud Temp Out Deg F 26 Yes 0.00 212.00 MUD_TEMP_OUT
Mud Volume BBls 83 Yes 0.00 1000.00 MUD_VOLUME
Nom Elev Lev Feet 104 No 0.00 150.00 NOM_ELEV_LEV
Off Bot Pres PSI 66 No 0.00 15000.00 OFF_BOTTOM_PRES
On Bot Press PSI 67 No 0.00 15000.00 ON_BOTTOM_PRES
Pipe ID Inches 170 Yes 0.00 100.00 PIPE_ID
Pipe Len Chng 1=Changed 154 No 0.00 1.00 PIPE_LEN_CHNG
Pipe OD Inches 169 Yes 0.00 100.00 PIPE_OD
Pit 1 Jumps Jumps 252 Yes 0.00 999999.00 PIT_JUMPS
Pit 2 Jumps Jumps 253 Yes 0.00 999999.00 PIT_JUMPS2
DAILY_TON_MILE_PR
Prev Day Wear TonMiles 0 No 0.00 500.00
EV
Pump 1 Disp Gals/Stk 176 Yes 0.00 100.00 PUMP_DISP
Pump 1 Eff Percent 179 Yes 0.00 100.00 PUMP_EFF
Pump 1 SPM SPM 54 Yes 0.00 200.00 PUMP_SPM
Pump 1 Strks Strokes 55 Yes 0.00 999999.00 PUMP_STRKS
Pump 2 Disp Gals/Stk 177 Yes 0.00 100.00 PUMP_DISP2
Pump 2 Eff Percent 180 Yes 0.00 100.00 PUMP_EFF2
Pump 2 SPM SPM 56 Yes 0.00 200.00 PUMP_SPM2
Pump 2 Strks Strokes 57 Yes 0.00 999999.00 PUMP_STRKS2
Pump 3 Disp Gals/Stk 178 Yes 0.00 100.00 PUMP_DISP3
Pump 3 Eff Percent 181 Yes 0.00 100.00 PUMP_EFF3
Pump 3 SPM SPM 58 Yes 0.00 200.00 PUMP_SPM3
Pump 3 Strks Strokes 59 Yes 0.00 999999.00 PUMP_STRKS3
Pump Liner 1 in 0 No 0.00 100.00 PUMP_LINER_SIZE
Pump Liner 2 in 0 No 0.00 100.00 PUMP_LINER_SIZE2
3-11
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 3-12 of 16
V-DAQ Lower Upper

Pump Liner 3 in 0 No 0.00 100.00 PUMP_LINER_SIZE3
Pump Strk Len 1 in 0 No 0.00 100.00 PUMP_STROKE_LEN
PUMP_STROKE_LEN
Pump Strk Len 2 in 0 No 0.00 100.00
2
PUMP_STROKE_LEN
Pump Strk Len 3 in 0 No 0.00 100.00
3
Pump Type 1 Type 0 No 0.00 100.00 PUMP_TYPE
Pump Type 2 Type 0 No 0.00 100.00 PUMP_TYPE2
Pump Type 3 Type 0 No 0.00 100.00 PUMP_TYPE3
QL_SAMPLE_DISP_M
QL Display Mode 0 No 0.00 100.00
ODE
QL_SAMPLE_GRID_S
QL Grid Start Ft 0 No 0.00 600.00
TART_DEPTH
QL_LAG_DELAY_TIM
QL Lag Delay Time Minutes 0 No 0.00 600.00
E
QL_SAMPLE_LEAD_T
QL Lead Time Minutes 0 No 0.00 100.00
IME
QL_SAMPLE_DISP_S
QL Message Status 0 No 0.00 100.00
TATUS
QL Ret Depth Feet 0 No 0.00 100.00 QL_RET_DEPTH
QL_SAMPLE_INTERV
QL Sample Interval Feet 0 No 0.00 100.00
AL
QL Sample Mode 0 No 0.00 100.00 QL_SAMPLE_MODE
QL_SAMPLE_START_
QL Start Depth Feet 0 No 0.00 600.00
DEPTH
QL Status 0 No 0.00 100.00 QL_STATUS
QL Stks Bt Up Strokes 0 No 0.00 100.00 QL_STKS_BT_UP
QL Stks To Surface Strokes 0 No 0.00 3000.00 QL_STKS_TO_SURF
QL Tm To Surf Minutes 0 No 0.00 100.00 QL_TM_TO_SURF
Ref Hkld KLbs 135 No 0.00 500.00 REF_HKLD
Rem G/L Alrm 1=Alarm 303 Yes 0.00 1.00 ALARM_RESPONSE
Rem G/L Hi BBls 301 Yes 0.00 100.00 HI_SETPOINT
Rem G/L Lo BBls 302 Yes 0.00 100.00 LO_SETPOINT
FLOW_OUT_PERCEN
Return Flow Percent 7 Yes 0.00 100.00
T
Rig Activity D/S/TO/TI 139 Yes 0.00 4.00 RIG_ACTIVITY
ROP Ft/Hr 150 Yes 0.00 600.00 ROP_FT_HOUR
TIMER_ROP_REF_DE
ROP #1 Ref Depth Feet 0 No 0.00 40000.00
PTH
TIMER_ROP_REF_TI
ROP #1 Ref Time Seconds 0 No 0.00 100.00
ME
TIMER_ROP_REF_DE
PTH2
3-12
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 3-13 of 16
V-DAQ Lower Upper

TIMER_ROP_REF_TI
ME2
TIMER_ROP_REF_DE
PTH3
TIMER_ROP_REF_TI
ME3
ROP Min/Ft Min/Ft 151 Yes 0.00 600.00 ROP_MIN_FT
Rotary Level Feet 137 No 0.00 10000.00 ROTARY_LEVEL
Rotary RPM RPM 51 No 0.00 300.00 ROTARY_RPM
Rotary Torq Ft-Lbs 3 No 0.00 60000.00 ROTARY_TORQUE
Run Jnt Time Minutes 110 Yes 0.00 999999.00 RUN_JNT_TIME
Sect One Len Feet 118 No 0.00 40000.00 SECT_ONE_LEN
Sect Two Len Feet 119 No 0.00 40000.00 SECT_TWO_LEN
Slip Status Out/In 101 Yes 0.00 4.00 SLIP_STATUS
Slip Switch Man/Auto 160 Yes 0.00 2.00 FORCE_OFF_SLIPS
SPipe Press PSI 36 Yes 0.00 15000.00 PUMP_PRESSURE
SPipe Press1 PSI 2 Yes 0.00 15000.00 BLK_SPARE_1
SPipe Press2 PSI 69 Yes 0.00 15000.00 BLK_SPARE_2
Start Trip TonMiles 327 Yes 0.00 500.00 TON_MILE4
Start Trip Ref Time 0 No 0.00 100.00 TON_MILE_REF4
String Len Feet 153 Yes 0.00 40000.00 STRING_LEN
String Speed Ft/Min 113 Yes 0.00 1000.00 STRING_SPEED
Time on Slip Minutes 109 Yes 0.00 999999.00 TIME_ON_SLIP
Tong Torque Ft-Lbs 35 Yes 0.00 100000.00 TONG_TORQUE
Tool Jnt Offs Feet 157 No 0.00 150.00 TOOL_JNT_OFFS
Top Drv Conn No/Yes 156 No 0.00 1.00 TOP_DRV_CONN
Top Drv Offs Feet 155 No 0.00 150.00 TOP_DRV_OFFS
Top Drv RPM RPM 6 Yes 0.00 400.00 TOP_DRV_RPM
Top Drv Torq Ft-Lbs 5 Yes 0.00 60000.00 TOP_DRV_TORQUE
Tot Flow In GPM 184 Yes 0.00 2400.00 TOT_FLOW_IN
Total Gas Units 8 Yes 0.00 5000.00 TOTAL_GAS
Total SPM SPM 77 Yes 0.00 600.00 TOTAL_SPM
Total Strks Strokes 78 Yes 0.00 999999.00 TOTAL_STRKS
Trig Hkld KLbs 134 No 0.00 100.00 TRIG_HKLD
Trip Tank BBls 22 Yes 0.00 50.00 TRIP_TANK
Trip Tank GL BBls 87 Yes -100.00 100.00 TRIP_TANK_GL
Trip Tot Vol BBls 86 Yes 0.00 100.00 TRIP_TOT_VOL
True Vert Depth Ft 0 No 0.00 40000.00 TVD
3-13
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 3-14 of 16
Spare Channel List (Unused):

 Ann Pressure
 Mud Pit 11
 Mud Pit 12
 WireLn Count
 WireLn Speed
Typical S-DAQ Parameters
SDAQ Function Data Type Displayed Alarms Profibus DP1 Tag Name OPC Tag
Name
Top Drive RPM Integer Yes Yes TopDriveRPM TBD

Top Drive Torque Integer Yes Yes TopDriveTorque TBD
Rotary Table RPM Integer Yes Yes RotaryTableRPM TBD
Rotary Table Torque Integer Yes Yes RotaryTableToque TBD
Tong Line Pull Integer Yes Yes TongLinePull TBD
Hook Load Integer Yes Yes HookLoad TBD
Standpipe Pressure Integer Yes Yes StandpipePressure TBD
Mud Pump 1 SPM Integer Yes Yes MudPump1SPM TBD
Mud Pump 2 SPM Integer Yes Yes MudPump2SPM TBD
Mud Pump 1 Strokes Integer Yes Yes MudPump1Strokes TBD
Mud Pump 2 Strokes Integer Yes Yes MudPump2Strokes TBD
Total Strokes Integer Yes Yes TotalStrokes TBD
Weight On Bit Integer Yes Yes HookLoadWeightOnBit TBD
Purge Loss Alarm Digital Yes Yes Purge TBD
Brake Cooling Alarm Digital Yes Yes BrakeCooling TBD
Mud Return Flow Integer No No MudRetureFlow TBD
Trip Tank Integer No No TripTank TBD
Mud Level #1 (Shaker A) Integer No No MudLevel1 TBD
Mud Level #2 (Shaker B) Integer No No MudLevel2 TBD
Mud Level #3 (Shaker C) Integer No No MudLevel3 TBD
Mud Level #4 (Shaker D) Integer No No MudLevel4 TBD
Mud Level #5 (Suction A) Integer No No MudLevel5 TBD
Mud Level #6 (Suction B) Integer No No MudLevel6 TBD
Mud Level #7 (Suction C) Integer No No MudLevel7 TBD
Mud Level #8 (Suction D) Integer No No MudLevel8 TBD
Double
Block High Counter No No BlockHighCounter TBD
Integer
3-14
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 3-15 of 16
Tool Controller Web-Based Interface

The tool controller web-based interface displays tool controller information that can be used for
diagnostic purposes. Web pages associated with each tool are stored within its own dedicated tool
controller. Technicians can communicate with any tool controller by connecting a computer to the
drilling control network and typing the tool controller’s unique IP address into a web browser’s
address field, or by selecting the appropriate tool from the main tool controller web page.
See Chapter 6, titled "Tool Controllers” for an overview of

the interface.
See Chapter 8, titled "Troubleshooting and Maintenance”

for more detailed diagnostic information.
Installing Third-Party Software

In some cases, NOV may authorize third-party software updates.
In most instances, install software using the disk image.

See section titled "Backup Disk Imaging" on page 3-2.
 Obtain approval from NOV before installing software.

 Follow appropriate lockout procedures.
 Follow the software manufacturer’s installation instructions.
 Create a new disk image for each affected computer.
3-15
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 3-16 of 16
3-16
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 03
Operator Workstations 4
The workstation and control panels in this section are

presented as standard, and may or may not be modified
during the commissioning process by National Oilwell
Varco (NOV) or third-party vendors.
Normally located in the driller’s cabin, the operator workstations are the user's interface to the
control network and tools.
See Chapter 5, titled "Multi-Tool Controller Cabinet” for network connection overview and
communication information. See the following engineering drawings for rig-specific information:
 Driller’s workstation General Arrangement
 Workstation Electrical Connection Diagram
 Drilling Control Network System Topology
 Amphion Cable Schedule
 Interconnect Diagram
 Amphion MTC Cabinet Assembly
 Amphion MTC Electrical Connection Diagram
4-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
4 Operator Workstations Revision 03
Page 4-2 of 10
Flex™ Workstation
4-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 03
Page 4-3 of 10
Front-Entry Chair (FEC™) Workstation
4-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 4-4 of 10
Wrap-Around™ Workstation
500 550
400 450 600
350 650
300 700
250 750
200 800
150 850
100 900
TONG SCALE HOOK LOAD
50 X 1000 LB
O
LCD WEIGHT ON BIT 1000
X 1000 LB
4-4
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 03
Page 4-5 of 10
Touchscreens
All workstations contain self-contained touchscreens (sometimes referred to as an HMI, or a
human-machine interface). They display tool control, drilling operation, alarm, and status
information pertinent to the activity being performed, allowing the operator to concentrate on the
job at hand without the distraction of extraneous data. All touchscreens have access to any tool
controller connected to the network.
For additional information, see:
 Chapter 3, titled "Computers and Software”
 NOV Amphion user’s manual
 Touchscreen documentation
4-5
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 4-6 of 10
Control Panels and Joysticks
See the NOV Amphion user’s manual for rig-specific

control panels and joysticks.
Discrete switch controls are dedicated to frequently-used operations (such as opening and closing
the roughneck jaws). Joysticks are used for tools that require controlled movement.
Left Control Panel & Joystick Examples
POW
ER SL
OPEN IPS
CLOS
E
4-6
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 03
Page 4-7 of 10
MUD
P
E-ST UMP
OP
PUS
H TO
STO
P
#2 T
HRO M
TTL
E U
#1 T D
HRO
TTL
E
P
#4 T
HRO
U
TTL M
E
#3 T P
HRO
TTL
E S
DRIL
L
TILT
TDS
LINK
FLO
AT
OPE
N TDS
CLO LINK
SE
OPE
N
CLO
SE
TDS
ELE
VAT
OR
R AC
KER
JAW
OFF
/AUT
O
ON
DRA
W
OVE WORKS
RRID
E
PAR
K ING
BRA
KE
DOL
LY E
NAB
LE
SLIP
S EN
ABL
E
OPE
N
CLO
SE
IBOP
4-7
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 4-8 of 10
Right Control Panel & Joystick Examples
Dead man
switch
Drawworks
or racker
joystick
Open Slips Upper

Lower
Close Slips Lower
Dead man Hoist

switch
Dead man
switch
Lower +Y
+X
-X
-Y
Hoist
Drawworks Racker
4-8
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 03
Page 4-9 of 10
OOR
L FL
DRIL IPMENT
EQ U
OP
E-ST
P
STO
H TO
PUS
RPM
TDS
L
TOO IP
H
ERS
OWN SE ALL
E L E A
R
SE/
ZMS CLO K
E L OC
RRID N/
OVE OPE
EAS
E AUTO
INCR
AS E
DECRE
LOW
LIC F
RAU ALVE
HYD V
CMC UT OFF
SH
AIR
KING E C LO
SE
WOR R
CMC PRESSU
N
APV OPE
MAIN
CMC VE
VAL
PU LL
PAY
EAD
CATH
4-9
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 4-10 of 10
The right control panel normally contains the emergency stop button (also referred to as a drill
floor shutdown switch).
Unless the override is engaged, certain types of joysticks require that the trigger (also referred to
as a “dead man switch”) mounted on the front of the joystick be depressed in order to operate the
equipment (such as the drawworks or the racker).
See the Workstation Electrical Connections engineering

drawing for rig-specific information.
4-10
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Multi-Tool Controller Cabinet 5
Control Overview Example

The multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinet houses the workstation and network control components,
and is located in the drill floor local electrical room (LER).
MTC cabinet
Async Modem
Network Power Sys & MP Gateway 6
switch 3 Racker (VCR) 7
Auxiliary 2
Power slips
Spare
Cathead
Spare
V-DAQ 4 1
Network Drawworks 5
switch 2
5
2
6
4 9
7
MTC I/O
Network Driller's Workstation 9

switch 1 MTC Touchscreen 5
Top Drive System 1
V-DAQ Drill floor

remote I/O shutdown
Electronic
weight
indicator
HMI 2
Remote I/O HMI 3
HMI 1
Network
switch 2
M&I control cabinets Network

switch 1
network switches
5-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
5 Multi-Tool Controller Cabinet Revision 04
Page 5-2 of 6
Network Switches
The MTC cabinet contains redundant network switches developed particularly for use in industrial
environments.
The network switches allow construction of switched Ethernet networks that conform to the IEEE
802 and 802.3u standard using copper wire or optical fiber in a ring topology.
Switches are mounted by snapping them onto a standard DIN rail.
Communication Protocol
The Amphion™ network architecture uses copper and fiber optic media to carry information. A
variety of communication protocols are used, as described in this section.
Ethernet
Physical network/data link layer protocols are 100-MB Ethernet for most PC and tool controller
nodes.
TCP/IP is normally used in instances where the Ethernet communication is routed through a
network switch.
Category 5 (CAT-5) copper cable is normally used for devices located within close proximity to one
another (housed in the same or adjoining cabinets). 62.5/125-micron, multi-mode glass fiber optic
cable is normally used for longer distances.
Process Field BUS (Profibus)

The Amphion network typically uses Profibus DP communication. Profibus communication
protocol is an international standard for communication between tool controllers, remote I/Os,
drives, valves, operator interfaces, and computers. Profibus supports communication speeds up to
12M baud over twisted-pair copper or fiber optic cable.
Application layer interface/communication protocols for Profibus DP are between tool controllers
and remote I/Os.
RS232
The RigSense™ application server supports serial WITS connections from the system's built-in
COM ports. Up to 2 WITS feeds are supported. The data is sent to the mud logger, Measurement
While Drilling (MWD) system, and others as needed.
5-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 5-3 of 6
Multi-tool Controller Cabinet Example
Power supplies 1 & 2
PROFIBUS connections
and 7 Tool controllers
Flash card
Network switches
OLMs and remote I/Os
Inside Back Panel
Circuit breakers 1 - 10 UPS terminations
Circuit breakers 11 - 20
Power supplies 3 & 4 Asynchronus modem
Tool terminations
Power distribution terminations Inside Right Panel
2 rig and 1 UPS A/B

Touchscreen Ethernet fast connect
power switches
Keyboard
Fiber patch panel
Power distribution terminations

Inside Left Door Inside Right Door
Electromagnetic interference filters
Rig and
Inside Left Panel UPS terminations
5-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 5-4 of 6
Connection Examples
From To Communication
Workstation Emergency Stop (drill
Emergency stop controller Dedicated circuit
floor shutdown)
MTC Network switch 1 MTC remote I/O Copper Ethernet
Operator workstation tool controller Copper Ethernet
MTC touchscreen Copper Ethernet
Top drive tool controller Copper Ethernet
Operator workstation network switch 2 Fiber Ethernet
MTC network switch 2 Fiber Ethernet
MTC Network switch 2 Network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
V-DAQ tool controller Copper Ethernet
Drawworks tool controller Copper Ethernet
Emergency stop controller Copper Ethernet
V-DAQ remote I/O Copper Ethernet
MTC network switch 3 Fiber Ethernet
MTC Network switch 3 MTC Network switch 2 Fiber Ethernet
Asynchronous modem Copper Ethernet
Power system & Mud pump gateway Copper Ethernet
Racker tool controller Copper Ethernet
Auxiliary tool controller Copper Ethernet
M&I VFD cabinet network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
VFD Cabinet network switch 1 MTC Network switch 3 Fiber Ethernet
VFD #3 (top drive motor/drawworks
motor A) Copper Ethernet
M&I VFD Cabinet network switch 2 Fiber Ethernet
VFD cabinet network switch 2 VFD cabinet network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
VFD #2 (top drive motor/drawworks
motor A) Copper Ethernet
VFD #1 (drawworks motor B) Copper Ethernet
Drill floor MCC network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
Drill floor MCC network switch 1 Drill floor MCC remote I/O Copper Ethernet
Enclosure network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
VFD #9/Mud pump 3B Copper Ethernet
VFD #5/Mud pump 3A Copper Ethernet
Enclosure network switch 1
Emergency generator Copper Ethernet
Enclosure network switch 2 Enclosure network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
Generator 4 Copper Ethernet
Power management system Copper Ethernet
5-4
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 5-5 of 6
From To Communication
MCC2 Cabinet network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
MCC2 Cabinet network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
MCC1 Cabinet network switch 1
Mud pump console network switch 1
Fiber Ethernet
Mud pump console network switch 1 Operator workstation network switch 1 Fiber Ethernet
See the following engineering drawings for more detailed

information:
- Amphion System Topology

- MTC Electrical Connection Diagram
- Amphion Interconnect Diagram
- Amphion Cable Schedule
Power Supplies
Two redundant 24-volt DC power supplies provide power via a common bus to most components
inside the MTC. In general, each component has its own circuit breaker to provide maximum
maintenance flexibility.
There are also two 5-volt power supplies dedicated to the Advantech tool controllers, and two 24-
volt power supplies dedicated to the Beckhoff tool controllers that work in parallel to share power
demands. One, however, is sufficient should the other fail.
The multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinet provides power distribution for workstation equipment, and
supports dual, redundant, uninterruptable power supply (UPS) feeds. It is designed for installation
in a safe area, and supports bottom-entry cable penetration.
See rig-specific engineering cabinet assembly diagram

and electrical connection diagram for more detailed
information.
5-5
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 5-6 of 6
5-6
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Tool Controllers 6
Overview
A tool controller is a customized computer used to automate machinery in commercial and
industrial environments. Tool controllers are programmable and contain processors, memory,
communication ports, and other components similar to those found in most computers. Each tool
controller is programmed with the logic required to automate and monitor a specific piece of rig
equipment.
Amphion rigs use National Oilwell Varco (NOV) tool controllers. The term “tool controller” refers to
the entire tool control unit, which consists of the chassis, cover, motherboard, tool control program,
communication cards, and other hardware-related components used to control the tool.
6-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
6 Tool Controllers Revision 04
Page 6-2 of 8
Tool Controller Hardware

The tool controller assembly, located in the control system (MTC) cabinet, is an industrial CPU to
which you can connect using a browser. Two typical tool controllers are shown here.
Advantech™ Tool Controller
COM 1 Power
Ethernet ON
Fuse
status lights (10-Amp/250-Volt)
COM
OFF
LAN F U SE Profibus
status light
E
Ethernet
US
FU
F SE
KEY
MSE BLINKING
RST
Mouse/ GREEN = OK
Power
Keyboard status light
VGA
PWR HDD
COMPACT
Hard disk drive
FLASH status light
Video DP1
Profibus DP1
Compact
Flash card
6-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 6-3 of 8
Tool Controllers 6
Beckhoff™ Tool Controller
CPU status
Profibus status indicators CPU Module
indicator Power status
indicator
Ethernet CX Profibus Scanner

port 1
DRL-DPM-BKF
BECKHOFF BECKHOFF BECKHOFF
BF
ST
BradCommunications
Profibus
Ethernet
port 2
CompactFlash CompactFlash Power

Profibus card insert card eject connections
Power
!
Do not remove the CompactFlash® card before turning off
power. Do not turn off the tool controller while it is
controlling a tool or communicating with other devices on
the network.
 Advantech: Press the Power button on the tool controller to turn it on or off.
 Beckhoff: Press the tool controller’s individual circuit breaker located inside the
MTC cabinet to turn it on or off.
switch.
The Power LEDs display green when the tool controller is on.
6-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 6-4 of 8
CompactFlash® Card
Tool controllers contain a processor and memory, and run a specialized version of the Linux™
operating system. A Java™ Technology program is embedded on a removable device called a
CompactFlash memory card. On the Advantech tool controller, the CompactFlash card is installed
in a slot in the tool controller chassis, secured by a screw-down panel. The Beckhoff tool controller
has a CompactFlash eject button.
The CompactFlash LED (HDD) blinks when the card is in use (information is being read or
written).
Communication Ports
!
Although some tool controllers have keyboard, mouse, and
monitor ports similar to a standard PC, they should not be
used during normal operations.
Connecting directly to the tool controller using the COM1

or the keyboard/mouse and video ports is a non-standard
procedure for this product. To prevent possible equipment
damage, do not experiment with connections.
Ethernet (ENET)
Connects the tool controller to the local area network (LAN).
 Advantech: A green light located near the port displays solid green when
communication is established, and another blinks yellow when the tool controller is
sending or receiving data.
 Beckhoff: LAN 1 or LAN 2 (related to Ethernet ports 1 and 2) displays solid green
when communication is established, and blinks when the tool controller is sending
or receiving data.
Profibus (Process Field Bus)

Profibus is optional. Connects the tool controller to remote I/Os. The Profibus communication
status indicator normally displays green, indicating a ready status. Blinking green indicates that
data is being transmitted or received.
Blinking red LEDs indicate a data exchange error. Steady red indicates a wiring problem, a bus
speed discrepancy, or a node-address conflict. Blinking red and green indicates that the Applicom
card was flashed, but there is no Profibus hardware attached to it.
COM1
Can be used to connect a computer to the tool controller using a a serial cable (Advantech only).
Mouse/Keyboard
PS/2 port that can be used to connect an keyboard or mouse to the tool controller (Advantech
only).
6-4
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 6-5 of 8
Tool Controllers 6
Video
Can be used to connect an SVGA monitor to the tool controller (Advantech only).
Profibus Features
Profibus DP is the software (communication protocol) for connecting multiple industrial devices on
a shared pathway or channel (bus).
Laptop
Ethernet Computer
Hub
Tool Tool Tool

Controller #1 Controller #2 Controller #3
DP1 DP1 DP1
Profibus Profibus Profibus
Sensor Digital Actuator VFD Sensor Digital Actuator Sensor Digital Actuator Encoder
I/O I/O I/O
I/O Devices on Tool #1 I/O Devices on Tool #2 I/O Devices on Tool #3
Profibus features include:

 Ability to connect I/O devices and simple field devices to an automation system
 Flexible communication for peer-to-peer networking and data collection
 High-speed data transfer of small volumes of data between central and peripheral
devices
 High data integrity
 One master can service several slaves
 Several masters can participate on the bus
See a complete description of this protocol at http://www.profibus.com.
6-5
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 6-6 of 8
Tool Controllers and NOV Tools

Ethernet communication is used for network communication, and Profibus DP is used to
communicate between tool controllers and the remote I/Os. Profibus refers to the hardware,
whereas Profibus DP refers to the protocol for connecting multiple industrial devices on a shared
pathway or channel (bus).
One Applicom® communication card installed in some tool controllers provides Profibus
communication with individual tool remote I/Os, when required.
A tool controller may have one Applicom card (master) or no Applicom cards. The card (labeled
DP1) communicates with the remote I/O.
The tool controller program sends read and write commands to the ApplicomIO® interface, which
transfers them through the master Applicom card to the slave (point or node on the tool). If the
program sends a “read” command, the slave responds by sending input back to the tool controller.
If the program sends a “write” command, the slave responds by performing the command.
DP Master DP Slave
Control Program IO_ReadByte...
Input data Input data
Applicom IO® Output data Output data

interface IO_WriteQByte...
6-6
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 6-7 of 8
Tool Controllers 6
Tool Controller Web-Based Interface

The tool controller service pages interface displays tool controller information that can be used for
diagnostic purposes. Web pages associated with each tool are stored within its own tool controller.
Technicians can communicate with any tool controller by connecting a computer to the drilling
control network and typing the tool controller’s unique IP address into a Web browser’s address
field, or by selecting the appropriate tool from the main tool controller Web page.
See NOV document titled “Amphion Tool Controller

Service Pages User’s Manual” for detailed information.
6-7
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 6-8 of 8
6-8
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Startup and Shutdown 7
Startup
1. Turn on the UPS, rig power A, and rig power B switches on the front of the MTC
cabinet.
2. Turn on each touchscreen from the switch located at the rear of each unit. Verify that
the touchscreen begins the Windows start up sequence.
3. Check that power lights are lit on the following components:
 Each tool controller. If a power light is not on, turn on the power switch on the
tool controller.
 Network switches in the MTC cabinet and workstation.
 OLMs
 Remote I/O in the MTC cabinet and workstation.
 24V power supplies in the MTC cabinet and workstation.
4. If desired, turn on the diagnostic workstation (DWS) mounted in the door of the MTC
cabinet using the power switch on the inside of the cabinet door. Verify the
diagnostic workstation (DWS) begins the Windows® startup sequence.
7-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
7 Startup and Shutdown Revision 04
Page 7-2 of 2
Shutdown
Amphion™ components are designed to operate continuously, and only need to be shut down for
maintenance purposes. Shutdown procedures described in this section disable all drilling tools
This procedure should be performed by qualified

personnel only. Ensure that proper lock and tag-out
procedures are followed when working on energized
equipment.
1. Exit all applications on the touchscreens on the DWS, then shut it down using
Microsoft Windows.
2. Turn off all touchscreens.
3. Turn the UPS, rig power A, and rig power B switches on the front of the MTC cabinet
to off.
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)

The UPS is not part of Amphion, and therefore not addressed in this manual. Refer to rig power
electrical schematics for more information about the UPS.
Control Enclosure Power Switches

Amphion power switches are mounted on the front of the MTC cabinet, generally located in the
local electrical room (LER).
Leave all three of these switches (UPS, rig power A, and rig power B) in the On position during
normal operations. Do not turn them off except to perform a complete system shutdown. If repairs
on individual circuits are necessary, shut down only those breakers affecting relevant circuits.
See engineering Connection Diagram drawings.
Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers provide over-current protection and isolation of Amphion components. Breakers
should remain in the On position during normal operations.
7-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Troubleshooting and Maintenance 8
Safety
Read all notes, cautions, and warnings before performing any procedure contained in this chapter.
Failure to adhere to cautions and warnings may result in serious or fatal injury to personnel and
damage to equipment.
National Oilwell Varco® (NOV) will not be held liable for consequences arising from misuse of tools
or equipment. The procedures described in this chapter are intended for trained and qualified
personnel.
Contact NOV regarding issues that extend beyond the scope of this manual.
Basic Diagnostic Steps

 Check for alarms using the operator interface. See the rig-specific NOV Amphion™
user’s manual.”
 Use the I/O Diagnostics screen to view the current status of the most common
information coming from the equipment.
See NOV document number D811001117-MAN-001 titled

“Amphion Tool Controller Service Pages User’s Manual” for
detailed diagnostic information.
Call for technical support only if the previous steps have failed to help you identify the problem.
See the appendix of this manual for NOV service center locations and contact information.
8-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Revision 04
Page 8-2 of 20
Workstation Controls
Joysticks and Discrete Switches
Calibrate joysticks prior to operating equipment using the Amphion™ interface.
Joystick or
discrete switch not
responding. WS = Workstation
TC = Tool Controller
No Is WS TC in No
Is a related Contact NOV with
the MTC
alarm active? information.
running?
Yes Yes
See section titled Open the access panel

"Alarms" in this to view the remote I/O
chapter. indicator lights.
Are I/O lights No Inspect

illuminated? workstation
power cables.
Yes
Verify joystick or
discrete switch remote No
Are cables
I/O is functioning
damaged?
properly using TC
Service Pages.
Yes
No Repair cables or
Is remote I/O contact NOV.
Contact NOV with functioning
information. properly?
Yes
Verify tool remote I/O is

functioning properly
using TC Service
Pages.
No Is remote I/O Yes

Contact NOV with functioning Contact NOV with
information. properly? information.
See section titled "Cable Inspection and Repair" on page 8-4.
8-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-3 of 20
Touchscreens
See section titled "Cleaning a Touchscreen" on page 8-18. See Azonix documentation for
advanced troubleshooting and maintenance procedures.
Alarm Horn
Horn does not

sound.
Is a related No Use a voltmeter

alarm active? to test voltage
at horn.
Yes
See section Is horn Verify the remote I/O

No is functioning
titled "Alarms" in receiving
Amphion user 24V? properly using the
manual. TC Service Pages.
Yes TC = Tool Controller
Replace the Is remote I/O No Contact NOV

horn. functioning with information.
properly?
Yes
Is wiring from No Contact NOV

remote I/O to with information.
horn damaged?
Yes
Replace wiring.
Cables
See "Cable Inspection and Repair” on the next page.
8-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-4 of 20
Cable Inspection and Repair

Before attempting to repair or replace cables, determine the cause of the failure or damage. While
performing the repair, take steps necessary to prevent a recurrence:
 Place shields on exposed cables, or reroute to prevent wear or chafing.
 Use tie wraps to secure cables against unnecessary motion.
Turn off all power before performing maintenance.

Obtain all required permits, and observe applicable
lock-out/tag-out procedures.
Workstation Cable Inspection

1. Close all applications on the touchscreens and exit from Windows®.
2. Disconnect power to the workstation (see Chapter 7, titled "Startup and Shutdown”).
3. Inspect the cables for chafing and missing insulation at the gland plate on the back
of the left console.
4. If the cables are worn or damaged, and require replacement, contact National
Oilwell Varco.
5. Restore power to the workstation.
Fiber Optic Cable Inspection

Perform fiber optic cable continuity test by shining a flashlight or a low-power LED laser into one
end of the cable with the end of the cable pointed at a white card. If a spot of light is visible on the
card, the cable is intact. .
Looking directly into the end of a fiber optic cable can

cause eye damage.
If light is not visible, the cable is damaged, and should be repaired or replaced.
The above procedure does not test performance of the fiber optic cable. It tests only for continuity
between two common ends of the same fiber, and verifies that the cable is not completely severed.
Use a fiber optic cable tester for comparing performance readings at each end of the cable.
Alternatively, test for severity and damage location in long cable runs using an optical time domain
reflectometer (OTDR). Follow instructions provided by the manufacturer of the OTDR.
8-4
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-5 of 20
Fiber Optic Cable Repair

Before attempting to repair a fiber optic cable, determine the cause of the damage and correct the
condition. If the cable was accidentally severed, and the cut is in an accessible location, follow the
procedure for repairing fiber optic cable described below.
If the cable was damaged by stretching, or if the cause of the damage cannot be determined,
replace the entire cable run.
!
Fiber optic cable connections must remain free of
contaminants. Do not unplug the cable unless absolutely
necessary. Fiber optic cable is fragile, and also very sharp
when stripped.
Many different adhesives are available for fiber optic connector assembly. The following
instructions are for UV-cured adhesives. If you are not using a UV-cured type of adhesive, refer to
the instructions included with your adhesive.
1. Ensure that the strain relief boot of the connector is placed correctly on the end of
the cable.
2. Clean the bare fiber using a lint-free cloth, soaked in isopropyl alcohol. Use several
strokes lengthwise.
Do not touch the fiber once it has been cleaned.
3. Hold the needle end of the adhesive syringe upwards and gently depress the
plunger to expel trapped air from the syringe.
A small amount of the adhesive should be visible at the tip of the ceramic ferrule.
4. Holding the connector with the white ceramic ferrule pointed downwards, place the
syringe needle in the connector and fill the cavity with adhesive.
5. Insert the cable into the connector. Seat the cable until it touches the buffer.
When properly assembled, the bare fiber should protrude from the ferrule tip 1/4 to
1/2 inches.
6. Turn the curing oven on and wait for the green light to illuminate.
7. Remove the oven cover and place the cable connector assembly into the slot in the
oven.
The insulated portion of the cable must be on the foam.
8. Replace the oven cover.
9. When the oven beeps, remove the cable and ensure the adhesive is properly cured
(the adhesive is solid, and the connector is firmly attached to the cable).
10. Slide the fiber strain relief boot onto the backside of the connector.
11. Use an ST connector coupler to join the two connectors.
8-5
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-6 of 20
Ethernet Cable Repair

For specific installation and maintenance instructions for Ethernet cable and equipment, refer to
manufacturer’s documentation.
Profibus Cable Inspection

Perform continuity testing at various cable points using a Profibus testing device, such as a BT200
made by Siemens®.
Verify that the termination switch is set to On (for one cable) and Off (for two cables).
If the cable is damaged, the entire cable run should be replaced.
Video (Coaxial) Cable Repair

Video (coaxial) cable can be successfully spliced only by cutting out the damaged section of cable,
attaching cable connectors to the ends, and fitting a replacement section of cable or a barrel
connector (as suitable).
In most instances, the entire cable run should be replaced, especially if the cable is exposed to the
elements or to a dirty environment.
8-6
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-7 of 20
Routine Maintenance
Moxa® Network Switch Setup
This procedure is necessary only if replacing a switch after

the factory acceptance test (FAT).
Properties Setup
1. Using a laptop, click Start --> All Programs -->Accessories -->Communications
--> Hyperterminal, then click the Settings tab.
2. Click to select the following settings (as shown above):

 Function, arrow, and ctrl keys act as: Terminal keys
 Backspace key sends: Ctrl+H
 Emulation: VT100
 Telnet terminal ID: VT100
 Backscroll buffer lines: 500
3. Click Terminal Setup.
8-7
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-8 of 20
4. Click to select the following settings, as shown above:

 Cursor: Underline and Blink
 Terminal Modes: None
 Character set: ASCII
5. Click OK.
6. Click Input Translation.
7. Click to select Shift-JIS (Host System Encoding Method), then click OK.
8. Click ASCII Setup.
8-8
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-9 of 20
9. Adjust the settings as shown above:

 Both checkboxes located beneath ASCII Sending deselected
 Both Line delay and Character delay times set to zero milliseconds
 First two checkboxes located beneath ASCII Receiving deselected.
 Wrap lines that exceed terminal width checkbox located beneath ASCII
Receiving selected
10. Click OK.
11. Click OK again to close the Moxa Properties window.
8-9
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-10 of 20
Hyperterminal Setup
1. Connect the Moxa programming cable (supplied with the Moxa networks switch) to
the serial port of your computer.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the programming port located on the top of the
Moxa network switch (not the Ethernet port located on the front).
3. Press <Enter> or <Return> to display the screen shown below.
8-10
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-11 of 20
4. Ensure that the text located at the top of the screen displays V2.3 (BIOS version).
All Amphion system network switches must use BIOS

version 2.3. If the switch is using any other version (earlier
or later), an update is required.
5. Use the arrow keys to scroll down to item 4, Comm. Redundancy, then press
<Enter>.
8-11
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-12 of 20
6. Press <Enter> again to select Setup.

7. Ensure that the line item titled Protocol of Redundancy is set to Turbo Ring with
ED6008 series, as shown above.
8-12
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-13 of 20
If necessary, press the arrow keys to highlight the setting, then press <Enter> to
display setting options. Use the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate setting, the
press <Enter> again.
8. Ensure that the line item titled Set to be Master is set to No, as shown above.
9. Press <Esc> twice to return to the main menu.
10. Use the arrow keys to highlight item 9, Advanced Settings, then press <Enter>.
8-13
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-14 of 20
11. Use the arrow keys to select Network, then press <Enter>.
12. Ensure that DHCP is set to Disable, as shown above.

8-14
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-15 of 20
13. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IP Address setting, then type the correct IP
address according to the project’s IP address list (see the appendix of this manual
for a complete IP address list).
Use the <Delete> key to remove any characters remaining from the default address.
14. If necessary, use the arrow keys to highlight the Subnet Mask and Default
Gateway settings, then type the correct addresses into the spaces provided.
15. Press <Esc> twice.
16. Press Y to activate the Moxa switch.

8-15
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-16 of 20
17. Press Y again to update the network settings and return to the main menu.
18. Use the arrow keys to highlight and press <Enter> to display items 4 (Comm.
Redundancy) and 9 (Advanced Settings).
Ensure that the settings were saved correctly (see instruction for each, beginning
with step 5 - 14, then return to the main menu.
19. Use the arrow keys to highlight item a, Exit, then press <Enter>.
8-16
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-17 of 20
Disk Imaging
An updated disk image should be maintained for each computer. See Chapter 3, titled
"Computers and Software,” section titled "Backup Disk Imaging" on page 3-2 for detailed disk
imaging procedures.
Network and Workstation Equipment

Perform these procedures regularly to keep equipment in good repair. Task details are in sections
that follow.
Visual inspection of equipment page 8-17

Daily
Clean touchscreens (when powered off) page 8-18
Change enclosure HMI fan filters and inspect enclosure

Every three (3) months covers page 8-18
Annually Inspect workstation cables page 8-4
!
Follow rig lockout procedures when working with enclosure
components.
Certain types of maintenance and repair cannot be

performed while the rig is drilling. Never turn off computers,
servers, or other components while the rig is drilling. The
SCSI shared-resource hard drive should never be turned
off or removed while the servers are running, and should
always be in place and turned on while servers are turned
on.
Visual Inspection of Equipment

 Visually inspect the workstation, joysticks, discrete switches, and touchscreens for
damage.
 Inspect for loose or missing fasteners.
 Inspect the console controls for proper operation and condition.
 Tighten or replace fasteners as necessary.
8-17
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-18 of 20
Cleaning a Touchscreen
Navigate to the Clean Screen window before cleaning.

Failure to do so could result in accidental tool
operation.
1. Navigate the Clean Screen window (using the workstation’s operator interface) on
the touchscreen to be cleaned.
This screen is part of the workstation tool controller; it will inactivate the touchscreen
so that it can be safely cleaned.
2. Use any commercially non-abrasive glass cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
surface of the touchscreen. Be sure to finish cleaning the touchscreen before the
Clean Screen times out and the touchscreen becomes active again.
See Azonix documentation for all other maintenance and troubleshooting issues pertaining to the
touchscreens.
Replacing or Cleaning Air Filters

The 15" Triton SA unit has two (2) Air Media Filters, located on the back of the unit, which should
be replaced or cleaned every three (3) months.
8-18
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page 8-19 of 20
Remove the Filter Media and clean with mild detergent and water.
If Filter Media has holes or shows wear, replace it

immediately.
After the Filter Media has been cleaned or replaced, replace the Filter Media Covers by gently
snapping them back into place.
HMI and Foreign Objects
8-19
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page 8-20 of 20
Cabinets
Ensure that enclosure covers are closed and sealed.
Replace or clean fan filters monthly, or according to manufacturer’s recommended schedule.
Recommended Spare Parts

Each rig, depending on its configuration, has a general recommended spare parts list for a two-
year operational period.
See rig- or product-specific list for the following, as applicable:
 Amphion (Control System)
 RigSense
 Sensors
 V-DAQ or S-DAQ Remote I/O
8-20
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Appendix A
Opening a Command Prompt

1. Plug a keyboard into the touchscreen, then restart the computer if necessary (see
Azonix documentation for location of keyboard port).
2. Close the Amphion™ software application at a touchscreen by pressing the
<Alt+F4> buttons simultaneously to close Microsoft® Internet Explorer.
3. Press <Ctrl+Escape> to display the Windows® Start menu.
4. Use the arrow up or down keys to highlight Run, then press <Enter> to select.
5. Type cmd into the field provided, then press OK.
At the C:> prompt, type a network command (see general descriptions below), then press
<Enter>.
A-1
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/05
D811000238-MAN-001
Page A-2 of 4
Command Descriptions and Syntax

Ping
Use the ping command with a url, IP address, or host name to test network connectivity, or to
verify communication. Use the Use the ping localhost command when both the host name and IP
address are unknown.
Using a URL Address
Using the Host Name
Using the IP Address
A-2
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Revision 04
Page A-3 of 4
Appendix A
Using the Host Name
Ping Command Switch Options
Use the ping command to display a list of command switches.
Syntax example: ping -t 123.45.67.8

IP Config
Use the ipconfig command to determine the domain name server (DNS), IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway assigned to the current computer.
Use the ipconfig /all command to list the IP address, subnet mask address, and other information
for each network card to which the current computer is connected.
Tracert
Use the tracert command and either the url or IP address to display hop information (all network
devices between the your computer and the destination address).
Syntax example: tracert www.nov.com or tracert 123.45.67.8
A-3
www.nov.com
D811000238-MAN-001
Page A-4 of 4
Nslookup
Use the nslookup command and a url address to troubleshoot name resolution issues. Displays
server name and IP address information.
Syntax example: nslookup www.nov.com
A-4
www.nov.com
National Oilwell Varco
Service Center Directory
This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco

information which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, RIG SOLUTIONS
hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited purposes only 11000 Corporate Centre Drive
and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole Houston, TX 77041
or in part, or use of this design or distribution of this
information to others is not permitted without the express
written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to
NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for which
it was loaned. This document and the information
contained and represented herein is the copyrighted
property of NOV.
D811001337-DAS-001 06
www.nov.com
Form D811001123-GEN-001/06
D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
Revision History
06 12.03.2015 Operations update V. Mulhern T. Harmon T. Harmon
05 10.09.2014 Operations update V. Mulhern T. Harmon T. Harmon
04 12.11.2011 Operations update T. Drake S. Sobreira T. Harmon
03 18.01.2011 Operations update T. Drake T. Harmon T. Harmon
02 02.10.2009 Operations update T. Drake T. Harmon P. Williams
01 08.09.2009 First Issue T. Drake T. Harmon P. Williams
Change Description
01 First Issue
02 • Moved Cairo office under North Africa heading.

• Changed address information for India office.
03 • Removed outdated Louisiana contact information.

• Added the new Louisiana service and repair center contact information.
04 • Updated/added Brazil, Canada, Colombia, UK contact information (page 3 through page 7).
• Added North Dakota contact information (page 4).
• Updated the contact information for the China office (page 6).
• Added addresses and contact information for Singapore and India (page 6).
• Updated contact information for NOV Dubai and NOV Abu Dhabi. (page 8).
05 • Updated format.
• Updated Colombia contact information (page 3).
• Added Peru contact information (page 4).
06 • Added contact information for Angola (page 8) and South Africa (page 8) locations.
• Changed Middle East heading to Middle East and Africa (page 8).
www.nov.com
Service Center Directory SC
http://www.nov.com/ContactUs/24HrEmergencyContacts.aspx
Americas
Brazil
National Oilwell Varco do Brasil
Rodovia Amaral Peixoto, s/n KM164,5 - n° 8.500
Imboassica – Macaé – RJ – Brazil
CEP 27925-290
+55 22 2773 0600 (reception)
+55 22 9882 7591 (after hours)
+55 22 9702 8866 (drilling equipment)
+55 22 9974 7056 (PCE / MoComp equipment)
+55 22 9894 6608 (lifting and handling equipment)
+55 22 2773 0635 (repair shop)
+55 22 2773 0675 (inside sales)
+55 22 2123 2452 (tech college)
Canada
NOV Rig Solutions Aftermarket Service, Repair and Rentals (Leduc)
Varco Canada ULC CO 009
6621 – 45 Street
Leduc, Alberta, Canada
T9E 7E3
+1 780 986 1712 (main)
NOV Rig Solutions Spares (Edmonton)
Varco Canada ULC CO 009
7127 – 56 Ave
Edmonton, Alberta, Canada
T6B 3L2
+1 780 801 1800 (main)
+1 780 619 5579 (24 hour on-call)
Colombia
NOV Rental and Service (Bogotá)
National Oilwell Varco de Colombia
Rig Solutions-Top Drive
DDS-Dynamic Drilling Solutions
Centro Empresarial Metropolitano Km 3.4 Costado Norte vía Siberia
Bodega 15 – Modulo 1 Bogotá - Colombia
Main (571) 743 2258
Mobile +571 3168758748
Mobile +571 3102385722
D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
3
www.nov.com
SC Service Center Directory Americas
Peru
NOV Rental and Service
National Oilwell Varco Peru
Rig Solutions-Top Drive
DDS Dynamic Drilling Solutions
Avenida Rivera Navarrete, San Isidro 501 Of.502 Lima, Perú
Office +511 2191160 - 180
Mobile +51 958572058
Mobile 3102385722
USA
Colorado
NOV Service and Repair (Colorado)
420 South Ash St.
Fruita, CO 81521
+1 970 858 4522
+1 281 569 3050 (after hours)
Louisiana
NOV Service and Repair (Covington)
73765 Penn Mill Rd.
Covington, LA 70435
+1 985 892 8216 (direct)
+1 800 722 4425 (toll free)
(Cranes: AmClyde, Unit, OS National, Dreco, Kingpost)
+1 985 871 8609 (service)
+1 985 871 8603 (parts
NOV Service and Repair Center (New Iberia)
5212 Highway 90 Service Road West
New Iberia, Louisiana 70560
(All NOV spare parts; legacy Shaffer, Varco, and NOI equipment)
+1 337 374 1400
Minnesota
NOV Service (St. Paul)
240 East Plato Blvd.
St. Paul, Minnesota 55107
(lifting and handling equipment)
+1 651 293 4745 (service) 
+1 651 293 4776 (service)
+1 651 293 4600 (parts)
+1 651 293 4603 (parts)
North Dakota
NOV Service, Repair, and Spare Parts
3201 1st Avenue W.
Williston, ND 58801
+1 307 473 8888
+1 281 569 3050 (after hours)
4 D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
www.nov.com
Americas Service Center Directory SC
USA
Oklahoma
NOV Service and Repair (Oklahoma City)
7713 North West 3rd St.
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73127
+1 405 495 1000
+1 281 569 3050 (after hours)
Pennsylvania
NOV Service (Pittsburgh)
1349 Saw Mill Run Blvd.
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15226
+1 412 884 1027
+1 281 569 3050 (after hours)
Texas
NOV Service and Repair (Alice)
2351 Energy Avenue
Alice, Texas 78380
+1 361 668 4154
+1 281 569 3050 (after hours)
NOV Service and Repair (Houston)
5100 North Sam Houston Parkway West
Houston, Texas 77086
+1 281 569 3050 (24/7 technical support)
+1 281 569 3051 (eHawk remote support)
Wyoming
NOV Service and Repair (Casper)
1080 North Robertson Road
Casper, Wyoming 82601
+1 307 473 8888
+1 281 569 3050 (after hours)
Venezuela
NOV Rental and Service (Maturin, Monagas)
Varco International de Venezuela
Top Drive Rental and Service
+58 291 651 6489
+58 414 394 2784 (mobile)
+58 291 651 4384 (fax)
D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
5
www.nov.com
SC Service Center Directory
Asia
China
NOV Service
18th Floor, Raffles City Beijing Office Tower
No. 1, Dongzhimen South Street, Dongcheng District
Beijing 100007 P. R. China
+86 139 0121 9392
+86 800 810 5109 (24/7 technical support)
India
NOV Service and Repair
R-619, TTC Industrial Area
Rabale, MIDC
Navi Mumbai – 400 701
Maharashtra, India
+91 22 3916 9700
+91 982 009 1322
+91 983 349 6154 (after hours)
NOV Machining Centre (Pressure Control)
11A/2 (NP) Sidco Industrial Estate
Ambattur
Chennai, Tamil Nadu, India 600098
+91 44 4285 8074
+91 95 0008 4149 (after hours)
Singapore
NOV Service and Repair
29 Tuas Bay Drive
Singapore 637429
+65 6594 1000
+65 6594 1222 (24/7 technical support)
NOV Machining Centre (Pressure Control)
22 Jalan Terusan
Singapore 619299
+65 6265 1900
+65 9128 2545 (after hours)
Europe
France
NOV Service
+33 24 068 3600
+33 24 068 3611
+33 24 068 3600 (after hours)
+33 677 790 943 (after hours)
6 D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
www.nov.com
Europe Service Center Directory SC
Norway
NOV Service (Asker)
Blakstadmarka 26
1386 Asker – Norway
+47 6400 5000
+47 6400 5001 (after hours)
NOV Service (Kristiansand)
Skibaasen 2
4636 Kristiansand – Norway
+47 3819 2000
+47 3819 2482 (after hours)
NOV Service (Molde)
Granfjaera 24
6415 Molde – Norway
+47 7120 2020
+47 9169 9664 (after hours)
NOV Repair (Stavanger)
Dusavik Base
Notberget 46
4029 Stavanger – Norway
+47 5781 8181
NOV Service (Stavanger)
Lagerveien 8
4069 Stavanger – Norway
+47 5181 8181
+47 4140 0041 (after hours)
+47 9511 8181 (24/7 eHawk remote support)
Russia
NOV Service and Support
Russia, 119071, Moscow
Leninsky prosp., 15A, 7th floor
+7 495 287 2601 (direct)
+7 495 981 3470 (fax)
+7 985 410 5272 (mobile)
UK
NOV Service and Repair (Aberdeen/Montrose)
Forties Road
Montrose
Scotland
DD10 9ET
+44 1674 677222
UK after hours, on-call contacts
+44 (0) 7711 415 485 (mechanical)
+44 (0) 7711 415 484 (electrical)
+44 (0) 7739 170 079 (repair workshop)
+44 (0) 7713 643 012 (spare parts)
+44 (0) 7770 325 333 (distribution)
+44 (0) 7801 078 092 (IMO/MD Totco)
D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
7
www.nov.com
Middle East and Africa

Angola
NOV Service and Repair (Angola)
Sonils Oil Service Center
Luanda, Angola
+244 923 426620
Algeria
NOV Service (Algeria)
Overseas Equipment Service Africa
BP 852 Zone Industrielle Algerie
Hassi Messaoud Ouargla
Algeria 30500
+213 29 73 1236
+213 29 75 4105 (fax)
Egypt
NOV Service and Repair (Badr City)
IMPEC (Sea Harvest Company)
Part B, 47 Acer Area
Badr City, Cairo, Egypt
+20 2 231 08001
+20 2 231 08002
+20 2 231 08003 (fax)
Saudi Arabia
NOV Service and Repair (Dammam)
P. O. Box 20754, Al-Khobar 31952
Al Khobar, Saudi Arabia
Gate No. 2, Makkah Street (opposite of Saudi Electricity Company)
Dammam Second Industrial City
Dammam, Saudi Arabia
+966 3 835 3061
+966 3 830 2453 (fax)
South Africa
NOV Service and Repair (Port Elizabeth)
Kendle Street
Neave Township
Port Elizabeth, South Africa
+27 41 451 2416
+27 41 405 1605 (24/7 Technical Support)
8 D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
www.nov.com
Middle East and Africa Service Center Directory SC
UAE
NOV Service and Repair (Abu Dhabi)
Varco Al Mansoori Services LLC
P. O. Box 27011
Abu Dhabi, United Arab Emirates
+971 2 555 2668
+971 2 554 2280 (fax)
+971 2 554 0012 (fax)
+971 50 811 6083 (after hours service)
+971 50 617 1235 (after hours workshop)
NOV Service and Repair (Dubai)
P.O. Box 61490
R/A No.13, Plot MO 0682
Daimler Chrysler Street
Jebel Ali Free Zone
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
+971 4 883 8776
+971 4 883 8795 (fax)
+971 56 686 2184 (after hours service on-call)
D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
9
www.nov.com
This page is intentionally blank.
10 D811001337-DAS-001
Revision 06
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
Spares List/Kit, Electrical or Mechanical - Amphion 10869073-SPL 01

Control Spares List - Auxiliary 10893257-SPL 01
www.nov.com
SPARES LIST/KIT,
ELECTRICAL OR
MECHANICAL
KEPPEL HULL B354
NOTES:
1. 10869073-1
Recommended Commissioning Spares
2. 10869073-2
Recommended Operational Spares
3. 10869073-3
Recommended Insurance Spares
RIG/PLANT NEXT ASSY PRODUCT

10755982-001 AMPHION
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS
This document contains proprietary and confidential information
which belongs to National-Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or National Oilwell Varco
REMARKS subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is 11000 Corporate Centre Drive
loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV.
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or Houston, Texas 77041
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE
distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the Phone + 281-854-0400
express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to Fax + 281-854-0607
NOV upon request and in any event upon completion of the use for
which it was loaned. This document and the information contained
CLIENT PO NUMBER and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
 National Oilwell Varco
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
Client Document Number 10869073-SPL 01
www.nov.com
Document number 10869073-SPL
Revision 01
Page 2
Template Name ORA_SPL_TPL.doc
REVISION HISTORY
01 11/21/2013 Initial Release J. ZAMORA R. GALLEGOS R. GALLEGOS

Rev Date (mm.dd.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 First issue
D7440000254-TPL-001/01
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 3
-1 -2 -3
Recom. Recom. Recom.
Commission Operational Insurance Where Description
Part No. Description Spare Spare Spare Used Where Used
MTC #1
10627483-001 PC,PANEL BASE , - - 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC

TOUCHSCREEN,15’’
10064178-040 MDL,DIGITAL INPUT,4- 1 2 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
CHAN,24VDC
10064178-070 PLC-MOD, END - - 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
MODULE
10064178-088 PC-ETHERNET 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
ADAPTER,TCP/IP,UDP
10652637-001 FLSH CARD, COMPACT , 1 2 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
16 GB
10042793-001 CONN. PROFIBUSDP, W/ 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
PROG PORT
10709901-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 2P, - 1 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
10A, 480VAC
10505225-002 2 PHASE, BUS BAR, 12- - - 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
POLE
10055028-001 KEYBOARD, USB, 119 - - 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
KEY, PANEL MOUNT
10068313-001 PC-ETHERNET/FIBER 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
SW/SERVER,6
10066946-001 PWR SPLY REDUNDANT 1 - 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
MODULE, 40A
10082412-001 PWR SPLY- - - 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
24VDC,20.0A COMPACT
10044673-001 PWR-SPLY REDUNDANT 1 - 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
MODULE 20A
10066792-001 PWR SPLY, SWITCHNG, 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
24V,10A
10055059-001 CABLE ASSY , FO, ST- - - 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
ST, DUPLEX, 7 FEET
10042793-001 PROFIBUS 1 1 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
CONNECTOR
10066970-001 TB-PLUG IN BRIDGES 1 1 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
(10 POSITION)
10066778-001 TB-PLUG IN BRIDGES (2 2 2 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
POSITION)
10066985-001 TB-5.2mm UT-2.5 5 5 5 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
10066667-001 TB-6.2mm UT-4, GRAY 10 10 10 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
10066897-001 TB-6.2mm UT-4, PE 5 5 5 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
D7440000254-TPL-001/01
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 4
10052319-001 TB-END CLAMP, E/NS 35 1 2 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
10125056-001 TB-END BRACKET, NS 1 2 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC

35
10064179-004 TB-C/B,4AMP,THERMAL- 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
MAGNETIC
10064179-006 TB-C/B,1AMP,THERMAL- 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
MAGNETIC
10067365-001 FILTER , EXHAUST, SK, - 2 2 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
EMC SHIELDED
10067364-001 FAN, FILTER, EMC, 220 - 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
VAC
10066030-001 SBC-CONTROLLER - 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
ASSY,BECKHOFF
10068310-001 PWR SPLY-FOR CX1000 - 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
CORE WITH
10053152-001 CABLE ASSY, CAT 5E , 1 1 - 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
ZERO HALOGEN , 10 FT
10055016-001 SWITCH, CAM, DISC, 4P, 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
60A
10067363-001 FAN-PAGODA, 210CFM, - 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
230VAC
10068309-001 CARD-APPLICOM,DP1 1 1 1 10869082-001 Amphion MTC
DRILLERS CHAIR (D.C.)
BARRACUDA 19” Amphion

10663569-001 1 1 1 10869083-001
SA WORKSTATION Driller’s Chair
JOYSTICK, CANBUS, 10869083-001 Amphion
10530152-001 1 1 1
CAP., LH, 50ms Driller’s Chair
JOYSTICK, CANBUS, 10869083-001 Amphion
10530153-001 1 1 1
CAP., RH, 50ms Driller’s Chair
TOGGLE SWITCH; 10869083-001 Amphion
10718593-001 3POS; MOMENTARY 1 1 1 Driller’s Chair
BLK
SW-EM STOP-TURN TO 10869083-001 Amphion
10678980-001 1 1 1
RELEASE (RED) Driller’s Chair
PLC-8PT, 24VDC INPUT 10869083-001 Amphion
10064178-039 1 2 1
MODULE Driller’s Chair
PLC-8PT,24VDC 10869083-001 Amphion
10064178-063 1 1 1
OUTPUT MODULE Driller’s Chair
PC-ETHERNET 10869083-001 Amphion
10064178-088 1 1 1
ADAPTER,TCP/IP,UDP Driller’s Chair
PLC-MODULE;FILTER 10869083-001 Amphion
10064178-104 1 1 1
24V Driller’s Chair
FLSH CARD, COMPACT , 10869083-001 Amphion
10652637-001 1 2 1
16 GB Driller’s Chair
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 2P, 10869083-001 Amphion
10511192-001 - 1 1
4A, 230VAC Driller’s Chair
10511193-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 2P, 10869083-001 Amphion
2 2 2
D7440000254-TPL-001/01
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 5
10511194-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 2P, 10869083-001 Amphion

- 1 1
PC-ETHERNET/FIBER 10869083-001 Amphion
10068313-001 1 1 1
SW/SERVER,6 Driller’s Chair
10869083-001 Amphion
10657324-001 CONTROLLER C2-15 1 1 1
Driller’s Chair
PWR SPLY, SWITCHNG, 10869083-001 Amphion
10066792-001 1 1 1
24V,10A Driller’s Chair
CABLE ASSY, FIBER 10869083-001 Amphion
10052388-001 OPTIC 1 1 1 Driller’s Chair
PWR SPLY, SWITCHNG, 10869083-001 Amphion

10066792-001 1 1 1
24V,10A Driller’s Chair
10869083-001 Amphion
10511223-001 1 1 1
FAN-24V, 22dB, 24.7CFM Driller’s Chair
PLACTIC FAN FILTER 10869083-001 Amphion
10511225-001 1 1 1
ASSEMBLY Driller’s Chair
RIGHT, MAIN ARMREST 10869083-001 Amphion
10638669-001
CUSHION - 1 1 Driller’s Chair
10638674-001 LEFT, MAIN ARMREST 10869083-001 Amphion

- 1 1
CUSHION Driller’s Chair
10869083-001 Amphion
10638674-001 1 1 1
ACUATOR CON50 Driller’s Chair
DFSD J-BOX
RLY, 24VAC/DC, 5NO, Amphion

10066482-001 1 1 1 10869107-001
2NC CONTACTS DFSD
RLY, 24VDC, 21-21/ATEX Amphion
10044937-001 1 1 1 10869107-001
DPDT DFSD
PWR SPLY, SWITCHNG, Amphion
10066792-001 1 1 1 10869107-001
24V,10A DFSD
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 2P, Amphion
10709901-001 - - 2 10869107-001
10A, 480VAC DFSD
Amphion
10066667-001 10 10 10 10869107-001
TB-6.2mm UT-4, GRAY DFSD
Amphion
10066897-001 5 5 5 10869107-001
TB-6.2mm UT-4, PE DFSD
Amphion
10052319-001 1 2 2 10869107-001
TB-END CLAMP, E/NS 35 DFSD
Amphion
10042034-001 1 2 2 10869107-001
24V FUSE HOLDER DFSD
TB-8.2MM, GREEN- Amphion
10066671-001 1 2 2 10869107-001
YELLOW, UT6PE DFSD
FUSE- Amphion
10042584-021 4A,125V,5MMX20MM, 1 2 2 10869107-001 DFSD
FASTBLOW
FUSE- 1. A,5MM X Amphion
10042584-012 20MM, 1 2 2 10869107-001 DFSD
Glass
D7440000254-TPL-001/01
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 6
PC-ETHERNET Amphion
10064178-088 1 1 1 10869107-001
ADAPTER,TCP/IP,UDP DFSD
PLC-4PT, 24VDC INPUT Amphion
10064178-040 1 2 1 10869107-001
MODULE DFSD
CABLE ASSY , CAT5, Amphion
10053152-001 - - 2 10869107-001
RJ45, RED, 10FT DFSD
MUD LOGGER J-BOX
10066667-001 TB-6.2MM, GRAY UT4 5 5 5 10869091-001 Mud Logger

TB-GROUND BLOCK, Mud Logger
10065802-001 5 5 5 10869091-001
UT-4-PE
10066985-001 TB-5.2MM, GRAY, UT2.5 5 5 5 10869091-001 Mud Logger
10052319-001 TB-END CLAMP, E/NS 35 1 2 2 10869091-001 Mud Logger
TB-END BRACKET, NS Mud Logger
10125056-001 1 2 2 10869091-001
35
PWR SPLY, SWITCHNG, Mud Logger
10066792-001 1 1 1 10869091-001
24V,10A
PC-ETHERNET Mud Logger
10064178-088 1 1 1 10869091-001
ADAPTER,TCP/IP,UDP
2 CHANNEL ANALOG Mud Logger
10064178-024 OUTPUT MODULE, 4- 4 4 4 10869091-001
20Ma
PLC-MOD,DIG Mud Logger
10064178-052 1 1 1 10869091-001
OUTPUT,2CH,24VDC
PLC-MOD,PWR Mud Logger
10064178-096 - 1 1 10869091-001
SPLY/FUSE,24VDC
PLC-MOD,FIELD SIDE Mud Logger
10064178-072 - 1 1 10869091-001
AC/DC
CONV-POT,VDC,MA Mud Logger
10050899-001 2 2 2 10869091-001
IN/VDC,MA OUT
MODULE, END FIELD Integrated
10064178-070 1 1 1 10869091-001
SIDE Amphion MTC
UPS
10516581-001 6KVA UPS, 230 VAC - 1 1 10536380-001 UPS CABINET

SWITCH, REMOTE BY-
10067098-001 - 1 1 10536380-001 UPS CABINET
PASS
EXTERNAL BATTERY
10516583-001 - 1 1 10536380-001 UPS CABINET
UPS 6KVA
KIT, UPS ETHERNET
10067493-001 COMMUNICATIONS - 2 2 10536380-001 UPS CABINET
WEB-CARD
D7440000254-TPL-001/01
www.nov.com
CONTROL SPARES LIST
AUXILIARY
KFELS B354
1. 10893257-001
Recommended Commissioning Spares
2. 10893257-002
Recommended Operational Spares
3. 10893257-003
Recommended Insurance Spares
RIG/PLANT NEXT ASSY PRODUCT

AUXILIARY
This document contains proprietary and confidential information National Oilwell Varco
which belongs to National-Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or
subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is 743 N. Eckhoff St.
REMARKS
loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. Orange, CA 92868
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or Phone + 714-978-1900
distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE Fax + 714-937-5029
express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to
NOV upon request and in any event upon completion of the use for
which it was loaned. This document and the information contained
CLIENT PO NUMBER and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
Client Document Number 10893257-SPL 01
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
01 12/10/2013 Initial Release J. Vu M. El Assi M. El Assi

Rev Date (mm.dd.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 First issue
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 3
-001 -002 -003

Recom. Recom. Recom.
Commission Operational Insurance Where Description
Part No. Description Spare Spare Spare Used Where Used
30178673-2 Electric, Heater - - 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box

30178768-1 Encl Thermostat - - 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
Mounting
P250002-0005-31 Power Supply 24VDC, 1 - 3 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
10A
0000-6999-19 PLC-SIE,CONN, PROFI, - 2 2 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
35DEG,
0000-9612-55 Relay -24VDC SPDT, 6A - 3 3 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
P250000-9699-91 Relay-24VDC, 5NO, NC - 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
0000-9671-93 PC- Digital Input, 4DI, 2 2 2 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
24VDC
0000-9671-92 PLC-4D0, 24V DC 2A 2 2 2 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
40943311-069 PLC-2D0, 24V DC 2A 2 2 2 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
40943311-061 PLC-WAGO, PROFIBUS 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
DP/V1,Field Bus Coupler
40943311-111 PLC-Module, Filter 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
P250002-0008-86 PLC-MOD, Filter 24VDC 2 2 2 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
Field
40943311-080 PLC-MOD, PWR 2 2 2 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
SPLY/Fuse, 24VDC
0000-9673-33 PLC-2PT, Analog input 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
P250000-9688-03 PLC-Frequency Counter 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
30156246 Profibus Solenoid Driver 1 2 2 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
40943311-030 PLC-2PT, Analog Output, 1 - 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
4-20MA
40943311-038 PLC-EExi Power Feed 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
Module
P250000-9684-06 PLC-2DI, Namur Module 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
EExi
40943311-042 PLC-MOD, Analog Input, 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
2CH,4-20mA
40943311-031 PLC-2PT 0-20mA Output 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
module
0000-9601-45 Barrier-I.S. Switch 1 1 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
Isolator
0000-9668-48 PLC-Wago End Module - - 1 10893064-001 Remote I/O J-Box
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
2 3 Technical Documents & Drawings
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 03
Page: 1

Section
UPS Cabinet 2 X 6KVA INT General Arrangement Drawing 10540458-GAD 05

Drill Floor Shutdown (DFSD) General Arrangement 10540459-GAD 04
Mud Logger Remote I/O General Arrangement 10541355-GAD 04
Driller’s Chair – Sit Down – Amphion General Arrangement 10545722-GAD 01
Drawing
Driller’s Chair J-Box General Arrangement 10798978-GAD 02
Amphion MTC #1 Cabinet General Arrangement M801002205-GAD-001 06
Assembly, UPS Cabinet 2 X 6KVA International, Graphite 10536380-ASM 11
Metallic
Assembly, Wiper System – Remote I/O J-Box 10562626-ASM 02
Amphion MTC #1 Cabinet 10869082-ASM 03
Driller’s Chair 10869083-ASM 01
Amphion Chair Layout 10869084-ASM 03
Assembly Driller’s Chair J-Box 10869086-ASM 01
Assembly Mud Logger 10869091-ASM 02
Remote I/O J-Box, DFSD 10869107-ASM 01
www.nov.com
15"
TOUCH
SCREEN
HMI
KEYBOARD
15"
TOUCH
SCREEN
HMI
KEYBOARD
15"
TOUCH
SCREEN
HMI
KEYBOARD
FILTER FAN
15"
TOUCH
SCREEN
HMI
TOOL
OWNERSHIP
RELEASE ALL
OFF/
AUTO ON
DRILL FLOOR
EQUIPMENT
E-STOP
DRAWWORKS PARKING BRAKE

OVERRIDE
OPEN CLOSE
TURN TO
RELEASE
SLIPS ENABLE IBOP

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
Index - E-Stop Cause & Effect Matrix, DFSD 10869104-IDX 01
www.nov.com
INDEX
E-STOP CAUSE & EFFECT

MATRIX, DFSD
RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

KEPPEL HULL B354 10755982-001 AMPHION
This document contains proprietary and confidential information National Oilwell Varco
which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited 11000 Corporate Centre Drive
REMARKS purposes only and remains the property of National Oilwell.
Reproduction, in whole or in part; or use of this design or Houston, Texas 77041 (USA)
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the Phone + 281-854-0400
express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is Fax + 281-854-0607
to be returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in any
CLIENT PO NUMBER event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned.
10869104-IDX 01
www.nov.com
Document number 10869104-IDX
Revision 01
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
01 11/25/2013 First Issue J. ZAMORA R. GALLEGOS R. GALLEGOS

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 First Issue
www.nov.com
Document number 10869104-IDX
Revision 01
Page 3
ADS-10T DRAWWORKS
Push Button & Automatic
POWER SLIPS
Triggered Emergency Stops
CAT HEAD
TDS-8
HPU
RST
DRILLER CHAIR E-STOP 0 0 0 0 0 0
DRAWWORKS LOCAL TOOL STOP 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
DRILL FLOOR E-STOP 1 (OPTIONAL) 0 2 2 2 0 0

DRILL FLOOR E-STOP 2 (OPTIONAL) 0 2 2 2 0 0
DERRICK E-STOP (OPTIONAL) 0 2 2 2 0 0
HPU LOCAL E-STOP N/A NOTE:1 NOTE:1 NOTE:1 0 N/A
NOTE: 1 Tool isolated by turning off hydraulic power unit
Cat.0 = Stopping by immediate removal of power to the hoisting machine actuators (i.e. an uncontrolled stop)
Cat.2 = A controlled stop with power left available to the hoisting machine actuators
Note: See IEC 60204-32 for definitions of Emergency Stop Categories.
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 03
Page: 1

Section
Amphion System Topology 10869064-DIA 01

Network Diagram, AUX Equipment 10893254-DIA 01
Amphion Block Diagram 10869066-DIA 03
Block Diagram, DFSD 10869098-DIA 02
Block Diagram, Auxiliary EQUIP. 10893250-DIA 02
Amphion Interconnect 10869067-DIA 03
Mud Logger Remote I/O Connection 10869077-DIA 02
UPS Installation 10869080-DIA 03
Interconnect Diagram, DFSD 10869099-DIA 02
Interconnect Diagram, AUX EQUIP. 10893251-DIA 02
Amphion Driller’s Workstation 10869071-DIA 02
Driller’s Chair JBox Interconnect 10869074-DIA 03
INW Cabin Wash Wipe 10880807-SCH 02
Tag No.: WP-JB-1
Cable Schedule Index - Amphion 10869069-IDX 03
Cable Index - DFSD 10869101-IDX 02
Cable Schedule, Auxiliary 10893252-IDX 01
Hazardous Equipment Index, AUX 10893256-IDX 02
I-O Map Index 10869103-IDX 01
I/O Map, Auxiliary 10893255-IDX 01
www.nov.com
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
192.168.31.27 – Aux SBC

192.168.31.66 – Power System Gateway SBC
192.168.31.34 – ADS SBC
192.168.31.90 – Estop (DFSD) Remote J-Box Wago I/O
192.168.31.25 – TDS SBC
192.168.31.40 – Drillers Chair SBC
192.168.31.60 – Mud Logger Remote J-Box Wago I/O
192.168.31.111 – MTC #1 MOXA Switch 1

192.168.31.112 – MTC #1 MOXA Switch 2
192.168.31.113 – MTC #1 MOXA Switch 3
192.168.31.114 – MTC #1 Wago I/O
192.168.31.115 – MTC #1 (PANEL PC)
192.168.31.116 – Router
192.168.31.117 – MTC #1 MOXA Switch 4
192.168.31.161 – Driller’s Chair HMI #1

192.168.31.101 – Driller’s Chair MOXA Switch 1
192.168.31.102 – Driller’s Chair MOXA Switch 2
192.168.31.80 – Driller’s Chair Canbus Conv. 02 Leftside
192.168.31.81 – Driller’s Chair Canbus Conv. 01 Rightside
192.168.31.82 – Driller’s Chair Backpack Wago I/O
192.168.31.83 – Wiper Remote J-Box Wago I/O
192.168.31.47 – MSI SBC

192.168.31.95 – MSI I/O
192.168.31.96 – MSI Hull Remote I/O
RigSense Server – Different net: 10.1.0.130

RigSense Client #1 – Different Net: 10.1.0.131
RigSense Client #2 – Different Net: 10.1.0.132
192.168.31.178 – E-HAWK USER PC

192.168.31.179 – E-HAWK DATA LOGGER
192.168.31.190 – WEBCARD UPS A

192.168.31.191 – WEBCARD UPS B
SIZE DWG NO REV
B 10869064-DIA 01
SCALE NONE WT LBS SHEET 3 OF 3
DCF0047 (REV B)
POWER CONTROL
ROOM
600V MAIN
PMS
PLC ABB
AC800
This document contains proprietary and confidential information which belongs to National-Oilwell
AMPHION Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is
loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in
part, or use of this design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the
express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request and in any
event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. This document and the information
TITLE
contained and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV. © National Oilwell Varco
NEXT ASSY USED ON CABLE SCHEDULE INDEX
DRAWN
APPLICATION R. VASQUEZ J. ZAMORA
KEPPEL HULL B354
CHECKED
R. GALLEGOS R. GALLEGOS SIZE DWG NO REV
APPVD
R. GALLEGOS R. GALLEGOS B 10869069-IDX 03
DATE
1/19/2016 11/21/2014 SCALE NONE WT LBS SHEET 1 OF 2
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO CABLE SCHEDULE INDEX DATE 1/19/2016 3:03:26 PM
KEPPEL HULL B354
CABLE ID CABLE VARCO GLAND GLAND CABLE FROM TO BLOCK DIAG. INTERCONNECT REMARKS CABLE
TAG NO. CONSTRUCTION PART NO. SIZE P/N TYPE TAG NO. LOCATION TAG NO. LOCATION DWG. NO. SHT. DWG. NO. SHT. SUPPLIED BY
D1001 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA - DRILLER'S CHAIR DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 8 - NOV
802-D1001 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 8 - CUSTOMER
802-D1004 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - MSI REMOTE I/O (DRILL FLOOR) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 7 - CUSTOMER
806-DFSD-D100 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 PNJB-100 DRILL FLOOR SHUT DOWN 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 4 - CUSTOMER
802-ML-D100 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - MUD LOGGER 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 6 - CUSTOMER
802-AUX-D1060 PROFIBUS CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - AUX. REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 5 - CUSTOMER
805-D1007 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - ADS REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 6 - CUSTOMER
805-D1008 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - ADS REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 6 - CUSTOMER
802-D1012 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 SWITCH #4 DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 8 - CUSTOMER
D1012 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX - DRILLER'S CHAIR SWITCH #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 8 - NOV
802-CONV- I/O FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET # 1 - RIGSENSE ETHERNET SWITCH 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 7 - CUSTOMER
802-VDAQ-I/O FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET # 1 - DRILLING INSTRUMENTATION REMOTE I/O(MUD PIT AREA) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 7 - CUSTOMER
C3131 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA - ETHERNET SWITCH - TOOL PUSHERS OFFICE 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 7 - CUSTOMER
C3132 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA - ETHERNET SWITCH - COMPANY MAN'S OFFICE 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 7 - CUSTOMER
C3133 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA - ETHERNET SWITCH - OTHER OFFICE 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 7 - CUSTOMER
802-PS-F1001 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROLLER CABINET #1 - 600V PMS PLC (S7) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 4 - CUSTOMER
802-PS-F1002 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROLLER CABINET #1 - 600V PMS PLC (S7) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 4 - CUSTOMER
802-AD-F9001 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROLLER CABINET #1 - 480V MCC PLC (S7) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 6 - CUSTOMER
802-AD-F9002 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROLLER CABINET #1 - 480V MCC PLC (S7) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 6 - CUSTOMER
804-TD-F9001 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROLLER CABINET #1 - TDS REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 4 - CUSTOMER
804-TD-F9002 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - TDS REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 4 - CUSTOMER
802-TD-F1001 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - 480V MCC PLC (S7) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 4 - CUSTOMER
802-TD-F1002 FIBER 4 CORE 62.5/125 um MULTIMODE CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - 480V MCC PLC (S7) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 4 - CUSTOMER
UPS A ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTITOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - UPS CABINET 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 5 - CUSTOMER
UPS B ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTITOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - UPS CABINET 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 5 - CUSTOMER
E HAWK ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA MTC#1 MULTITOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - E HAWK CABINET 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 7 - CUSTOMER
WIPER-D100 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA DRILLER'S CHAIR DR-JB-001 DRLLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA - - NOV
WIPER-D100 ETHERNET CAT 5 COPPER CUSTOMER - - DATA DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX - WIPER REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA - - CUSTOMER
-
SIGNAL -
806-DFSD-N4201 1.5mm2 x 7C CUSTOMER - - N.I.S. PNJB-100 DRILLFLOOR CHUT DOWN DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2&3 - CUSTOMER
N4201 1.5mm2 x 7C CUSTOMER - - N.I.S. - DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX - DRILLER'S CHAIR 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - NOV
N5014 0.75mm2 x 7C CUSTOMER - - N.I.S. - DRILLER'S CHAIR DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 3 - NOV
N5014 PIGTAIL CUSTOMER - - N.I.S. DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX ELECTRONIC WEIGHT INDICATOR 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 3 - NOV
POWER
802-UPS-A1 6mm2 x 3 CORE CUSTOMER - - POWER - UPS A - MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
802-UPS-B1 6mm2 x 3 CORE CUSTOMER - - POWER - UPS B - MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
LP8-23 6mm2 x 3 CORE CUSTOMER - - POWER DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX - 230VAC CUSTOMER FEED 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
LP8-9A 6mm2 x 3 CORE CUSTOMER - - POWER - NON UPS A - UPS CABINET 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
ELP6-11A 6mm2 x 3 CORE CUSTOMER - - POWER - NON UPS A - MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
ELP-18A 6mm2 x 3 CORE CUSTOMER - - POWER - NON UPS B - MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
ELP6-25A 6mm2 x 3 CORE CUSTOMER - - POWER - 230VAC CUSTOMER FEED - MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
G1001 6mm2 x 1C CUSTOMER - - GROUND - RIG GROUND MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
802-P4201 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
P4201 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX - DRILLER'S CHAIR 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 3 - NOV
802-P4202 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
P4202 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX - DRILLER'S CHAIR 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 3 - NOV
802-P6001 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - MSI REMOTE I/O (DRILL FLOOR) 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
806-DFSD-P100 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 PNJB-100 DRILL FLOOR SHUT DOWN 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
806-DFSD-P101 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 PNJB-100 DRILL FLOOR SHUT DOWN 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
802-AUX-P1001 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - AUX. REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
805-AD-P1001 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - ADS REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
804-TD-P1001 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - TDS REMOTE I/O 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
802-ML-P1001 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER MTC#1 MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 - MUD LOGGER 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 2 - CUSTOMER
LP8-23 2.5mm2 x 3C CUSTOMER - - POWER DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX - DRILLER'S CHAIR 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 3 - NOV
G4201 35mm2 x 1 CORE CUSTOMER - - GROUND - RIG GROUND - DRILLER'S CHAIR 10869066-DIA 2 10869067-DIA 3 - NOV
SHEET 2 OF 2 DWG NO 10869069-IDX REV 03

DFSD Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned
for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or
use of this design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the express
written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request and in any event
upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. This document and the information contained
TITLE
and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV. © National Oilwell Varco
NEXT ASSY USED ON CABLE INDEX
DRAWN
APPLICATION R. VASQUEZ J. ZAMORA
KEPPEL HULL B354
CHECKED
R. GALLEGOS R. GALLEGOS SIZE DWG NO REV
APPVD
R. GALLEGOS R. GALLEGOS B 10869101-IDX 02
DATE
D74DCF0049-TPL-001 (REV B)
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO CABLE INDEX DATE 2/12/2016 8:26:08 AM
KEPPEL HULL B354
CABLE ID CABLE VARCO GLAND GLAND CABLE FROM TO BLOCK DIAG. INTERCONNECT REMARKS CABLE
806-DFSD-D100 E/NET X 4PR N/A N/A N/A DATA MTC #1 MULTITOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 2 CUSTOMER
806-DFSD-P100 2.5mm² X 3C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S MTC #1 MULTITOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 2 CUSTOMER
806-DFSD-P101 2.5mm² X 3C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S MTC #1 MULTITOOL CONTROL CABINET #1 PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 2 CUSTOMER
806-DFSD-N4201 1.5mm² X 7C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 3 CUSTOMER
N4201 1.5mm² X 7C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S DR-JB-001 DRILLER'S CHAIR J-BOX DRILLER'S CHAIR 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 3 CUSTOMER
55-1DFSD 1.5mm² X 2C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX 480VAC DRILLFLOOR SWBD MCC 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 4 CUSTOMER
303-DWA-4 1.5mm² X 2C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX VFD UNIT #4 DRAWWORKS A 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 5 CUSTOMER
303-DWB-4 1.5mm² X 2C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX VFD UNIT #5 DRAWWORKS B 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 5 CUSTOMER
303-DWC-4 1.5mm² X 2C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX VFD UNIT #6 DRAWWORKS C 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 5 CUSTOMER
303-TD-4 1.5mm² X 2C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX VFD UNIT #7 TOP DRIVE 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 5 CUSTOMER
806-ES-N100 1.5mm² X 3C N/A N/A - N.I.S ESD-100 DRILL FLOOR E-STOP #1 (OPTIONAL) PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 7 (OPTIONAL) CUSTOMER
806-ES-N101 1.5mm² X 3C N/A N/A - N.I.S ESD-101 DRILL FLOOR E-STOP #2 (OPTIONAL) PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 7 (OPTIONAL) CUSTOMER
806-ES-N102 1.5mm² X 3C N/A N/A - N.I.S ESD-102 DERRICK E-STOP (OPTIONAL) PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 7 (OPTIONAL) CUSTOMER
806-HP-N47 1.5mm² X 3C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S. PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX HPU HPU CONTROL PANEL 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 6 CUSTOMER
806-TD-N1005 1.5mm² X 7C N/A N/A - N.I.S. PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX PSNJB-01 TDS REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 3 CUSTOMER
806-AUX-N1005 1.5mm² X 7C N/A N/A N/A N.I.S. PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX PSNJB-300 AUX REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 7 CUSTOMER
806-AD-N1004 1.5mm² X 7C N/A N/A - N.I.S. PNJB-100 DFSD REMOTE I/O J-BOX AD-SNJB600 ADS REMOTE I/O J-BOX 10869098-DIA 2 10869099-DIA 3,11 CUSTOMER

NOTES:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. THIS DOCUMENT BEST VIEWED THROUGH MS EXCEL.
2. THE STATUS COLUMN AND REVISION LETTER CORRESPONDS
TO THE MOST CURRENT CHANGE TO RESPECTIVE LINE (ROW).
3. CABLES LISTED ON THE FOLLOWING PAGES ARE SUGGESTED
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO NATIONAL-OILWELL,
L.P. IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS
NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE
RETURNED TO NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR WHICH
IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED IS THE COPYRIGHTED
AUXILIARY PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.

TITLE
NEXT ASSY USED ON CURRENT INITIAL CABLE SCHEDULE, AUXILIARY
DRAWN
APPLICATION J. VU
KFELS B354
CHECKED
M. EL ASSI SIZE DWG NO REV
APPVD
M. EL ASSI B 10893252-IDX 01
DATE
12/10/2013 SCALE NONE WT LBS SHEET 1 OF 3
DCF0048 (REV B)
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO CABLE SCHEDULE, AUXILIARY DATE 12/10/2013 9:54:17 AM
KFELS B354
CABLE ID CABLE NOV GLAND GLAND CABLE FROM TO BLOCK DIAG. INTERCONNECT REMARKS CABLE
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O
AUX-P1001 3C x 2.5mm2 0000-9669-69 M20 (O) - POWER MTC MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET AUX PSNJB100 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 10 NOV
POWER/I.S./N.I.S. J-BOX
AUX-D1060 PROFIBUS 0000-6808-90 M20 (O) - DP MTC MULTI TOOL CONTROL CABINET AUX PSNJB100 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 10 NOV
DRILL FLOOR SHUTDOWN (E-STOP) AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O
AUX-N1005 7C x 16AWG 0001-0536-16 M20 (O) - N.I.S. DFSD AUX PSNJB100 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 11 NOV
CONTROL SYSTEM POWER/I.S./N.I.S. J-BOX
RST 49.5
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S.
RST-N320 14C x 2.5mm2 - FIELD INSTALL - N.I.S. AUX PSNJB100 NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2,16 CUSTOMER
J-BOX
2
N320-2 3C x 1.5mm 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX SOV-320-2 RST FREE ROTATE SOLENOID (E2) 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
N320-3 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX SOV-320-3 RST LINEAR LOCK SOLENOID (E6) 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
N320-4 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX SOV-320-4 RST CCW LOCK SOLENOID (E7) 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
N320-5 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX SOV-320-5 POWER SLIPS UP SOLENOID (E9) 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
N320-6 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX SOV-320-6 POWER SLIPS SET SOLENOID (E10) 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
N320-7 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX SOV-320-7 GREASE PUMP SOLENOID (E16) 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
2 AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S.
RST-N321 8 TSP x 1.0mm - FIELD INSTALL - N.I.S. AUX PSNJB100 NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2,12 CUSTOMER
J-BOX
POWER SLIPS SET PRESSURE
N321-1 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX PS-321-1 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
SWITCH (E11)
POWER SLIPS LOW PRESSURE
SWITCH (E12)
POWER SLIPS UP PRESSURE SWITCH
(E13)
RST HIGH GREASE LEVEL SWITCH
N321-4 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX LS-321-4 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
(E14)
RST LOW GREASE LEVEL SWITCH
N321-5 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX LS-321-5 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 NOV
(E15)
RST-N322 10C x 14AWG - FIELD INSTALL - N.I.S. AUX PSNJB100 NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 3,23 CUSTOMER
J-BOX
RST CW SPEED PROPORTIONAL
N322-1 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB-320 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX PV-322-1 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 3 NOV
SOLENOID
RST CCW SPEED PROPORTIONAL
SOLENOID
RST TORQUE PROPORTIONAL
SOLENOID
RST-S01 3 TSP x 1.0mm2 CUSTOMER FIELD INSTALL - I.S. AUX PSNJB100 SJB-350 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE I.S. J-BOX 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3,20 CUSTOMER
J-BOX
2
RST-S01B 7C x 1.5mm CUSTOMER FIELD INSTALL - I.S. SJB-340 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE I.S. J-BOX SJB-350 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE I.S. J-BOX 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3 CUSTOMER
RST-S02 3C x 1.5mm2 56627-01 M20 (O) - I.S. SJB-350 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE I.S. J-BOX PT-321-6 RST TORQUE PRESS TRANSMITTER 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3 NOV
S340-1 2C PIGTAIL REF: 93939-1 M20 (OS) - I.S. SJB-340 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE I.S. J-BOX ZS-340-1 RST SPEED PROXIMITY SENSOR 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3 NOV
RST LINEAR LOCK PROXIMITY
S340-2 2C PIGTAIL REF: 93939-1 M20 (OS) - I.S. SJB-340 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE I.S. J-BOX ZS-340-2 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3 NOV
SENSOR
HC-26EV HYDRAULIC CATHEAD

CH-N01 20C x 14AWG - FIELD INSTALL - N.I.S. AUX PSNJB100 NJB310 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD N.I.S. J-BOX 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 4,18 CUSTOMER
J-BOX
HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #1 PULL IN
N310-1 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB310 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD N.I.S. J-BOX SOV-310-1 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 4 NOV
SOLENOID
HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #1 PAY OUT
SOLENOID
HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #2 PULL IN
SOLENOID

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO CABLE SCHEDULE, AUXILIARY DATE 12/10/2013 9:54:17 AM
KFELS B354
CABLE ID CABLE NOV GLAND GLAND CABLE FROM TO BLOCK DIAG. INTERCONNECT REMARKS CABLE
HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #2 PAY OUT
SOLENOID
HYDRAULIC CATHEAD SLOW
SOLENOID
HYDRAULIC CATHEAD ENABLE
SOLENOID
HYDRAULIC CATHEAD
N312-1 3C x 1.5mm2 56625-1.5-03 M20 (O) - N.I.S. NJB310 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD N.I.S. J-BOX PV-312-1 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 4 NOV
PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID
HYDR CATHEAD PRESS TRANSMITTER HYDRAULIC CATHEAD PRESS
N311-1 1 TSP x 1.0mm2 56627-01 M20 (O) - I.S. SNJB311 PT-311-1 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 4 NOV
I.S./N.I.S. J-BOX TRANSMITTER
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S. HYDRAULIC CATHEAD LOCAL
CH-N317 12C x 1.5mm2 - - - N.I.S. AUX PSNJB100 CS-317 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 13,14,15 CUSTOMER
J-BOX CONTROL STATION
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S. HYDRAULIC CATHEAD LOCAL
CH-S317 1 TSP x 1.0mm2 - - - I.S. AUX PSNJB100 CS-317 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 14,21 CUSTOMER
J-BOX CONTROL STATION
RA-N316 1 TSP x 1.0mm2 - M20 (O) - N.I.S. PT-316 RIG AIR PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AUX PSNJB100 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 18 CUSTOMER
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S. DRILL FLOOR SHUTDOWN (E-STOP)

HPU 3C x 16AWG - FIELD INSTALL - N.I.S. AUX PSNJB100 DFSD 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 5,11 CUSTOMER
J-BOX CONTROL SYSTEM
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S. HPU MASTER MOTOR STARTER
HP-N01 16C x 14AWG - FIELD INSTALL - N.I.S. AUX PSNJB100 PNJB-01 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 5,12 CUSTOMER
J-BOX ENCLOSURE
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S. HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR STARTER
J-BOX ENCLOSURE
AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S. HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR STARTER
J-BOX ENCLOSURE
HPU MASTER MOTOR STARTER

HP-P01 4C x 1/0 AWG - FIELD INSTALL - N.I.S. PNJB-01 MCC MULTI CONTROL CABINET 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 6 CUSTOMER
ENCLOSURE
HPU SLAVE #1 MTR STARTER
ENCLOSURE
HPU SLAVE #2 MTR STARTER
ENCLOSURE

N01 3C X 14AWG - - - N.I.S. PNJB-01 LS-01 LOW LEVEL SWITCH 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 6 NOV
ENCLOSURE
N02 3C X 14AWG - - - N.I.S. PNJB-01 TS-01 HIGH TEMPERATURE SWITCH 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 6 NOV
ENCLOSURE
N03 3C X 14AWG - - - N.I.S. PNJB-01 LS-02 LOW-LOW LEVEL SWITCH 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 6 NOV
ENCLOSURE
N04 3C X 14AWG - - - N.I.S. PNJB-01 TS-02 HIGH-HIGH TEMPERATURE SWITCH 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 6 NOV
ENCLOSURE
HPU MASTER MOTOR STARTER HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR STARTER
N05 10C X 14AWG - - - N.I.S. PNJB-01 PNJB-02 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 5,7 NOV
ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE
HPU MASTER MOTOR STARTER HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR STARTER
N06 10C X 14AWG - - - N.I.S. PNJB-01 PNJB-03 10893250-DIA 5,6 10893251-DIA 5,8 NOV
ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE

P01 4C x 1/0 AWG - - - N.I.S. MOT1 HPU MASTER MOTOR PNJB-01 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 6 NOV
ENCLOSURE
HPU SLAVE #1 MOTOR STARTER
P02 4C x 1/0 AWG - - - N.I.S. MOT2 HPU SLAVE #1 MOTOR PNJB-02 10893250-DIA 5 10893251-DIA 7 NOV
ENCLOSURE
HPU SLAVE #2 MOTOR STARTER
P03 4C x 1/0 AWG - - - N.I.S. MOT3 HPU SLAVE #2 MOTOR PNJB-03 10893250-DIA 6 10893251-DIA 8 NOV
ENCLOSURE

Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned
for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use
of this design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the express written
consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request and in any event upon
completion of the use for which it was loaned. This document and the information contained and
AUX represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV. © National Oilwell Varco TITLE
NEXT ASSY USED ON CURRENT INITIAL HAZARDOUS EQUIPMENT INDEX, AUX
DRAWN
APPLICATION J. VU J. VU
KFELS B354
CHECKED
M. EL ASSI M. EL ASSI SIZE DWG NO REV
APPVD
M. EL ASSI M. EL ASSI B 10893256-IDX 02
DATE
DCF0050 (REV A)
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO HAZARDOUS EQUIPMENT INDEX, AUX DATE 5/14/2014 12:27:10 PM
KFELS B354
NOV NOV DESCRIPTION LOCATION MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER HAZARDOUS HAZARDOUS CERTIFICATION CERTIFICATE TEMP. IP MATERIAL BLOCK DIAG. INTERCONNECT ASSOCIATED REMARKS
TAG NO. P/N: P/N: RATING ZONE AGENCY No. RATING RATING DWG. NO. SHT. DWG. NO. SHT. COMPONENT

AUX PSNJB100 10893064 AUXILIARY REMOTE I/O POWER/I.S./N.I.S. J-BOX DERRICK DRILL FLOOR NOV M801002002 NONE NONE N/A N/A IP66 ST. ST. 10893250-DIA 6-Feb 10893251-DIA 23-Oct
ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE (RST 49.5)
LS-321-4 59000257 RST HIGH GREASE LEVEL SWITCH (E14) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY BARTEC 07-2911-2330/10 EEx de IIC T6 ZONE 1 PTB 00ATEX1093X -20ºC to +60ºC IP66 PLASTIC 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
LS-321-5 59000257 RST LOW GREASE LEVEL SWITCH RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY BARTEC 07-2911-2330/10 EEx de IIC T6 ZONE 1 PTB 00ATEX1093X -20ºC to +60ºC IP66 PLASTIC 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
NJB320 50004679 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE N.I.S. J-BOX RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY WEIDMULLER - EEx de IIC T6 ZONE 1 EECS BAS01ATEX2210X T6 IP66 SST 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2 & 3
SJB340 980040-1 RST SPEED SENSOR I.S. J-BOX ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE STAHL 8118/222-1 II 2G EEx ia IIC T6 ZONE 0 PTB PTB99ATEX3103 T6 IP66 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3
SJB350 50004918 ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE I.S. J-BOX ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE BARTEC 50004918 EExe IIC T6 ZONE 0 IBEX IBEXU99ATEX1096 IP66 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3
PS-321-1 203016 POWER SLIPS SET PRESSURE SWITCH (E11) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY UNITED ELECTRIC J120-15643 Ex II 2 G, Ex d IIC T6 Gb ZONE 1 DEMKO 09ATEX0815573X -40°C to +75°C IP66 CAST ALUMINUM 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
PS-321-2 203016 POWER SLIPS LOW PRESSURE SWITCH (E12) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY UNITED ELECTRIC J120-15643 Ex II 2 G, Ex d IIC T6 Gb ZONE 1 DEMKO 09ATEX0815573X -40°C to +75°C IP66 CAST ALUMINUM 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
PS-321-3 203016 POWER SLIPS UP PRESSURE SWITCH (E13) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY UNITED ELECTRIC J120-15643 Ex II 2 G, Ex d IIC T6 Gb ZONE 1 DEMKO 09ATEX0815573X -40°C to +75°C IP66 CAST ALUMINUM 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
PT-321-6 30156355-4 RST TORQUE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY DRUCK PTX Ex-0129 II 1G, EEx ia IIC T4, (-20 oC ≤Ta≤+80oC) ZONE 1 BASEEFA 02ATEX0235X -30ºC to +80ºC IP66 ST. ST. 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3
PV-322-1 59000245 RST CW SPEED PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID (E4) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS DPZA-A-371-S5 II 2G EEx d IIC T4, ZONE 1 CESI CESI02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 3
PV-322-2 59000245 RST CCW SPEED PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID (E3) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS DPZA-A-371-S5 II 2G EEx d IIC T4, ZONE 1 CESI CESI02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 3
PV-322-3 59000246 RST TORQUE PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID (E5) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS LIRZA-A-3/250/M + SCL132-37-4 II 2G EEx d IIC T4, ZONE 1 CESI CESI02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 3
SOV-320-2 59000230 RST FREE ROTATE SOLENOID (E2) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS DPZA-A-371-S5 II 2G EEx d IIC T4, ZONE 1 CESI CESI02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
SOV-320-3 112554-D2 RST LINEAR LOCK SOLENOID (E6) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0631/2/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
SOV-320-4 112554-D2 CCW LOCK SOLENOID (E7) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0631/2/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
SOV-320-5 112554-J2 POWER SLIPS UP SOLENOID (E9) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0713/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
SOV-320-6 112554-J2 POWER SLIPS SET SOLENOID (E10) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0713/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
SOV-320-7 112554-D2 RST GREASE PUMP SOLENOID (E16) RST/PS CONTROL STATION ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0631/2/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 2 10893251-DIA 2
ZS-340-1 10462725-002 RST SPEED PROXIMITY SENSOR ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE P&F NJ4-12GK-N II 2G, EEx ia IIC T6 ZONE 1 CSA 1007121(LR96321-2) -25ºC to +100ºC IP68 PBT 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3
ZS-340-2 10462725-002 RST LINEAR LOCK PROXIMITY SENSOR ROTARY SUPPORT TABLE P&F NJ4-12GK-N II 2G, EEx ia IIC T6 ZONE 1 CSA 1007121(LR96321-2) -25ºC to +100ºC IP68 PBT 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 3
HC-26EV HYDRAULIC CATHEAD
NJB310 108225-64 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD N.I.S. J-BOX HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY WEIDMULLER TB10Ex II 2GD T85C, EEx e II T6 ZONE 1 EECS BAS01ATEX2210X -20ºC to +60ºC IP66 ST. ST. 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
PT-311-1 10028719-002 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD PRESSURE TRANSMITTER HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY DRUCK PTX 671-1-1140 (0-3000 PSI) II 1G, EEx ia IIC T4, (-20 oC ≤Ta≤+80oC) ZONE 1 EECS BAS00ATEX3243 -30ºC to +80ºC IP66 ST. ST. 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
PV-312-1 130358-RV1 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY ATOS OZA-A-12DC II 2G, EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
SOV-310-1 112554-J2 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #1 PULL IN SOLENOID HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0713/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
SOV-310-2 112554-J2 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #1 PAY OUT SOLENOID HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0713/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
SOV-310-3 112554-J2 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #2 PULL IN SOLENOID HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0713/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
SOV-310-4 112554-J2 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD #2 PAY OUT SOLENOID HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0713/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
SOV-310-5 112554-D2 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD SLOW SOLENOID HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0631/2/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
SOV-310-6 112554-D2 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD ENABLE SOLENOID HYDRAULIC CATHEAD INTERFACE PANEL ASSEMBLY ATOS 000290-DHA-0631/2/M/7-24VDC/20 II 2G EEx d IIC T6,T4,T3 ZONE 1 CESI 02ATEX014 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 CAST IRON 10893250-DIA 3 10893251-DIA 4
CS-317 30175632-LB HYDRAULIC CATHEAD LOCAL CONTROL STATION DRILL FLOOR BARTEC 07-3136-3815-009 II 2G EEx de (ia) IIC T6 ZONE 1 PTB 02ATEX1159 -20ºC to +70ºC IP66 ST. ST. 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 14
PT-316 10052507-03 RIG AIR PRESS TRANSMITTER DRILL FLOOR HYDAC HAD 4485-A-3000-00 II 2G EEx de IIC T6 ZONE 1 SIRA 02ATEX1089X -40ºC to +75ºC IP67 ST. ST. 10893250-DIA 4 10893251-DIA 18

Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned
for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use
of this design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the express written
consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request and in any event upon
completion of the use for which it was loaned. This document and the information contained and
represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV. © National Oilwell Varco TITLE
NEXT ASSY USED ON CURRENT INITIAL I-O MAP INDEX

DRAWN
APPLICATION J. ZAMORA
KEPPEL HULL B354
CHECKED
R. GALLEGOS SIZE DWG NO REV
APPVD
R. GALLEGOS B 10869103-IDX 01
DATE
D74DCF0051-TPL-001 (REV B)
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO I-O MAP INDEX DATE 11/25/2013 3:15:17 PM
KEPPEL HULL B354
I/O SIGNAL NETWORK NODE I/O DESCRIPTION I/O 1 FUNCTION 0 FUNCTION ENG. MIN ENG. MAX ENG. SETPOINTS INTERCONNECT REMARKS
ADDRESS TYPE ID No. LOCATION UNITS UNITS UNITS DIAGRAM
90DI0.0 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay Cat. 0 #1 Status Pos 1 (1) Relay Cat. 0 #1 On Relay Cat. 0 #1 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI0.5 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay ADS1 Status Pos 2 (5) Relay ADS1 On Relay ADS1 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI0.8 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay Cat. 0 #6 Status Pos 3 (1) Relay Cat. 0 #6 Status Relay Cat. 0 #6 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI0.12 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay RLDF 1Status Pos 4 (1) Relay RLDF 1Status Relay RLDF 1 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI0.13 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay RLDF 2 Status Pos 4 (5) Relay RLDF 2 Status Relay RLDF 2 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI0.14 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay RLDF 3 Status Pos 4 (4) Relay RLDF 3 Status Relay RLDF 3 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI0.15 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay 10 Status Pos 4 (8) Relay 10 Status Relay 10 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI1.0 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Relay Cat 0 7A Status Pos 5 (1) Relay Cat 0 7A Status Relay Cat 0 7A Off 10869099-DIA
90DI1.4 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 DFSD-PS01 Status Pos 6 (1) DFSD-PS01 Status DFSD-PS01 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI1.5 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 DFSD-PS02 Status Pos 6 (5) DFSD-PS02 Status DFSD-PS02 Off 10869099-DIA
90DI1.6 N.I.S. 24vdc ETHERNET 192.168.31.90 Spare Pos 6 (4) Spare Spare 10869099-DIA

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO NATIONAL-OILWELL,
L.P. IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS
NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE
RETURNED TO NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR WHICH
IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED IS THE COPYRIGHTED
AUX PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.

TITLE
NEXT ASSY USED ON CURRENT INITIAL I/O MAP, AUXILIARY
DRAWN
APPLICATION J. VU
KFELS B354
CHECKED
M. EL ASSI SIZE DWG NO REV
APPVD
M. EL ASSI B 10893255-IDX 01
DATE
DCF0051 (REV A)
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO I/O MAP, AUXILIARY DATE 12/10/2013 10:47:00 AM
KFELS B354
I/O SIGNAL NETWORK NODE I/O DESCRIPTION I/O 1 FUNCTION 0 FUNCTION ENG. MIN ENG. MAX ENG. SETPOINTS REMARKS/
ADDRESS TYPE ID No. LOCATION UNITS UNITS UNITS TAG NO
10DI0.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-POWER SUPPLY 1 FAULT POS 3 (1) POWER SUPPLY 1 OKAY POWER SUPPLY 1 NOT WORKING - - -
10DI0.3 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-OLM FAULT (SPARE) POS 3 (8) - - - - -
10DI0.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 4 (1) - - - - -
10DI0.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-CAT 0 E-STOP POS 4 (5) - - - - -
10DI0.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-CAT 2 E-STOP (SPARE) POS 4 (4) - - - - -
10DI1.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-POWER SLIPS SET PRESS SW POS 5 (1) POWER SLIPS SET POWER SLIPS NOT SET - - -
10DI1.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-POWER SLIPS LOW PRESS SW POS 5 (5) POWER SLIPS HYDRAULIC ADEQUATE POWER SLIPS HYDRAULIC PRESSURE LOW - - -
10DI1.2 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-POWER SLIPS UP PRESS SW POS 5 (4) POWER SLIPS UP POWER SLIPS NOT UP - - -
10DI1.3 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-RST HIGH GREASE LEVEL SW POS 5 (8) GREASE LEVEL HIGH GREASE LEVEL NOT HIGH - - -
10DI1.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-RST LOW GREASE LEVEL SW POS 6 (1) GREASE LEVEL NOT LOW GREASE LEVEL LOW - - -
10DI1.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU LOW LEVEL POS 6 (5) HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A STABLE LEVEL HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A LOW LEVEL - - -
10DI1.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU LOW-LOW LEVEL POS 6 (4) HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A STABLE LEVEL HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A LOW LOW LEVEL - - -
10DI1.7 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU HIGH TEMP POS 6 (8) HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A STABLE TEMP HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A HIGH TEMP - - -
10DI2.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU HIGH-HIGH TEMP POS 7 (1) HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A STABLE TEMP HPU HYDRAULIC FLUID AT A HIGH HIGH TEMP - - -
10DI2.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU MASTER RUNNING STATUS POS 7 (5) HPU MASTER MOTOR RUNNING HPU MASTER MOTOR NOT RUNNING - - -
10DI2.2 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU MASTER MOTOR TEMP (OPTIONAL) POS 7 (4) HPU MASTER MOTOR TEMP STABLE HPU MASTER MOTOR TEMP HIGH - - -
10DI2.3 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU MASTER HAND SELECT POS 7 (8) HPU MASTER MOTOR IN HAND SELECT HPU MASTER MOTOR NOT IN HAND SELECT - - -
10DI2.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU MASTER AUTO SELECT POS 8 (1) HPU MASTER MOTOR IN AUTO SELECT HPU MASTER MOTOR NOT IN AUTO SELECT - - -
10DI2.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU OVERRIDE POS 8 (5) HPU MOTOR IN OVERRIDE HPU NOT IN OVERRIDE - - -
10DI2.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU MASTER POWER SUPPLY FAULT POS 8 (4) HPU MASTER POWER SUPPLY OKAY POWER SUPPLY NOT WORKING - - -
10DI3.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR STATUS POS 9 (1) HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR RUNNING HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR NOT RUNNING - - -
10DI3.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR TEMP (OPTIONAL) POS 9 (5) HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR TEMP STABLE HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR TEMP HIGH - - -
10DI3.2 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 1 POWER FAULT POS 9 (4) HPU SLAVE 1 POWER SUPPLY OKAY POWER SUPPLY NOT WORKING - - -
10DI3.3 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 1 HAND SELECT POS 9 (8) HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR IN HAND SELECT HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR NOT IN HAND SELECT - - -
10DI3.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 1 AUTO SLECT POS 10 (1) HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR IN AUTO SELECT HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR NOT IN AUTO SELECT - - -
10DI3.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR STATUS POS 10 (5) HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR RUNNING HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR NOT RUNNING - - -
10DI3.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR TEMP (OPTIONAL) POS 10 (4) HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR TEMP STABLE HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR TEMP HIGH - - -
10DI3.7 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 2 POWER FAULT POS 10(8) HPU SLAVE 2 POWER SUPPLY OKAY POWER SUPPLY NOT WORKING - - -
10DI4.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 2 HAND SELECT POS 11(1) HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR IN HAND SELECT HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR NOT IN HAND SELECT - - -
10DI4.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 2 AUTO SLECT POS 11(5) HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR IN AUTO SELECT HPU SLAVE 2 MOTOR NOT IN AUTO SELECT - - -
10DI4.2 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR STATUS POS 11(4) HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR RUNNING HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR NOT RUNNING - - -
10DI4.3 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR TEMP (OPTIONAL) POS 11(8) HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR TEMP STABLE HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR TEMP HIGH - - -
10DI4.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 3 POWER FAULT POS 12(1) HPU SLAVE 3 POWER SUPPLY OKAY POWER SUPPLY NOT WORKING
10DI4.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 3 HAND SELECT POS 12(5) HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR IN HAND SELECT HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR NOT IN HAND SELECT
10DI4.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 3 AUTO SLECT POS 12(4) HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR IN AUTO SELECT HPU SLAVE 3 MOTOR NOT IN AUTO SELECT
10DI4.7 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 12(8) - -
10DI5.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-PAYOUT REQUEST POS 13(1) REQUEST CATHEAD PAYOUT LAST STATE
10DI5.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-PAYIN REQUEST POS 13(5) REQUEST CATHEAD PAYIN LAST STATE
10DI5.2 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-LINE PULL SETPOINT DEC. REQUEST POS 13(4) DECREASE LINE PULL LAST STATE
10DI5.3 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-LINE PULL SETPOINT INC. REQUEST POS 13(8) INCREASE LINE PULL LAST STATE
10DI5.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-LINE PULL METER SET/READ REQUEST POS 14(1) SET READ REQUEST LAST STATE
10DI5.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-STATION STATUS ON/OFF LAMP TEST POS 14(5) TOGGLE STATION STATUS & ILLUMINATE ALL LAST STATE
STATION INDICATORS
10DI5.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-CATHEAD #1/#2 SELECT REQUEST POS 14(4) SELECT CATHEAD #1 SELECT CATHEAD #2

KFELS B354
10DQ0.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU MASTER MOTOR START/STOP POS 18(1) ENERGIZE RLYA-1 FOR MASTER MOTOR TO START DE-ENERGIZE RLYA-1 FOR MASTER MOTOR TO - - -
10DQ0.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HPU SLAVE 1 MOTOR START/STOP POS 18(5) ENERGIZE RLYA-1 FOR SLAVE 1 MOTOR TO START STOP
DE-ENERGIZE RLYA-1 FOR SLAVE 1 MOTOR TO - - -
10DQ0.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 19(1) - -STOP - - -
10DQ0.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 19(5) - - - - -
10DQ1.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-STATION ACTIVE INDICATOR POS 20(1) CATHEAD CONTROL ACTIVE CATHEAD CONTROL UN-ACTIVE - - -
10DQ1.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-RST FREE ROTATE SOLENOID POS 23(1) FREE ROTATE SOLENOID ENERGIZED FREE ROTATE SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ1.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-RST LINEAR LOCK SOLENOID POS 23(5) LINEAR LOCK SOLENOID ENERGIZED LINEAR LOCK SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ1.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-RST CCW LOCK SOLENOID POS 24(1) CCW LOCK SOLENOID ENERGIZED CCW LOCK SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ1.7 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-RST POWER SLIPS UP SOLENOID POS 24(5) POWER SLIPS UP SOLENOID ENERGIZED POWER SLIPS UP SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ2.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-RST POWER SLIPS SET SOLENOID POS 25(1) POWER SLIPS SET SOLENOID ENERGIZED POWER SLIPS SET SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ2.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-GREASE PUMP SOLENOID POS 25(5) GREASE PUMP SOLENOID ENERGIZED GREASE PUMP SOLENOID DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ2.4 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HYD CATHEAD #1 PULL IN SOL POS 29(1) CATHEAD #1 PULL IN SOL ENERGIZED CATHEAD #1 PULL IN SOL DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ2.5 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HYD CATHEAD #1 PAY OUT SOL POS 29(5) CATHEAD #1 PAY OUT SOL ENERGIZED CATHEAD #1 PAY OUT SOL DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ2.6 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HYD CATHEAD #2 PULL IN SOL POS 30(1) CATHEAD #2 PULL IN SOL ENERGIZED CATHEAD #2 PULL IN SOL DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ2.7 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HYD CATHEAD #2 PAY OUT SOL POS 30(5) CATHEAD #2 PAY OUT SOL ENERGIZED CATHEAD #2 PAY OUT SOL DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ3.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HYD CATHEAD SLOW SOL POS 31(1) CATHEAD SLOW SOL ENERGIZED CATHEAD SLOW SOL DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10DQ3.1 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-HYD CATHEAD ENABLE SOL POS 31(5) HYD CATHEAD ENABLE SOL ENERGIZED HYD CATHEAD ENABLE SOL DE-ENERGIZED - - -
10AI7 4-20 mA. DP1 10 AUX-HYD CATHEAD #1 PRESS. XMITER POS 35(1) - - mA 4 20
10AI9 4-20 mA. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 35(5)
10AI11 4-20 mA. DP1 10 AUX-RIG AIR PRESSURE XMITER POS 36(1)
10AI13 4-20 mA. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 36(5) - - - - -
10AQ4 4-20 mA. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 37(1)

10IB15 Data DP1 10 MODULE 1 STATUS BYTE POS 39

10IDW16 Data DP1 10 MODULE 1 FREQUENCY VALUE(1/1000)Hz POS 39
10IB20 Data DP1 10 MODULE 1 RESERVED BYTE POS 39
10QB12 Data DP1 10 MODULE 1 CONTROL BYTE POS 39

10QW13 Data DP1 10 MODULE 1 RESERVED WORD POS 39
10QW15 Data DP1 10 MODULE 1 RESERVED WORD POS 39 - - - - -
10QB18 Data DP1 10 MODULE 1 STATUS BYTE POS 39
10DI21.0 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 41(1) - - - - -


KFELS B354
10DI21.2 24VDC N.I.S. DP1 10 AUX-LINEAR LOCK PROXIMITY SENSOR POS 42(1) - - - 0 1
10AI22 4-20 mA I.S DP1 10 AUX-RST TORQUE PRESS TRANSMITTER POS 43(3) - - mA 4 20
10AI24 4-20 mA I.S. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 43(7) - - mA 4 20
10AQ19 4-20 mA. DP1 10 AUX-LINE PULL GAUGE POS 44 (1) 1b 0 35,000
10AQ21 4-20 mA. DP1 10 AUX-SPARE POS 37 (5) - - -
11AI0 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Paremeter ID - - Torque 0 100%
11AI2 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Sub Index - - - - -
11ID4 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Parameter - - - - -
Value
11AI8 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Status Word - - - - -
11AI10 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Monitor - - - - -

11AQ0 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Parameter ID - - - - -
11AQ2 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Sub Index - - - - -
11AQ4 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Parameter - - - - -
Value
11DQ8.0 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Disable - - - - -
11DQ8.1 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Hold Enable - - - - -
11DQ8.2 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Device Mode - - - - -

Active Enable
11DQ8.3 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Reset Fault - - - - -
11AQ10 Data DP1 11 Hyd Cathead Proportional Solenoid - Setpoint - - - - -
16AI0 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - - - CW 0 100%

Paremeter ID Speed
16AI2 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - Sub - - CCW 0 -100%
Index Speed
16ID4 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - - - - - -
Parameter Value
16AI8 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - Status - - - - -
Word
16AI10 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - - - - - -
Monitor
16AQ0 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - - - - - -
Parameter ID
16AQ2 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - Sub - - - - -
Index
Parameter Value
16DQ8.0 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - - - - - -
Disable
16DQ8.1 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - Hold - - - - -
Enable
16DQ8.2 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - - - - - -
Device Mode Active Enable
16DQ8.3 Data DP1 16 RST CW/CCW Speed Proportional Solenoid - Reset - - - - -
Fault
Setpoint
17AI0 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Paremeter ID - - Torque 0 100%
17AI2 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Sub Index - - - - -
17ID4 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Parameter - - - - -
Value
17AI8 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Status Word - - - - -
17AI10 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Monitor - - - - -
17AQ0 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Parameter ID - - - - -
17AQ2 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Sub Index - - - - -

KFELS B354
17AQ4 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Parameter - - - - -
Value
17DQ8.0 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Disable - - - - -
17DQ8.1 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Hold Enable - - - - -
17DQ8.2 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Device Mode - - - - -
Active Enable
17DQ8.3 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Reset Fault - - - - -
17AQ10 Data DP1 17 RST Torque Proportional Solenoid - Setpoint - - - - -

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
Amphion Fiber Optic Cable Specification D801001614-SPC-001 02
www.nov.com
DWG NO. D801001614-SPC-001 SH 1 REV 02 TEXT DOCUMENT
APPLICATION REVISIONS
NEXT ASSY USED ON ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
REVISE ONLY IN MS WORD
Amphion Fiber Optic Cable
Specification
© 2007 National Oilwell Varco

THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED IN
ANY WAY WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF VARCO. 1530 West Sam Houston
VARCO OWNS ALL RIGHTS TO THIS WORK AND INTENDS TO
ENFORCE ITS RIGHTS UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS AS A
Parkway North
PUBLISHED WORK. Houston, TX 77043
APPROVALS DATE Amphion Fiber
DRAWN M. STEHLING 3/09/10
CHECK R. GALLEGOS 3/09/10 Specification
ENGINEER R. GALLEGOS 3/09/10 D801001614-SPC-001
A 38589 02
SCAL NONE SHEET 1 OF 3
E
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................................ 2
PURPOSE OF DOCUMENT ....................................................................................................................... 3

A 38589 D801001614-SPC-001 02
SCALE NONE SHEET 2 OF 3
1 Purpose of Document
This document defines the minimum requirements for fiber optic cable used to connect V-
ICIS Hardware. Connectors, Number of Fibers, Jacket Types, Jacket Material, Cable Types
and Manner of Splicing will vary.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPECIFICATION
MULTIMODE FIBER
a. FIBER SIZE-62.5/125 um
b. CAPACITY-Data rates up to 100 Mbps.
c. SYSTEM TYPE-Both data and voice.
d. DISTANCE-Used for links less than 5 km in length.
e. OPERATING WAVELENGTH-850 nm (first window) 1300 nm (second window)
f. ATTENUATION-850 nm is 3.3 to 5.0 dB/km, 1300 nm is .9 to 3 dB/km.
g. FIBER TYPE- Glass only.
h. METAL/CERAMIC Connectors.
<End of Specification

A 38589 D801001614-SPC-001 02
SCALE NONE SHEET 3 OF 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
2 4 Vendor Documentation
Chapter Not Applicable
www.nov.com
National Oilwell Varco Brands
Advanced Wirecloth Mission Downhole Solutions

Aktro Molde
Alberta Instrument Mono
Albin’s Enterprises Monoflo
AmClyde National
Baylor National Oilwell
Best Flow Products
BLM
Norson
Oil Tools Solutions Drilling Solutions
Bowen Oilwell
Brandt Omega Pumps
Cabot Pacific Inspection
Cardwell PCE
Chimo Equipment Peck-O-Matic
Continental Emsco PEP Engineering and Project Management
Cooper Procon As
Crestex Quality Tubing Solutions
Custom Die & Insert Rebound Rig
DELCO Retsco
Corporate Dreco RMI (Rig Manufacturing International)
Headquarters DSS (Drilling Support Services) Roberds Johnson
Eastern Oil Tools ROSS HILL
7909 Parkwood Circle Elmar Rucker Lifting and Handling Solutions
Drive EMD (Electro Motive Division) Russell Subservice
Houston, Texas 77036 Fibercast Sauerman
United States Fidmash Shaffer
Phone: +1 713 375 3700 Flanagan Ironworks Shearer
Phone: +1 1 888 262 8645 Franks Skytop Brewster
Gardner Denver (Hoisting) Smith Fiberglass Production Solutions
Gator Hawk Specialty
Gregory SSR
Griffith Stålprodukter
HALCO Star Fiberglass
Harrisburg Tech Power
Hepburn TEM (Tulsa Equipment Manufacturing)
HITEC Texas Oil Tools Supply Chain Solutions
Houston Scientific TS&M
Hydra Rig Tuboscope
Ideco Turner Oilfield Service
IPS (Integrated Power Systems) UNIFLEX
IRI International Unit (Cranes)
Koomey Universal Tubular and Corrosion Control
Kremco USF (Utility Steel Fabricators)
LOIS ALLIS Varco Solutions
Lucker Vector
M&W Versatech
M/D Totco Western Oilfield Engineering
Mathey Wheatley Gaso
MATTCO Wildcat Services
McElroy Marine Machinery Wilson Well Service and Completion Solutions
Miller Oilfield Woolley
www.nov.com
©National Oilwell Varco

Manual Nov

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Nov

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Nov

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What sections does the document contain?

What sections does the document contain?

Amphion Integrated Controls System

National Oilwell Varco References:

04 11.02.2016 For Information M. Littmann K. Martinez R. Gallegos

Revision Change Description

Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

1 1 General Information (Chapter Not Applicable)

1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance

1 2.2 Spare Parts List

2 3 Technical Documents & Drawings

2 3.1 General / Mechanical Drawings

2 3.2 System / Process Diagrams

2 3.3 Electrical / Instrument

2 3.4 Performance Data

2 4 Vendor Documentation (Chapter Not Applicable)

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Vol. Chapter/ Title

1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance

1 2.2 Spare Parts List

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Amphion Shipping and Preservation Requirements D801002013-SHP-001 02

REVISE ONLY IN MS WORD

Amphion Shipping and Preservation Requirements

© 2007 National Oilwell Varco NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO

2. Multi-Tool Control Cabinet

3. Stand-Alone Computers, J-boxes, and Sensors

SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO. REV

Grupo B354 Amphion Operator’s Guide

This document contains proprietary and confidential

Monica Dale Andrew

Rev Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved

Revision Change Description

Amphion™ GPL Statement

Chapter 1: General Information

Chapter 2: Amphion™ Overview

Profibus Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Chapter 3: Alarms and Events

Rotary Support Table (RST) Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Chapter 5: Chair (Workstation)

Fault and Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Auto Driller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Chapter 7: Driller Auxiliaries

Chapter 8: Mud Pumps

Chapter 9: Power System

Chapter 10: Top Drive System (TDS)

Joystick Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Appendix A: Network Information

This section of the manual contains examples of Amphion

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

The note symbol indicates that additional information is

The warning symbol indicates a definite risk of

Failure to follow the recommendations in NOV Product

General System Safety Practices

 Isolate energy sources before beginning work.

Proper Use of Equipment

This section of the manual contains examples of Amphion